Itye Mnftiergitp OF prtttsif) Columbia CALENDAR FOURTEENTH SESSION 1928 - 1929 VANCOUVER. BRITISH COLUMBIA 1928 -i Wbt ^ntesttp OF prtttsff) Columbia CALENDAR Fourteenth Session 1928-1929 VANCOUVER, BRITISH COLUMBIA 1928 ■PKPOPPiPiMi i i ii ^^ > If " V* - _ > . ^ i min ,i mm CONTENTS Page Academic Year 6 Visitor : 7 Chancellor 7 President 7 The Board of Governors 7 The Senate 7 Officers and Staff 8 Historical Sketch 15 The Constitution of the University 17 The Work of the University 18 Retiring Allowances 19 Endowments and Donations 20 Suggested Local Scholarships 23 The Library 24 New Buildings 25 General Information 38 Admission to the University 41 Registration and Attendance 43 Fees 46 Medals, Scholarships and Prizes m .^J. 48 Faculty of Arts and Science Time Table of Lectures 62 Time Table of Supplemental Examinations 66 Regulations in Reference to Courses First and Second Years 68 Third and Fourth Years—Pass 71 Third and Fourth Years—Honours 72 For the M.A. Degree 78 Examinations and Advancement 84 Courses of Instruction— Department of Bacteriology 86 " Botany 88 " Chemistry 93 " Classics 98 " Economics, Sociology and Political Science 102 " Education 107 " English 112 " Geology and Geography 119 " History 124 " " Mathematics 131 " " Modern Languages :.... 135 " Philosophy 140 " " Physics 143 " Zoology 145 Faculty op Applied Science Foreword 149 Regulations in Reference to Courses 151 General Outline of Courses 153 Courses in— Chemical Engineering 155 Chemistry 156 Civil Engineering 158 Electrical Engineering 160 JV SB* """^PilPlF The University of British Columbia Forest Engineering 161 Geological Engineering 163 Mechanical Engineering 165 Metallurgical Engineering 166, 168 Mining Engineering 166, 169 Nursing and Health 170 Double Course in Arts and Applied Science 178 Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A.Sc 178 Examinations and Advancement 180 Courses of Instruction— Department of Botany 182 " Chemistry 186 " " Civil Engineering 189 " Economics 200 " " Forestry 201 " " Geology and Geography 206 " Mathematics 211 " " Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 212 " " Mining and Metallurgy 224 " Physics 228 " Nursing and Health 230 " Zoology 235 Faculty of Agriculture Time Table of Lectures 238 Regulations in Reference to Courses— For the B.S.A. Degree 241 The Occupational Course 241 Short Courses 242 Extension Courses 242 Graduate Work 243, 248 Courses in— Agronomy Major 245 Animal Husbandry Major 246 Dairying Major 246 Horticulture Major 247 Poultry Husbandry Major 247 Botany (Plant Pathology) Major 247 Zoology (Entomology) Major 248 Examinations and Advancement 249 Courses of Instruction— Department of Agronomy 252 " Animal Husbandry 255 " Dairying 258 " Horticulture 261 " Poultry Husbandry 264 " Agricultural Economics 267 List of Students in Attendance, Session 1927-28 269 Degrees Conferred, 1927 304 Medals, Scholarships and Prizes Awarded, 1927 309 Summer Session 313 Student Organization 314 Affiliated Colleges— Victoria College 319 The Anglican Theological College of British Columbia 320 Union College of British Columbia 320 Academic Year ACADEMIC YEAR 1928-1929 1928 Monday, August 27th. Wednesday, September 12th. Tuesday, September 18th. Wednesday, September 19th, Friday, September 21st. Monday, September 24th. Monday, October 8th. Saturday, 1 October 13th. Wednesday, October 17th. Friday, December 7th. Monday, December 10th. Wednesday, December 19th. Thursday, December 20th. Matriculation Supplemental Examination! begin. Supplemental Examinations in Arts begin Supplemental Examinations in Applied Science begin. Last day for Registration of First Year Students in the Faculties of Arts and Science, and Agriculture. Last day for Registration of all other students. Lectures begin. Last day for payment of First Term fees. Last day for Change in Students' Courses. Meeting of the Senate. Last day of Lectures for Term. Examinations begin. Meeting of the Senate. Examinations end. »^IW*« The University of British Columbia 1929 Monday, January 7th. Monday, January 21st. Wednesday, February 20th. Thursday, April llth. Monday, April 15th. Thursday, April 25th. Wednesday, May 8th. Thursday, May 9th. Thursday, May 9th. Monday, June 24th. Friday, August 30th. Second Term begins. L Last day for payment of Second Term fee& Meeting of the Senate. Last day of Lectures. > Sessional Examinations begin. Field Work in Applied Science begins immediately at the close of the Examinations. } Last day for payment of Graduation fees. J Meeting of the Senate. Congregation. Meeting of Convocation. Junior Matriculation Examinations begin. (Date of Senior Matriculation Examinations to be arranged.) Meeting of the Senate. THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA VISITOR The Hon. R. Randolph Bruce, Lieutenant-Governor of British Columbia. CHANCELLOR R. E. McKechnie, Esa., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.CS. PRESIDENT L. S. Klinck, Esa., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D. BOARD OF GOVERNORS R. E. McKechnie, Esa., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.C.S. (ex officio). L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D. (ex officio). Mbs. Evltn F. K. Farris, M.A., LL.D., Vancouver. Term expires 1929. Denis Murphy, Hon. Mb. Justice, Vancouver. Term expires 1929. Henet C Shaw, Esa., B.A., Vancouver. Term expires 1929. Robie L. Reid, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1931. Campbell Sweeny, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1931. Christopher Spencer, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1931. B. C. Nicholas, Esq., Victoria. Term expires 1933. Joseph N. Ellis, Esq., B.C.L., K.C, Vancouver. Term expires 1933. W. H. Malkin, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1933. SENATE (a) The Minister of Education, The Honourable John Duncan MacLean, M.D., CM., LL.D. The Chancellor. The President (Chairman). (6) Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, F. M. Clement, Esq., B.S.A., M.A. Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science, Reginald W. Brock, Esq., M.A, LL.D., F.G.S., F.R.S.C. Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, H. T. J. Coleman, Esq., B.A., Ph.D. Representatives of the Faculty of Agriculture: H. M. Kino, Esq., B.S.A., M.S.; A. F. Barss, Esq., A.B., B.S. in Agr., M.S. Representatives of the Faculty of Applied Science: William E. Duckering, Esq., A.B., B".S. in C.E., C.E.; R. H. Clark, Esq., M.A., Ph.D. Representatives of the Faculty of Arts and Science: Henry F. Angus, Esq., B.A., B.C.L., M.A.; M. Y. Williams, Esq., B.Sc., PhD., F.G.S.A., F.R.S.C The University op British Columbia (c) Appointed by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council:— His Honour Peter S. Lampman, Victoria. James Henderson, Esq., M.A., Vancouver. James A. Campbell, Esq., B.A., Vancouver. (d) The Superintendent of Education, S. J. Willis, Esq., B.A., LL.D. The Principal of Vancouver Normal School, D. M. Robinson, Esq., B.A. The Principal of Victoria Normal School, D. L. MacLaurin, Esq., B.A (e) Representative of High School Principals and Assistants, (/) Representatives of Affiliated Colleges:— Victoria College, Victoria, P. H. Elliott, Esq., M.Sc. Union College of British Columbia, Vancouver (Theological), Rev. J. G. Brown, M.A., D.D. The Anglican Theological College of British Columbia, Vancouver, Rev. W. H. Vance, M.A., D.D. (g) Elected by Convocation:— T. H. Boggs, Esq., M.A., Ph.D., Vancouver. G. G. Sedgewick, Esq., B.A., Ph.D., Vancouver. His Honour F. W. Howay, LL.B., F.R.S.C, New Westminster. A. E. Lord, Esa., B.A., Vancouver. Sherwood Lett, Esa-, B.A., Vancouver. A. E. Richards, Esq., B.S.A., Agassiz. Rev. A. H. Sovereign, M.A., B.D., F.R.G.S., Vancouver. His Honour J. D. Swanson, B.A., Kamloops. G. W. Scott, Esq., B.A., Vancouver. Mrs. Beatrice Wood, B.A.Sc, Vancouver. C Killam, Esq., M.A., LL.B., D.C.L., Vancouver. Miss A. B. Jamieson, B.A., Vancouver. The Most Rev. A. U. de Pencier, M.A., D.D., Vancouver. Sydney Anderson, Esq., B.A.Sc, Vancouver. W B. Bubnett, Esq., B.A., M.D., CM., F.A.CS., Vancouver. OFFICERS AND STAFF L. S. Klinck, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S.A, D.Sc. (Iowa State College), LL.D. (Western Ontario), President. H. T. J. Coleman, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Columbia), Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science. Reginald W. Brock, M.A, LL.D. (Queen's), F.G.S, F.R.S.C, Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science. F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture. Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Columbia), Dean of Women. Stanley W. Mathews, M.A. (Queen's), Registrar. Miss E. B. Abernethy, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Registrar. F. Dallas, Bursar. John Ridington, Librarian. —r~r~ Officers and Staff Department of Agronomy P. A. Boving, Cand. Ph. (Malmo, Sweden), Cand. Agr. (Alnarp. Agriculture, Sweden), Professor and Head of the Department. G. G. Moe, B.S.A, M.Sc (McGill), Associate Professor. D. G. Laird, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Wisconsin), Assistant Professor. Geo. B. Boving, B.S.A. (McGill), Assistant. Cecil A. Lamb, B.S.A. (Brit. Col.), M.S.A. (McGill), Assistant Department of Animal Husbandry H. M. King, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Oregon Agricultural College), Professor and Head of the Department. R. L. Davis, B.S. (Montana), M.S. (Iowa State College), Assistant Professor. H. R. Hare, B.S.A (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Assistant Professor. J. G. Jehvis, V.S. (Ont. Vet. Col.), B.V.Sc. (Toronto), Lecturer in Veterinary Science. Department of Bacteriology Hibbert Winslow Hill, M.B, M.D, D.P.H. (Toronto), L.M.C.C. Professor and Head of the Department. ▲ Miss Freda L. Wilson, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Instructor. Miss Helen M. Mathews, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Department of Botany Andrew H. Hutchinson, M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor and Head of the Department. John Davidson, F.L.S, F.B.S.E, Assistant Professor. Frank Dickson, B.A. (Queen's), Associate Professor, Miss Jean Davidson, M.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant. R. W. Pillsbury, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. Miss Dorothy Newton, B.S.A, M.Sc. (McGill), Assistant. Department of Chemistry Robert H. Clark, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Leipsig), Professor and Head of the Department. E. H. Archibald, B.Sc. (Dal.), A.M, Ph.D. (Harvard), F.R.S.E.&C, Professor of Analytical Chemistry. W. F. Seyer, B.A, M.Sc (Alberta), Ph.D. (McGill), Associate Professor. M. J. Marshall, M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Mass. Inst, of Technology), Associate Professor. J. Allen Harris, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Illinois), Assistant Professor. John Allardyce, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Instructor. D. F. Stedman, B.A.Sc (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (London), Instructor. A. F. Gallaugher, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. R. H. Ball, B.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant. H. R. L. Streight, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. A. Ernest Morell, B.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant Hazes Nunn, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. 10 The University of British Columbia Department of Civil Engineering William E. Duckering, A.B, B.S. in C.E, C.E. (Washington), Professor and Head of the Department. E. G. Matheson, B.A.Sc. (McGill), M.E.I.C, M.Am.S.CE, Associate Professor. F. A. Wilkin, B.A.Sc. (McGill), Assistant Professor. Allan H. Finlay, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), M.S. in CE. (Illinois), Assistant Professor. A Lighthall, B.Sc. (McGill), Assistant Professor. A. G. Stuart, B.Sc. (McGill), Instructor. Arthur H. Lang, B.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant. Department of Classics Lemuel Robertson, M.A. (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department. O. J. Todd, Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor of Greek. H. T. Logan, M.C, B.A. (McGill and Oxon), M.A. (Oxon), Associate Professor. Geoffrey B. Riddehough, B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (California), Instructor. H. R. Trumpour, M.A. (Toronto), B.D, Assistant. Miss Day Walker, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. Miss Winifred E. Boyes, B.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant. Department of Dairying Wilfrid Sadler, B.S.A, M.Sc. (McGill), N.D.D, British Dairy Institute, University College, Reading, England, Professor and Head of the Department. N. S. Golding, N.D.A, N.D.D, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.Sc. (Iowa), Associate Professor. I Hugh L. A. Tarr, B.S.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. Department of Economics, Sociology and Political Science Theodore H. Boggs, B.A. (Acadia and Yale), M.A, Ph.D. (Yale), Professor and Head of the Department. Henry F. Angus, B.A. (McGill), B.C.L, M.A. (Oxon), Associate Professor. S. E. Beckett, M.A. (Queen's), Associate Professor. Mrs. Doris E. Lazenby, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Department of Education George M. Weir, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Sask.), D.Paed. (Queen's), Professor and Head of the Department. Mrs. Jennie Benson Wyman,.B.A, M.Sc. (New Zealand), A.M, Ph.D. (Stanford), Associate Professor of Psychology and Education. H. T. J. Coleman, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Columbia), Special Lecturer. Department of English G. G. Sedgewick, B.A. (Dal.), Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor and Head of the Department. W. L. MacDonald, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor. Officers and Staff 11 Frederick G. C Wood, B.A. (McGill), A.M. (Harvard), Associate Professor. Thorleif Larsen, M.A. (Toronto), B.A. (Oxon), Associate Professor. Francis Cox Walker, B.A. (U.N.B.), A.M, Ph.D. (Harvard), Associate Professor. Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Columbia), Assistant Professor. Frank H. Wilcox, A.B, Ph.D. (Calif.), Assistant Professor. Philip Albert Child, B.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Harvard), Assistant Professor. Charles G. D. Roberts, M.A, LL.D, Special Lecturer. Miss Dorothy Blakey, M.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Toronto), Assistant. Miss M. D. Mawdsley, B.A. (McGill), Assistant. Edmund Morrison, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Department of Forestry H. R. Christie, B.Sc.F. (Toronto), Professor and Head of the Department. F. Malcolm Knapp, B.S.F. (Syracuse), M.S.F. (Wash.), Assistant Professor. Department of Geology and Geography R. W. Brock, M.A, LL.D. (Queen's), F.G.S, F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department. S. J. Schofield, M.A, B.Sc (Queen's), Ph.D. (Mass. Institute of Technology), F.G.S.A, F.R.S.C, Professor of Physical and Structural Geology. M. Y. Williams, B.S.c. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Yale), F.G.S.A, F.R.S.C, Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy. T. C Phemister, B.Sc. (Glasgow), ScM. (Chicago), Ph.D. (Glasgow), Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrology. Joseph Kania, B.A.Sc. (Brit Col.), Assistant. Department of History D. C Harvey, B.A. (Dal.), M.A. (Oxford), Professor and Head of the Department. W. N. Sage, B.A. (Toronto and Oxon), M.A. (Oxon), Ph.D. (Toronto), Professor. F. H. Soward, B.A. (Toronto), B.Litt. (Oxon), Assistant Professor. Francis Painter, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Special Lecturer. Kaye Lamb, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. Walter Lanning, B.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant. Department of Horticulture F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Professor and Head of the Department. A. F. Barss, A.B. (Rochester), B.S. in Agr. (Cornell), M.S. (Oregon Agricultural College), Professor. F. E. Buck, B.S.A. (McGill), Associate Professor. 12 The University of British Columbia Department of Mathematics Daniel Buchanan, M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department. F. S. Nowlan, B.A. (Acadia), A.M. (Harvard), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor. George E. Robinson, B.A. (Dal.), Associate Professor. E. E. Jordan, M.A. (Dal.), Associate Professor. L. Richardson, B.Sc. (London), Associate Professor. B. S. Hartley, M.A. (Cambridge), R.N. (retired), Assistant Professor. Miss May L. Barclay, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. Miss C Islay Johnston, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. A. P. Mellish, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. H. D. Smith, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. C. G. Patten, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering Herbert Vickers, M.E. (Liverpool), M.Sc, Ph.D. (Birmingham), Professor and Head of the Department. F. W. Vernon, B.Sc.Eng. (London), Wh.Sch, A.M.I.Mech.E, A.F. R.A.S, Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering. H. F. G. Letson, M.C, B.Sc (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. Engineering (London), A.M.I. Mech.E, Assistant Professor of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering. Leonard B. Stacey, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering. G. Sinclair Smith, M.A.Sc. (McGill), Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering. John F. Bell, Eng. Capt. O.B.E, R.N, M.E.I.C, Instructor in Mechanical Engineering. H. P. Archibald, B.A.Sc. (McGill), Assistant in Drawing. Department of Mining and Metallurgy J. M. Turnbull, B.A.Sc. (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department H. N. Thomson, B.Sc. (McGill), Professor of Metallurgy. George A. Gillies, M.Sc. (McGill), Associate Professor of Mining. W. B. Bishop, Assistant in Metallurgy. Department of Modern Languages H. Abhton, M.A. (Cantab), D. Lett. (Univ. Paris), D. Litt. (Birmingham), F.R.S.C, Officier de l'Instruction Publique (France), Professor and Head of the Department. A. F. B. Clark, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Harvard), Associate Professor of French. (On leave of absence 1928-29). Miss Isabel MacInnes, M.A. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Calif.), Associate Professor of Modern Languages. Henri Chodat, M.A. (McGill and Harvard), Officier d'Academie (France), Associate Professor of French. Officers anb Staff 13 Miss Janet T. Greig, B.A. (Queen's), M.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant Professor of French. E. E. Delavault, L. en D. (Paris), Assistant in French. Madame G. Barry, Assistant in French. Miss Madge Portsmouth, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant in French. Miss S. J. Battle, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant in German. Miss Wessie Tipping, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant in French. Madame Yvonne Doriot, Assistant in French. Department of Nursing and Health Hibbert Winslow Hill, M.B, M.D, D.P.H. (Toronto), L.M.CC, Professor and Head of the Department. Miss Mabel F. Gray, R.N, CertP.H.N. (Simmons College), Assistant Professor of Nursing. Department of Philosophy H. T. J. Coleman, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Columbia), Professor and Head of the Department. James Henderson, M.A. (Glasgow), Associate Professor. Mrs. Jennie Benson Wyman, B.A, M.Sc. (New Zealand), A.M., Ph.D. (Stanford), Associate Professor of Psychology and Education. Department of Physics T. C Hebb, M.A, B.Sc. (Dal.), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor and Head of the Department. A A. E. Hennings, M.A. (Lake Forest College, 111.), Ph.D. (Chicago), Associate Professor. J. G. Davidson, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Cal.), Associate Professor. Gordon Merritt Shrum, M.A, Ph.D. (Toronto), Associate Professor. H. W. Fowler, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. Department of Poultry Husbandry E. A. Lloyd, B.S.A. (Sask.), M.S.A. (Washington State College), Professor and Head of the Department. V. S. Asmundson, B.S.A. (Sask.), M.S.A. (Cornell), Associate Professor. W. J. Riley, B.S.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. Department of Zoology C McLean Fraser, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Iowa), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department. G. J. Spencer, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Illinois), Assistant Professor. Miss Gertrude M. Smith, M.A (Brit Col.), Instructor. Miss Mildred H. Campbell, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Harold White, M.D, CM. (McGill), Medical Examiner to Students. Mrs. C A. Lucas, R.N, Public Health Nurse. eP* * V THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA HISTORICAL SKETCH The creation of a University in British Columbia was first advocated by Superintendent Jessop in 1877, but it was not until 1890 that the Provincial Legislature passed an Act establishing a body politic and corporate named '' The University of British Columbia.'' In 1891 this Act was amended to require that a meeting of the Senate be held within one month after the election of the Senators by Convocation. The Senators were elected, but a quorum did not assemble on the date fixed by the Chancellor, Dr. I. W. Powell, of Victoria. Thus the first attempt to establish a University in British Columbia failed. However, some of the work normally done in a University was begun in 1894, when an Act was passed which permitted the affiliation of high schools in the Province with recognized Canadian Universities. In 1899 Vancouver High School was affiliated with McGill University in order to provide First Year work in Arts, and took the name of Vancouver College. First Year work in Arts was offered by Victoria High School when it became Victoria College by affiliation with McGill University in 1902. In the same year Vancouver College undertook the Second Year in Arts. . In 1906 an Act was passed incorporating the Royal Institution for the Advancement of Learning of British Columbia, which, in the same year, established at Vancouver the McGill University College of British Columbia. The scope of the work undertaken by this college was gradually increased until at the time it was taken over by the University of British Columbia it was giving three years in Arts and Science, and two years in Applied Science. "When the University of British Columbia opened in the autumn of 1915, both the McGill University College of Vancouver and Victoria College, which since 1907 had been a part of it, ceased to exist. 16 The University of British Columbia Definite steps to establish the University were taken by Dr. H. B. Young, Minister of Education, in 1907, when he introduced a "University Endowment Act." This Act was followed in 1908 by an Act establishing and incorporating the University of British Columbia and repealing the old Act of 1890-1. This Act, with its subsequent amendments, determines the present constitution of the University. As authorized by an Act passed by the Provincial Legislature in 1910, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed a Site Commission to decide upon a site for the proposed University. The Commission held its first meeting on May 25th, 1910, in Victoria, and after a thorough examination of the Province recommended the vicinity of Vancouver. In the autumn the Executive Council decided to place the University at Point Grey—the site which the Commission had named as its first choice. In 1911 the Legislature passed an Act authorizing the Lieutenant-Governor in Council to grant this site to the University. The grant was increased in 1915, so that it now consists of 548 acres at the extremity of Point Grey. The waters of the Gulf of Georgia form more than half the boundary of the University Campus. A tract of some 3,000 acres of Government land immediately adjoining the site, and lying between it and the City of Vancouver, has been set aside by the Government in order that University revenue may be provided by its sale or lease. In February, 1912, the Hon. H. E. Young, Minister of Education, called for competitive plans which should include plans in detail for four buildings to be erected immediately, and a block plan showing all the proposed buildings on the Campus. Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, of Vancouver, B. C, were the successful competitors, and were appointed University architects. The first Convocation, held on August 1st, 1912, chose Mr. F. L. Carter-Cotton as first chancellor of the University. In March, 1913, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed as President of the University F. F. Wesbrook, M.A, M.D, C.M, LL.D. On April 4th, 1918, Dr. B. E. McKechnie was elected «.S»l Historical Sketch 17 Chancellor; on April 12th, 1921, he was re-elected for a second term; on April 3rd, 1924, for a third term, and on April 7th, 1927, for a fourth term. On the death of President Wesbrook, October 20th, 1918, L. S. Klinck, Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, was appointed acting President, and on June 1st, 1919, President. From its opening in 1915 till the Summer of 1925, the University carried on its work in temporary quarters on part of the site of the General Hospital in Fairview. Construction work was commenced on the Science Building at the permanent site in Point Grey in 1914, but was interrupted because of war conditions. Work on this building was resumed in 1923, and in the Autumn of the same year the contract was let for the Library. These two buildings which are of stone and are fire-proof, conform closely to the original plans as prepared by the architects in 1914. The initial units of these structures, as well as nine other buildings which are of a less permanent character and are described at a later page in this Calendar, were completed in 1925, and at the beginning of Session 1925-26 the University commenced work in its new quarters. The Inauguration of the new buildings was held on October 15th and 16th, 1925, on which occasion honorary degrees were granted by the University for the first time. THE CONSTITUTION OF THE UNIVERSITY The Constitution of the University is governed by the British Columbia University Act B.C.E.S. 1924 c. 265, which provides That the University shall consist of a Chancellor, Convocation, Board of Governors, Senate, and the Faculties; that the first Convocation shall consist of all graduates of any university in His Majesty's dominions resident in the Province two years prior to the date fixed for the first meeting of Convocation, together with twenty-five members selected by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council. After the first Convocation it shall consist of the Chancellor, Senate, members of the first Convoca- 18 The University of British Columbia tion, and all graduates of the University; that the Chancellor shall be elected by Convocation; that the Board of Governors shall consist of the Chancellor, President, and nine persons appointed by the Lieutenant Governor in Council; that the Senate shall consist of: (a) The Minister of Education, the Chancellor, and the President of the University, who shall be Chairman thereof; (b) the deans and two professors of each of the Faculties elected by members of the Faculty; (c) three members to be appointed by the Lieutenant- Governor in Council; (d) the Superintendent of Education, the principals of the normal schools; (e) one member elected by the high-school principals and assistants who are actually engaged in teaching; (/) one member elected by the Provincial Teachers' Institute organized under subsection (e) of section 8 of the "Public Schools Act"; (g) one member to be elected by the governing body of every affiliated college or school in this Province; (h) fifteen members to be elected by Convocation from the members thereof; It is further provided that the University shall be non- sectarian. The University Act gives the University full powers to grant such degrees in the several Faculties and different branches of Knowledge as the Senate may from time to time determine. It reserves for the University the sole right in this Province to confer degrees, except in Theology, and it expressly enacts that "No other university having corporate powers capable of being exercised within the Province shall be known by the same name, nor shall any such university have power to grant degrees.'' THE WORK OF THE UNIVERSITY The University of British Columbia is an integral part of the public educational system of the Province, and its function is to complete the work begun in the public and high schools. Retiring Allowances 19 It is the policy of the University to promote education in general, and in particular to serve its constituency through three channels—teaching, research, and extension work. As regards teaching, the University furnishes instruction in the various branches of a liberal education and in those technical departments which • are most directly related to the life and industries of the Province. The scope of the teaching activity of the University is fully described in Sec. 9 of the Act. In order to make the teaching of the University more vital and for the advancement of knowledge, research is encouraged in every department. The people of the Province are informed of the results of special work by the staff of the University through a system of extension lectures. The University sends lecturers to various parts of the Province during the examination weeks in December and April. In the case of places which can be visited without prejudice to the duties of the lecturer at the University, lectures are arranged to take place during the University term. A list of subjects and lecturers can be obtained on application to the Secretary of the Extension Lecture Committee, through whom all arrangements are made. RETIRING ALLOWANCES In March, 1924, the Board of Governors of the University of British polumbia adopted the contributory plan of retiring allowances for members of the teaching staff. Contracts are placed with the Teachers' Insurance and Annuity Association of America, a corporation made possible by the Carnegie Corporation "to provide insurance and annuities for teachers and other persons employed by colleges, by universities, or by institutions engaged primarily in educational or research work." In May, 1924, the University of British Columbia was elected as a member of the list of institutions associated with the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching and received a grant of $50,000.00, payable in ten annual installments, for the purpose of providing supplementary annuities for the older professors of the institution. 20 The University of British Columbia ENDOWMENTS AND DONATIONS However well supported by public funds, a University must depend to a great extent upon private benefactors. In anticipation of endowments the Act provides that: "Any person or corporation may, with the approval of tha Senate, found one or more professorships, lectureships, fellowships, scholarships, exhibitions, prizes, or other awards in the University, by providing a sufficient endowment in land or other property, and conveying the same to the University for such purposes, and every such endowment of lands or other property shall be vested in the University for the purpose or purposes for which it is given." Only a limited number are in a position to make endowments, but many—including alumni and friends of higher education—may add greatly to the usefulness of the University by making contributions that lie within their power. It is gratifying to note that the number of those who assist in this way has been constantly growing. The removal of the University to its permanent home in Point Grey has greatly stimulated interest in its welfare and progress, and within the last two years many valuable donations have been received, especially in the form of equipment for the various Laboratories. Among donations received recently special mention should be made of the very fine Ethnological collection representing the arts, handicraft and weapons of Polynesia donated to the University by Mr. Frank Burnett, Sr, and also of the estate of the late Mr. David Thom, of Hammond, B. C, bequeathed by him to the Faculty of Agriculture. Mr. Thom left his entire estate, consisting of a farm of thirty-five acres and cash and bonds amounting to fifty-five hundred dollars—a total net value of approximately eleven thousand dollars, to be used for the assistance and encouragement of students in the Faculty of Agriculture. The Royal Institution for the Advancement of Learning of British Columbia presented to the University a life-size Endowments and Donations 21 portrait of the late Francis Lovett Carter-Cotton, LL.D, first Chancellor of The University of British Columbia. The painting is by Mr. F. Horsman Varley, A.R.C.A. At a public ceremony presided over by the Chancellor of the University, the Governor of the Hudson's Bay Company, Mr. Charles V. Sale, presented to the University the collection of paintings known as the Hudson's Bay Company and the Native Sons of British Columbia Permanent Loan Collection. These valuable historical canvasses, eight in number, represent early scenes in the history of the Province of British Columbia. The pictures were painted by Mr. John Innes, of Vancouver, and are hung in the Library. The subjects are: 1. Commander Vancouver's meeting with Spaniards off Point Grey, A.D. 1792. 2. Alexander Mackenzie recording his arrival at the Pacific, A.D. 1793. 3. Simon Fraser in the Fraser Canyon on his journey to the sea, A.D. 1808.T J k V 4. The Hudson's Bay Company's fur brigade passing down the Okanagan, A.D. 1825-35. 5. James Douglas building the Hudson's Bay Post at Victoria, A.D. 1843. 6. James Douglas taking the oath as first Governor of British Columbia, A.D. 1858. 7. Finding of placer gold by pioneer miners in the Cariboo, about A.D. 1858. 8. The overland pioneers journeying through the Rockies, A.D. 1862. A list of the other most important gifts received during last year is given below under the various departments. 22 The University of British Columbia Department of Botany (For Herbarium and Botanical Gardens) SEEDS Royal Botanic Gardens, Edinburgh. Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew (England). New York Botanical Gardens. Brooklyn Botanical Gardens. Botanic Garden, Darjeeling. Botanic Garden, Polonia. Arnold Arboretum, Massachusetts. Mr. John Hutchison, Victoria. Dr. G. B. Sudworth, Washington, D.C. Dr. O. Malte, Ottawa. Prof. F. J. Lewis, Edmonton. R. Salgues, Brignoles, France. Odessa Botanical Gardens, Odessa. HERBARIUM SPECIMENS Prof. M. L. Fernald, Gray Herbarium. J. W. Adams, University of Pennsylvania. Dr. G. A. Purpus, Mexico. Prof. W. L. Jepson, University of California. Miss J. Bostock, Monte Creek, B. C. Mrs. J. P. MacFadden, New Denver, B. C. R. Glendenning, Esq., Agassiz. A. E. Pickford, Esq., Victoria. Department of Forestry J. Fyfe Smith & Co., Ltd.—Exhibit woods. North American and foreign. Dominion Forest Service—Hand specimen collection of Canadian woods; forestry publications. New York State College of Forestry—Hand specimen collection of American woods. United States Forest Service—Hand specimen collection of American woods; forestry publications. Arthur Woodhouse—Six blueprints showing details of logging railroad structures. Forests Department, Government of Western Australia—Exhibit specimens of commercial woods of Western Australia. Department of Geology Broken Hill Mining Managers' Association, Australia—Suite of ores. Britannia Mines, B. C.—Suite of ores. B. C. Nicholas—Geological survey of Canada reports. Crow's Nest Pass Coal Co. Ltd.—Museum specimens of coal. Major A. W. Davis—Suite of ores and rocks from the Monarch Mine and Kicking Horse Mine at Field. J. Giegerich—Suite of rocks and ores from Chuquicamata, Chili. F. F. Osborne—Minerals from Eastern Ontario and New York. Dr. S. J. Schofield—Suite of rocks and ores from the Galena Farm Mine, B. C. C. H. Stockwell—Rocks and ores. S. S. Saunders—Metallic arsenic. Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering Messrs. The B. C. Electric Railway Co.—Rotary converter, special transformer, switch panel and instruments complete. All new and ordered by us. The bill paid by the B. C. Electric. Messrs. The B. C. Electric Railway Co.—Single-phase rotary converter (used). Messrs. The B. C. Electric Railway Co.—Standard bridge. Messrs. The B. C. Electric Railway Co.—Siemens dynamometer and collection of instruments. Messrs. Park Royal Engineering Co., London, England—Two switch panels, switches, circuit breakers and instruments to control Metropolitan Vickers generators. Messrs. Park Royal Engineering Co., London, England—Case of instruments, ammeters, voltmeters, etc. Messrs. Ferranti, Ltd., London, England—Two cases of instruments, ammeters, voltmeters, frequency meters, current- transformers. Messrs. Brook Ltd., Huddersfield, England—Squirrel cage induction motor, 10 H.P. Messrs. Brittain, Ltd., London, England—Slip ring induction motor, 5 H.P. Messrs. Reyrolle & Co., Newcastle-on-Tyne—Switch-gear mining panel, with relays, etc. Suggested Local Scholarships 23 Messrs. Reyrolle & Co., Newcastle-on-Tyne—Wall plugs and fittings. Messrs. The British Insulated & Helsby Cable CO.—Two cases of cable samples. The Provincial Government—Compound engine and boiler. Mr. Robert Sweatt, Vancouver—Coppus blower. Messrs. The Hart Accumulator Co., Quebec—Accumulator panel. Messrs. The Prestolite Battery Co., Vancouver—Six large car batteries. Messrs. George Ellison, Birmingham, England—Switch gear, auto starters, star delta starters, slip-ring resistance starters and oil switches. Messrs. Chas. Taylor & Co., Birmingham, England—Patent lathe, chuck and vice. Dr. R. E. McKechnie, Vancouver—X-ray equipment. In addition, the majority of the units in the Electrical and Mechanical Engt neering Laboratories have been supplied by the makers at cost price. SUGGESTED LOCAL SCHOLARSHIPS As the number of Matriculation Scholarships offered at present is quite inadequate to the needs of the Province, a scheme which has great possibilities both for the growth of the University and the prosperity of the Province is earnestly recommended to consideration. In the large universities, both of Great Britain and the United States, local or district scholarships have proved a strong bond between the community and the University, have brought the University close to the life of the young, and opened up the prospect of a University education to many who would not otherwise have contemplated it. Such local or district scholarships might be established as Matriculation Scholarships, by City or Municipal Councils or other public bodies, or by private benefactors. They would be awarded by a local authority, but the University would reserve the right of confirmation. In awarding such scholarships, standing in the Matriculation Examination need not be the only consideration. It is desirable that regard should be had also to financial circumstances, character, and intellectual promise. Scholarships may be offered for students taking a particular course, and in this way the study of such sciences and technical branches of knowledge as have special) importance for the industries of the district may be encouraged. In short, local scholarships may be arranged to meet local needs and to prepare the native sons of the Province to play their part in the development of its resources. 24 The University of British Columbia THE LIBRARY The University Library consists of 65,000 volumes and about 10,000 pamphlets. It includes representative works in all the courses offered by the University, and a growing collection of works on other subjects. The Library receives regularly about 500 magazines and periodical publications. The book collection is classified throughout on the Congressional system. Books can be borrowed by students for a period of seven days, or for a shorter time should the work be in general demand. Books to which the teaching staff have specially referred their students are placed in a "Reserved" class. These are shelved apart from the main collection, and are loaned only for use in the building, and for a limited period of two hours. They may, however, be taken from the Library for over-night loan, or for any period in which the Library is closed. In these cases they are returnable before 9 a.m., or, in the case of students of classes meeting at 8:45 a.m., before 10 a.m. Unbound periodicals are not loaned. Bound periodicals, and books that are costly, rare, or unsuitable for general circulation, are loaned only under special conditions. While the Library is primarily for the use of the staff and students of the University, its resources are available to those of the general public engaged in research or special study, and who make personal application to the Librarian for the privilege of its use. During the session the Library is open on week days from 8:45 a.m. to 9:45 p.m., except on Saturdays, when the hour of closing is 5 p.m. In vacation it is open from 9 a.m. to 4 p.m., except on Saturdays, when the hours are from 9 a.m. to noon. The University is deeply indebted to all who have made gifts to the Library during the past year. These have been both valuable and numerous. Their number prevents detailed acknowledgment, but recognition should be made of a number of sets of transactions, and complete or partial sets of scientific periodicals, given by societies and friends of the University. NEW BUILDINGS LOCATION The new home of the University is situated on the promontory which forms the western extremity of the Point Grey Peninsula. On three sides it is bounded by the Gulf of Georgia. The site comprises an area of 548 acres, of which approximatley one-half is campus. In all directions appear snow-capped mountains, strikingly rugged and impressive. BUILDINGS The buildings, planned to meet the requirements of fifteen hundred students, are of two classes, permanent and semipermanent. The former were designed by the University architects, Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, the latter by architects of the Department of Public Works of the Provincial Government. The permanent buildings have been erected in the location originally assigned for them; the others in the quadrangle designated as "unassigned" in the original plan. By utilizing the "unassigned" area for the semi-permanent buildings, all the locations intended for future expansion have been left available. The entire mechanical equipment of these buildings was designed after a close study had been made not only of present requirements, but of the ultimate development of the institution. This consideration accounts for the fact that only a part of the present equipment is permanent. After a careful survey of the whole system, a forced hot water system was found to present advantages that made its adoption advisable. Direct radiation with a system of warmed air supply and extraction for ventilation is used to take care of the heat losses in the buildings. A separate system of ventilation is installed for all sanitary conveniences, and a specially constructed system for fume closets. The various services throughout these buildings, such as hot and cold water, distilled water, gas and steam for laboratory purposes, compressed air, etc., with the necessary apparatus, are all of a modern type. An attempt has been made to reduce 26 The University of British Columbia vibration and noise to a minimum by installing all moving apparatus on floating slabs, with a further insulation of cork. The plan at the back of the Calendar shows the buildings which have been erected and indicates the nature of their construction. It also shows their relation to the other groups of buildings which are to be erected in the future. PERMANENT BUILDINGS Of the twelve buildings which have been erected, three are of fire-proof construction, the Science Building, the Library, and the Power House. Science Building The Science Building has been designed in the Tudor style, this being a phase of English Gothic which lends itself fairly readily to those adaptations which are necessary in order to meet modern collegiate requirements. Externally, British Columbia granite has been used throughout. Wherever possible plain wall surfaces, consisting of the split faces of granite arranged in random sizes with white joints, have been used. The general grey tone is relieved by the use of a small quantity of field stone of darker shades. All window openings are filled with leaded glass in steel sashes. Internally, the building is finished in brick work and tiles in pleasing tones of brown which harmonize with the oak panelled doors, the total effect in keeping with that of the period it is designed to represent. This building, which was designed for the sole use of Chemistry ultimately, now accommodates the Departments of Chemistry, Physics, Bacteriology and Nursing and Health. One and one-half floors are devoted to Chemistry; an equivalent assignment of space has been alloted to Physics, and half of one floor has been set aside for Bacteriology, and Nursing and Health. All lecture rooms and laboratories are well lighted, and a system of forced ventilation has been installed throughout the entire building. Distilled water, gas, steam, compressed air, and electrical supply circuits have been provided wherever re- New Buildings 27 quired. These services are carried in trenches in the floor, an arrangement which facilitates any necessary repairs. Ample provision has also been made for offices, balance rooms, preparation rooms, apparatus rooms, supply rooms, photographic rooms, technicians' rooms, and reading-room for students. Chemistry.—This Department is equipped with one large and one small lecture room, a large laboratory for general chemistry accommodating three hundred and forty students, laboratories for elementary and advanced qualitative and quantitative analysis, an elementary organic laboratory, an advanced organic laboratory and an organic combustion laboratory. A laboratory is available for agricultural chemistry, another for industrial chemistry, and a commodious laboratory for physical chemistry with an adjoining dark room for work in photo-chemistry is found on the third floor. There are also several small laboratories well equipped for research work. Physics.—The Department of Physics has two large lecture rooms, four large and several smaller laboratories, a constant temperature room and a battery room. Three of the large laboratories are equipped for the study of Elementary Physics, Mechanics, and Heat and Electricity. The fourth is specially designed for the conducting of experiments requiring the use of highly sensitive apparatus. Smaller laboratories are designed for light and X-ray experiments. Bacteriology.—Provision has been made in this Department' for four laboratories. Two of these are for general student use, one is for serological work and one is for advanced research. In addition to laboratory and lecture room accommodation, an office, a preparation room and a sterilization room have been provided. Nursing and Health.—The three rooms assigned to this Department constitute a teaching unit such as is provided in modern training schools for the instruction of nurses. All the equipment necessary for the demonstration of elementary r.i. 28 The University of British Columbia nursing procedure is available, and can be used for practice teaching purposes. Library Building The central unit of the Library Building is a massive structure of British Columbia granite which harmonizes with the Science Building in its Gothic architectural lines. Owing to the exigencies of the plan, however, the massing is more broken, and thus better effects of light and shade are obtained. Some tracery and stained glass in the upper portion of the building is employed to obtain in a restricted manner the richness of detail characteristic of this style of architecture. Internally, the same effect has been striven for, wherever such an end was possible with due regard to economy. The Main Entrance Hall has a groined ceiling with arches and wall surface finished in Caen Stone plaster. This treatment is carried up to the Main Concourse floor through the staircase Hall; the lower portion of the Concourse walls is plastered with Caen Stone, the quoins to windows and doors, and corbels to roof trusses being finished in the same material. The roofs of the Concourse and of the two reading rooms adjacent are finished in native woods stained a dark brown, with patterae and shields picked out in bright heraldic colours. Windows throughout the building are of leaded glass. In the Concourse and the inner hall this is of a pale amber shade, with the coats of arms of the Canadian Universities worked into the centre light. On the window above the Loan Desk on the East Side of the Concourse the armorial bearings of Oxford and Cambridge, as the oldest universities of the Empire, are used as flanking emblems to those of the University of British Columbia. The floors of the Main Entrance Hall staircases and of the Concourse are finished with large marbled rubber tiles which harmonize with the general colour scheme, and ensure quietness in the principal parts of the building. Plain oak of simple detail, stained to represent old fumed oak, is used throughout for doors and other wood finish. The principal reading room has a floor space of 100 ft. by 50 ft. and is 60 ft. in height. Two other reading rooms, each 60 ft. by New Buildings 29 30 feet, open off the main reading room. These rooms provide accommodation for 250 students. The sixth and seventh tiers of the stack, not being required at present to house the University book collection, are used as a periodical room, and will accommodate about fifty readers. The Stack, which occupies the entire rear of the building, consists of seven tiers, four of which are fully equipped with steel stacks of the latest design. Here fifty-two semi-private study "carrels" facilitate research for advanced students. The offices of the Librarian and the Library Staff provide ample accommodation for receiving, cataloguing and accessioning. The Faculty common room, the "Browsing" room, and the Frank Burnett museum are also located in this building. The Burnett collection represents the arts, handicraft and weapons of Polynesia. This collection, which has been presented by Mr. Burnett to the University, is the result of numerous voyages made by him to the Central and South Pacific Islands. It constitutes one of the finest collections of this class of material yet accumulated by any private collector. Power House The Power House has been placed in the centre of the space which will ultimately be the Engineering Quadrangle, and will therefore eventually be masked by the future permanent buildings towards the Mall. For this reason it does not pretend to follow very closely the style of the other permanent buildings except in mass, being finished in rough case of broken texture, relieved with red quarry tiles as diapers, copings and offsets, with windows grouped as far as possible to give pleasing proportions of voids and solids. The ultimate development of this plant will be 2500 horse power at normal rating. The present installation consists of three units, each of 250 horse power normal rating, capable of developing 100 per cent, in excess of this. Each unit, so equipped aa to operate independently of the others, may act as a service as well as an experimental station. In other words, on any one boiler an experimental test may be conducted while the rest 30 The University of British Columbia of the plant is cut in on the service lines. Instruments are provided to record every operation so that close checking and comparisons of the performance of the different types of boilers may be made to a degree. The B. & W. Unit is equipped with B. & W. Natural Draft Stoker, the Sterling Boiler with forced draft Coxe Travelling Grate. The Kidwell with forced draft Coxe Travelling Grate is also equipped with air pre-heater, by-passed, so that tests may be conducted with or without pre-heated air. Induced draft is used with individual forced draft fans; separate boiler feed lines and pump with Linehart Scale provide boiler feed for tests. A travelling weigh scale records the amount of coal used, while a steam jet ash conveyor elevates the ashes to an overhead bunker. The efficiency and flexibility of the plant lends itself to economical operation, while the knowledge gained in the use of different appliances will be of interest and value to power plant users. SEMI-PERMANENT BUILDINGS In this group there are nine buildings in all,—Administration, Auditorium and Grill room, Arts, Applied Science, Agriculture; three Engineering Buildings—Mechanical, Electrical; Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics; and the Forest Products Laboratory Building. These buildings, which are set on concrete foundations, are of frame construction with stucco finish, and are designed for a life of forty years. Their exterior design harmonizes with the permanent buildings so far as materials of construction will permit. With the exception of a part of the Engineering Laboratories, these buildings have been finished internally with plaster and fir trim. Administration Building On the ground floor of this building are situated the offices of the President, the Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, the Registrar, and the Bursar. On the second floor are two large rooms, one for meetings of the Board of Governors and New Buildings 31 the Senate, and the other for meetings of Faculties and Committees. Auditorium Building The Auditorium Building is designed in a pleasing treatment of Renaissance architecture and is furnished with the most modern equipment. It has a seating capacity of 1029, a large and admirably equipped stage for the encouragement of dramatic presentations, an orchestra pit and adequate off-stage dressing rooms. Provision has been made for the operating of moving pictures and the stage is equipped with a cyclorama and all necessary electrical illumination devices. The Grill room is situated in the basement and is designed to accommodate 400 students at one time. There is also a small dining room for the Faculty. The kitchen is furnished with the latest cooking and baking equipment. I . The bookstore, post office, medical offices, women's rest room, students' council offices, and numerous committee rooms for subsidiary organizations are also located in this building. Arts Building In the Arts Building, which forms the centre of the semipermanent group, are located the lecture rooms and offices for the following Departments in the Faculty of Arts and Science: Classics, Economics, Sociology and Political Science, Education, English, History, Mathematics, Modern Languages and Philosophy. The lecture rooms, 16 in number, are well designed and exceptionally well lighted. The largest room accommodates 250 students; the seating capacity of the others ranges from 32 to 64. Four common rooms for the undergraduates in Arts and Science are located in this building, as is also the office of the Dean of Women. Applied Science Building This building houses the Departments of Geology, Botany, Zoology, Forestry and the drafting rooms and offices for Civil 32 The University of British Columbia Engineering. All the laboratories have been equipped with the essential services. One large lecture room, providing accommodations for 250 students, and 11 smaller lecture rooms with a seating capacity ranging from 25 to 112, are located in this building. These will be used by the different Departments jointly as class requirements may determine. Extensive provision has been made for drafting .rooms and for the necessary offices, preparation rooms, storage rooms, and photographic rooms. A geological museum, a reading room and a common room for students have also been provided. Geology.—In addition to the necessary lecture rooms, the Department of Geology has three large and well equipped laboratories, the Mineralogical, the Petrological and the Geological. There are also two small research laboratories, one for graduate students and one for the staff. The Department workroom is well equipped for the preparation of specimens. The museum contains valuable collections of illustrative material which supplements the extensive working collections in the laboratories. The reading room is equipped with books, separates, maps, photographs and slides for reference. Botany.—The Botanical laboratories include a large junior laboratory, a senior laboratory, two student research laboratories and three private research rooms. These laboratories are used for practical work in Botany and General Biology. A Herbarium of over 15,000 sheets and a botanical garden containing over 1000 specimens of native plants furnish an abundance of material for class room and laboratory purposes. Zoology.—This Department, which includes courses in Entomology, has two large laboratories, a small research laboratory and two private laboratories, all well equipped. There is also a room for class material, which will serve for a time as a repository for museum collections and for specimens to be used for illustration. Forestry.—While the Department of Forestry has its own laboratory for work in wood technology, its own class room New Buildings 33 and offices, it uses the laboratories of other Departments quite extensively, notably those in Biology, Civil Engineering and Forest Products. The Department possesses, in the forest belt which nas been preserved on the campus as a natural park, a very valuable outdoor laboratory for forestry students. Civil Engineering.—Well equipped and well lighted draughting and designing rooms are available for all classes in drawing, mapping, machine design and computation work. The equipment necessary for all types of Civil Engineering work ia available. The hydraulic laboratory, which is situated in the Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics Building, is well equipped for demonstrations and tests covering the main field of hydraulic principles and machinery; while in the Forest Products Laboratory, which is at the disposal of students in Civil Engineering, excellent facilities are available for extensive tests of timber, cement and steel. Agriculture Building This building accommodates the Departments of Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture and Poultry Husbandry. The office and record rooms for the Farm Survey studies are also located in this building. The lecture rooms, of which there are four, are exceptionally well lighted. The largest accommodates 112 students, while the seating capacity of the others ranges from 36 to 54. In addition to lecture and laboratory accommodation, provision has been made for the necessary offices, preparation rooms, storage rooms and also for a photographic dark room, a herd book room, and a students' common room. Agronomy.—This Department is provided with a combined laboratory and lecture room which is equipped with water, gas and electricity. While this room will be used for studies in crop production, for the judging of specimens of plants and for the determination of soil samples, the main emphasis will be laid on the work conducted in the Department's outdoor laboratory— the Agronomy fields. 34 The University of British Columbia Animal Husbandry.—The different classes and types of livestock constitute the main laboratory material of this department. In this material and in the farm survey records, the Department possesses a wealth of data for teaching and illustration in farm management, livestock management, feed and nutrition, and studies in pedigree and breeding. Dairying.—The new laboratories of the Department of Dairying provide facilities for conducting researches on the bacterial flora of milk, butter and cheese, and the relation of the flora to the production and sale of high quality products. Excellent provision is made for the instruction of students in the work indicated. Cheese-making and butter-making will be conducted in the temporary dairy building; but the new laboratories permit of closer contact of the various activities of the Department. Horticulture.—In the laboratory provided for this Department, comprehensive studies supplement the practical experience of the students in the propagation, planting, pruning and care of horticultural crops. Materials for these purposes are provided from the orchard, the ornamental trees, shrubs and flowers, and from plants grown in the glass propagating house. Poultry Husbandry.—In the poultry laboratory in the Agriculture Building, facilities and equipment are provided to assist in the study of poultry nutrition, disease, and other problems related to the industry. On the poultry plant, which is the main laboratory of the Poultry Department, ten pure breeds of commercial importance are tested and bred for egg and meat production. Experiments in management and marketing are conducted with these birds and their products. Mechanical and Electrical Buildings The Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering is housed in two large buildings. In both will be found the most-up-to-date equipment, enabling students to obtain a thorough experimental knowledge of all phases of the work in these departments. The mechanical laboratory contains a modern 3-ton CO* refrigerating plant; a large Corliss engine; a New Buildings 35 two-stage air-compressor with inter-cooler; a 50 H.P. Mirrlees Bickerton & Day -pure Diesel engine with Froude water brake; a De Laval Steam Turbine and D. C. generator with condenser; a gasoline engine and generator; a Crossley two-stroke oil engine and a National gas engine. A complete equipment exists for testing calorific values of fuel oils and coals, and also for testing exhaust gases of engines. There are also two steam engines, one a single cylinder engine and the other a compound engine. The mechanical students have available also the powerhouse equipment for testing, which consists of three 250 H.P. boilers—a Kidwell, a Babcock & Wilcox, and a Sterling. In addition, a 250-K.W. compound engine and generator and every variety of pump is available for experimental work. The Electrical laboratory is entirely modern, and contains a 3-phase synchronous motor, driving a 75-K.W. compound wound generator with static balancer. There is a three-phase rotary converter with reactance control and panels, and a Deri brush-shifting repulsion motor; a three-phase series commutator motor of the Schrage type, several squirrel cage and slip- ring induction motors, a three-phase alternator and D.C. motor; two-level compound D.C. generators on the same base. There are also series, shunt and compound wound D.C. motors and an induction regulator, a single-phase rotary converter; a Winter-Eichberg single-phase commutator motor; several transformers; a mercury-arc rectifier; an oscillograph; a Campbell inductometer and complete equipment for high frequency bridge-testing. An alternating current potentiometer made by Tinsley, Gall's patent, exists for standardizing work, and also vacuum tube instruments for obtaining characteristics of tubes. In addition, a large amount of equipment is available for carrying out all the junior tests, including potentiometers, standard bridges, iron testing, Epstein iron tester, ballistic galvanometers and other instruments. Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics Building The Mining and Metallurgical laboratories cover a total area of 5000 square feet. The Ore Dressing laboratory, which 36 The University of British Columbia includes a workshop, storage room and flotation room, is well equipped with a variety of small scale machines, including crusher, rolls, screens, jigs, ball mill and tables. The laboratory is fully wired for power and light, and has large water mains and drains, and a two-ton travelling crane. The Metallurgical laboratory includes a fire assay room, with oil, gasoline and gas furnaces; a wet assay room, with large fan-draught hood, and work benches fitted for electric and gas heating; two balanee rooms; a photographic dark room; and ample storage space. The Hydraulics laboratory is well equipped for tests and demonstrations of high and low pressure hydraulic machines and pumps. A 60-horse-power D.C. motor is utilized to drive either a 10-inch single stage centrifugal pump having a capacity of 2400 gallons per minute against a 70-foot head, or to drive a 4-inch two stage pump having a capacity of 525 gallons per minute against a 325-foot head. The water from the large pump can be used to drive a 10-inch vertical reaction turbine, while the flow from the high pressure pump can be used to drive an 18-inch Pelton Wheel, thus providing students with actual working demonstrations of all the ordinary types of machines. Installations include apparatus for weir, nozzle, and orifice measurements, flow in pipes, tests and demonstrations of Venturi, current and service meters. One section of the laboratory is set apart for making the standard tests of cement and sand. Forest Products Laboratory Buildings The three buildings included in this group were erected by the University for the use of the Vancouver Forest Products Laboratory of the Dominion Forest Service. They consist of a main building for offices and laboratories, an air-seasoning building, and an experimental dry-kiln building. Under a joint agreement between the University and the Department of the Interior, the University, besides providing the buildings, furnishes heat, light, and power, without cost to the Dominion Government. The Dominion Forest Service has New Buildings 37 undertaken to supply the personnel and to furnish all equipment. Facilities already established include a large timber testing laboratory, a special building for lumber seasoning, an experimental dry-kiln building equipped with oil-fired steam plant and automatic temperature and humidity controller, a combined photographic and pathological laboratory, a carpenter shop, and suitable offices. Accommodation is also provided for an entomologist of the Federal Department of Agriculture. The testing laboratory is equipped with machines ranging from a 200,000-pound Olsen Universal to the most delicate balances. ^^ > W 38 The University of British Columbia GENERAL INFORMATION The Session The University Year or Session is divided into two terms— the first, September to December; the second, January to May. For "Admission to the University," see page 41, and for "Registration and Attendance," see page 43. Courses of Study For the Session of 1928-29 the University offers instruction in the four years of each of the three Faculties, Arts and Science, Applied Science (including Nursing), and Agriculture, leading to the degrees of Bachelor of Arts, Bachelor of Applied Science and Bachelor of Science in Agriculture. It is also possible to proceed to a Master's degree in each Faculty. Advanced courses of instruction and facilities for research are offered to students who are graduates of any University or College of recognized standing. Admission to these advanced courses, or to the privileges of research, does not in itself imply admission to candidacy for a higher degree. Academic Dress The undergraduate's gown is black in colour and of the ordinary stuff material, of ankle length, and with long sleeves and the yoke edged with khaki cord. The graduate's gown is the same, without cord. The Bachelor's hood is of the Cambridge pattern, black bordered with the distinctive colour of the particular Faculty; the Master's hood is the same, lined with the distinctive colour. The colours are, for Arts and Science, the University blue; for Applied Science, red; for Agriculture, maize. Physical Examination In order to promote the physical welfare of the student body, every student, on entering the University, will be required to undergo a physical examination, to be conducted by, or under the direction of, the University Medical Examiner. Physical defects and weaknesses, amenable to treatment, may General Information 39 thus be discovered, and the student is advised to apply to his physician for such remedial measures as his case may require. About 10 to 15 per cent, of the students are re-examined in their second year. University Health Service The University Campus is situated within the Point Grey Reserve, which, as unorganized territory, comes under the direct control of the Provincial Government. Shortly after the opening of the present University Buildings in 1925, the Lieutenant- Governor in Council, by the recommendation of the Provincial Health Officer, appointed a Medical Health Officer for the Reserve, including the University Campus. This Health Officer has on the Campus and in the Reserve all the powers of any Health Officer anywhere. k^ In the fall of 1927, the Provincial Health Officer added to the University Health Service a Public Health Nurse, whose presence permits the continuous operation of a local Health Department on the Campus and Reserve. In addition, the Public Health Nurse is engaged by the University for the general supervision of the individual health of the students, first aid, etc., and gives a voluntary course of lectures to the students on health subjects. An office for the Public Health Nurse is provided in the Auditorium Building and, by the gift of the Graduating Class of 1927, has been equipped with first aid furniture and supplies. Students developing any illness or suffering from any injury while on the Campus should apply for first aid to the Public Health Nurse. This is particularly required if the student develops any illness of an infectious nature. Provision is made also for the diagnosis of the infectious cases and their safe removal to suitable quarters. Students developing any illness or suffering any injury while at home, boarding house, fraternity' house, etc., are required to report the same to the Public Health Nurse. The development of any infectious disease in a University student must be reported by the student to the Health Officer of the University without delay. 40 The University of British Columbia Dean of Women During the session the Dean of Women may be consulted by parents and students on matters pertaining to living conditions, vocational guidance, and other questions that directly affect the social and intellectual life of the women students. Board and Residence A list of approved boarding-houses which receive men or women students, but not both, may be obtained from the Registrar after September 1st. Men and women students are not permitted to lodge in the same house, unless they are members of the same family, or receive special permission from the Senate. The cost of good board and lodging is from $35 per month upwards; of a room alone, $8 to $12 per month. A grill is operated under the supervision of the University, and lunch, afternoon tea and light supper may be obtained there at very reasonable prices. Refreshments at social functions are also supplied. General Conduct The University authorities do not assume responsibilities which naturally rest with parents. This being so it is the policy of the University to rely on the good sense and on the home training of students for the preservation of good moral standards. I Admission to the University 41 ADMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY All inquiries relating to admission to the University should be addressed to the Registrar. 1. Except under special circumstances no student under the age of sixteen is admitted to the First Year Courses in the Faculty of Arts and Science, and no student under the age of seventeen to the Second Year Courses in the Faculty of Arts and Science nor to the First Year Courses in the Faculties of Agriculture and Applied Science, including Nursing. 2. Candidates for admission to the courses in the First Year of the Faculty of Arts and Science or the Faculty of Agriculture and to the course in Nursing in Applied Science are required to pass the Junior Matriculation Examination of the Province of British Columbia or to submit certificates showing that they have passed an equivalent examination elsewhere. Special regulations are prescribed for admission to courses in Applied Science, and are given under the heading of "Admission" in the Applied Science Section of the Calendar. 3. Students who have passed the Senior Matriculation Examination are admitted to the courses of the Second Year in the Faculty of Arts and Science. Students who have partial Senior Matriculation standing will be granted credit in First Year Arts in each subject in which they have made 50 per cent or over, or in each paper in which they have made 50 per cent or over in so far as these papers correspond with those of First Year Arts. 4. Certificates or diplomas showing that a candidate has passed the Matriculation Examination of another University will be accepted in lieu of the Junior or Senior Matriculation Examinations if the Faculty concerned considers that the examination has covered the same subjects and required the same standard. If, however, the examination covers some but not all of the necessary subjects the candidate will be required to pass the Matriculation Examination in the subjects not covered. 5. A candidate who wishes to enter by certificates other than a Matriculation certificate issued in British Columbia 42 The University of British Columbia shoidd submit to the Registrar the original certificates. If he wishes these returned to him, he must present also a copy of each certificate for record at the University. He should under no circumstances come to the University without having first obtained from the Registrar a statement of the value of the certificates he holds, as these may lack one or more essential subjects, or the work done in a subject may not be adequate, or, again, the percentage gained may not be sufficiently high. Moreover, it must be remembered that a certificate may admit to one Faculty and not to another. When an applicant's diploma or certificate does not show the marks obtained in the several subjects of the examination he must arrange to have a statement of his marks sent to the Registrar by the Education Department or University issuing such diploma or certificate. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00. 6. A student of another University applying for exemption from any subject or subjects which he has already studied is required to submit with his application a Calendar of the University in which he has previously studied, together with a complete statement of the course he has followed and a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects* The Faculty concerned will determine the standing of such a student in this University. The fee for the examination of certificates is $2.00. 7. No candidate under 18 years of age will be admitted to the University without complete Junior Matriculation; and no candidate over 18 years of age who has deficient Matriculation standing will be admitted without the special permission of the Faculty concerned. 8. The Junior and Senior Matriculation Examinations of the Province of British Columbia are conducted by the High School and University Matriculation Board of the Province. This Board consists of members appointed by the Department of Education and by the University. The requirements for Matriculation may be obtained in the publication, "Requirements for Matriculation," issued by the University, or in the "Courses of Study," issued by the Department of Education *For the conditions under which exemption is granted in the Faculty of Arts and Science, see "Courses Leading to the Degree of B. A." Registration and Attendance 43 REGISTRATION AND ATTENDANCE Those who intend to register as students of the University are required to make application to the Registrar, on forms to be obtained at the Registrar's office. This application should be made early in August, or as soon as the results of the Matriculation examinations are known. For First Year students in the Faculties of Arts and Science, and Agriculture, and for other students coming to the University for the first time, the last day for registration is Wednesday, September 19th, and for all other undergraduate students, Friday, September 21st, 1928. (See regulations in reference to '' Admission to the University,'' page 41.) 1. There are four classes of students:— (a) Graduate students—Students who are pursuing courses of study in a Faculty in which they hold a degree, whether they are proceeding to a Master's degree or not. (b) Full undergraduates—Students proceeding to a degree in any Faculty who have passed all the examinations precedent to the year in which they are registered. (c) Conditioned undergraduates—Students proceeding to a degree with incomplete entrance qualifications or with defects in their standing which do not prevent their entering a higher year under the regulations governing "Examinations and Advancement" of the Faculty in which they are registered. (d) Partial students—Students not belonging to one of the three preceding classes. (See 7, below.) 2. All students other than graduate students are required to register at the office of the Registrar on or before the last day for registration, to furnish the information necessary for the University records, to enrol for the particular classes which they wish to attend, and to sign the following declaration: "I hereby accept and submit myself to the statutes, rules, regulations, and ordinances of The University of British Colum- 44 The University of British Columbia bia, and of the Faculty or Faculties in which I am registered, and to any amendments thereto which may be made while I am a student of the University, and I promise to observe the same." In the information furnished for the University records, students are requested to state what churches they propose to make their place of worship. This information is available for any of the city churches desiring it. 3. After the above dates a fee of $2.00 will be charged for late registration. 4. Students registering for the first time must present the certificates which constitute their qualification for admission to the course of study for which they wish to register. The Registrar is empowered to register all duly qualified students. Doubtful eases will be dealt with by the Faculty concerned. 5. Students doing work in two academic years will register in the lower year and fill out their course cards in such a way as to make clear which courses are required to complete the lower year. 6. Students desiring to make a change in the course for which they have registered must apply to the Registrar on the proper form for a "change of course." Except in special circumstance, no change will be allowed after the fifteenth day of the session. If the application is approved by the Faculty concerned, the Registrar will give the necessary notifications. 7. Partial students are not normally required to pass an examination for admission, but before registering they must produce a certificate showing that they have satisfied the Dean and the Heads of the Departments concerned that they are qualified to pursue with advantage the course of study which they propose to undertake. 8. Students are required to attend at least seven-eighths of the lectures in each course that they take. Lectures will commence on the hour, and admission to a lecture or laboratory Registration and Attendance 45 and credit for attendance may be refused by the Instructor for lateness, misconduct, inattention or neglect of duty. Absence consequent on illness or domestic affliction may be excused only by the Dean of the Faculty concerned, and medical certificates or other evidence must be presented immediately on return to University work. A medical certificate must show the nature and the period of the disability. Medical report forms may be obtained from the Dean's office. In cases of deficient attendance students may (with the sanction of the Dean and the Head of the Department concerned) be excluded from the final examination in a course; but unless the unexcused absences exceed one-fourth of the total number of lectures in a course, such students may sit for supplemental examination. *?* * V 46 The University of British Columbia FEES All cheques must be certified and made payable to "The University of British Columbia." 1. The sessional fees are as follows: For Full and Conditioned Undergraduates In Arts and Science— First Term, payable on or before Oct. 8th $50.00 Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 21st 50.00 $100.00 In Teacher Training Course— First Term, payable on or before Oct. 8th $30.00 Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 21st 30.00 $ 60.00 In Applied Science— First Term, payable on or before Oct. 8th $75.00 Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 21st 75.00 $150.00 In Nursing and Public Health— First Term, payable on or before Oct. 8th $50.00 Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 21st...... 50.00 $100.00 NOTE.—For Third and Fourth Year students in Nursing the Sessional fee is $1.00, payable, with the Alma Mater fee of $10.00, on or before October 8th. Students admitted to Nursing B or C and proceeding to the Certificate on a basis of part-time attendance over two or more years, will pay the regular fee for the whole course, but the amount payable each year will be pro-rated to correspond with the proportion of work taken in that year. In Agriculture— First Term, payable on or before Oct. 8th $50.00 Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 21st 50.00 $100.00 Alma Mater Fee—Payable on or before Oct. 8th $ 10.00 Caution Money—Payable on or before Oct. 8th 5.00 Fees 47 For Partial Students Fees per "Unit"—Payable on or before Oct. 8th $ 10.00 Alma Mater Fee—Payable on or before Oct. 8th 10.00 Caution Money—Payable on or before Oct. 8th 5.00 For Graduates Registration and Class Fees — Payable on or before Oct. 15th $ 25.00 After these dates an additional fee of $2.00 will be exacted of all students in default. The Alma Mater Fee is a fee exacted from all students for the support of the Alma Mater Society. It was authorized by the Board of Governors at the request of the students themselves, m- 4tni> The Caution Money is a deposit from which deductions will be made to cover breakages, wastage, and use of special materials in laboratories, etc. If the balance to the credit of a student falls below $1.50, a further deposit of $5.00 may be required. 2. Immediately after October 8th and January 21st, the Bursar will notify students who have not paid their fees that steps will be taken to ensure their exclusion from classes while the fees remain unpaid. 3. Students registering after October 8th shall pay their fees at the time of registration, failing which they become subject to the provisions of Regulation 2. 4. Special fees are:— Regular supplemental examination, per paper $ 5.00 Special examination, per paper 7.50 Graduation 20.00 Supplemental examination fees must be paid two weeks before the examination, special examination fees when application for examination is made, and graduation fees two weeks before Congregation. 48 The University of British Columbia MEDALS, SCHOLARSHIPS, PRIZES, BURSARIES AND LOANS FOR 1928-29 MEDALS The Governor-General's Gold Medal A gold medal, presented by His Excellency the Governor- General of Canada, will be awarded to the student standing at the head of the graduating class in the Faculty of Arts and Science. Honour and pass students may compete for this medal. The Historical Society Gold Medal A gold medal, donated by E. W. Keenleyside, Esq., and known as the Historical Society Gold Medal, will be open to the members of the graduating class. The award will be made by the Department of History, on the basis of the student's standing in the courses in History which he has taken during his undergraduate course, and the general interest he has shown in the subject. SCHOLARSHIPS FOR POST-GRADUATE STUDIES University Scholarship A scholarship of $200 may be awarded to a graduate student who shows special aptitude for post-graduate studies. Application should be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations. The Anne Wesbrook Scholarship This scholarship of $100, given by the Faculty Women's Club of the University, is open to graduates of this University who intend in the following year to pursue post-graduate study in this or any other approved university. Application should be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations. The Captain LeRoy Memorial Scholarship This scholarship of $250, donated by the Universities Service Club, will be awarded for the academic year 1928-29 to a returned soldier student in attendance at The University of British Columbia. Applications may be made by returned soldier Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 49 students who intend doing Second, Third, or Fourth Year work at The University of British Columbia, or post-graduate work at any approved institution. Each application must contain a statement of the academic record, the war record, and the special claims of the applicant, with two supporting references, and must be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations. The award will be made by Senate, upon recommendation of Faculty acting in consultation with the Executive of the Universities Service Club. The French Government Scholarship A scholarship of 10,000 francs is donated by the French Government for one year's postgraduate study in French. It is tenable for one year and is contingent upon the voting of the credits for the year by the French Chambers. (This contingency applies to every item of the French budget and, practically, the scholarship may be considered as permanent.) The award is made by the French Consul for Western Canada, residing in Vancouver, on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of French in the University. Applications should be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations. The Nichol Scholarship By the generosity of the Hon. Walter Nichol—Lieutenant- Governor of the Province, 1921 to 1926,—five three-year scholarships, each of the annual value of $1,200, have been made available for study in the University of France, or at one of the other institutions of higher education in France. With each scholarship will be given a gold medal, the permanent possession of the successful candidate. These scholarships will be open to graduates of the University of British Columbia who intend to take up teaching as a profession. The fourth scholarship will be awarded in 1928. The intention of the donor being the development in Canada, and particularly in this Province, of a wider knowledge of the people of France, their ideals, literature, art and science, 50 The University of British Columbia and the promotion thereby of a better mutual understanding between French and British in this country, each successful candidate must undertake to return to British Columbia to practise his profession for such time as seems reasonable in the opinion of the Senate of the University. Each scholarship may be held for three years, provided the bolder can show from year to year satisfactory progress in the course of study undertaken. Application must be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations. The Brock Scholarship A scholarship of $100, donated by Dean R. W. Brock, may be awarded to a graduate student in Applied Science who shows special aptitude for post-graduate studies. Applications should be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations. The 1851 Exhibition Scholarship Under the revised conditions for the award of the 1851 Exhibition Scholarship in Science, The University of British Columbia is included in the list of universities from which nominations for scholarships allotted to Canada may be made. These scholarships of £250 per annum, are tenable, ordinarily, for two years. They are granted only to British subjects under 26. years of age, who have been bona fide students of pure or applied science of not less than three years' standing. Application should be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations. SCHOLARSHIPS FOR UNDERGRADUATES 1. IN ALL FACULTIES The Rhodes Scholarship An annual scholarship at one of the colleges of Oxford is assigned by the trustees of the late Mr. Cecil J. Rhodes to the Province of British Columbia. Each scholarship is tenable for three years, and is of the value of £400 a year. In accordance with the wish of Mr. Rhodes, the election of candidates will depend upon: (1) Force of character, devotion to duty, courage, Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 51 sympathy, capacity for leadership; (2) Ability and scholastic attainments; (3) Physical vigor, as shown by participation in games or in other ways. A candidate must be a British subject, with at least five years' domicile in Canada, and unmarried. He must have passed his nineteenth but not his twenty-fifth birthday on October 1st of the year for which he is elected. He must be at least in his Sophomore Year in some recognized degree-granting university or college of Canada, and (if elected) complete the work of that year before coming into residence at Oxford. He may compete either in the province in which he has acquired any considerable part of his educational qualification, or in the province in which he has his ordinary private domicile, home, or residence. T ^1 Candidates for the 1929 scholarship must have their applications, with all the required material, in the hands of the Secretary of the Selection Committee not later than October 20th, 1928. The Khaki University and Young Men's Christian Association Memorial Fund Scholarships The suta of $12,000, given to the University by the administrators of the Khaki University of Canada, provides a fund which has so far been used to assist returned soldiers in actual need of money to complete their courses. Out of the income from this fund, ten scholarships of $75 each are now to be offered each year for a period of five years, beginning with the spring of 1927. They are to be awarded, on the results of examinations in the First, Second, and Third Years in all faculties, to such returned soldiers or dependents of soldiers as have the requisite academic standing; failing such, to the student body at large. All returned soldiers and all children of soldiers of the Great War who have any expectation of attaining scholarship standing in these years should apply to the Registrar on a special form not later than the last day of the final examinations. The Captain Leroy Memorial Scholarship (See Page 48) 52 The University of British Columbia University Scholarships Two scholarships of $150 each may be awarded to returned soldiers taking the work of the First Year, the award to be based on the work of the year. 2. IN ARTS AND SCIENCE University Scholarships Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $150 each will be awarded to students proceeding to the Fourth Year, the award to be based on the work of the Third Year. Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $150 each will be awarded to students proceeding to the Third Year, the award to be based on the work of the Second Year. The Shaw Memorial Scholarship* This scholarship of $137.50, founded by friends of the late James Curtis Shaw, Principal of Vancouver College, and afterwards of McGill University College, Vancouver, will be paid throughout his undergraduate course to any child of the late Principal Shaw who is in regular attendance at the University as a fully matriculated student; when there is no such candidate, it will be awarded upon the results of the examination of the Second Year in Arts and Science to the undergraduate student standing highest in any two of the following three subjects, English, Latin, Greek, and proceeding to the work of the Third Year. The McGill Graduates' Scholarship* A scholarship of $137.50, founded by the McGill Graduates' Society of British Columbia, will be awarded to the undergraduate student standing highest in English and French of the Second Year in Arts and Science and proceeding to the work of the Third Year. The Terminal City Club Memorial Scholarship This scholarship of $110, founded by the members of the Terminal City Club as a memorial to those members of the ♦Originally donated to the Royal Institution, this has been transferred by that body, with the consent of the donors, to the University of British Columbia. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 53 Club who lost their lives in the Great War, will be awarded to the undergraduate student standing highest in English and Economics of the Second Year in Arts and Science and proceeding to the work of the Third Year. The Scott Memorial Scholarship This scholarship of $110—the proceeds of an endowment of $2,000—founded by the Imperial Order of the Daughters of the Empire of the City of Vancouver, in memory of Captain Robert Falcon Scott, the Antarctic explorer, who sacrificed his life in the cause of Science, will be awarded for general proficiency in biological subjects to the student who has completed his Second Year in Arts and Science, and who is proceeding in the Third Year to Honour work either in Biology or in a course including Biology. \ Royal Institution Scholarship A scholarship of $150 will be awarded to the student taking first place in the examinations of the first year in Arts and Science. University Scholarships Two scholarships of $150 each will be awarded on the examinations of the first year in Arts and Science, one to the student taking second place and the other to the student taking third place in general proficiency. The P. E. O. Sisterhood Scholarship A scholarship of $75, given by Vancouver Chapters of the P. E. O. Sisterhood, will be awarded to the woman student standing highest in English in the First Year of the Faculty of Arts and Science. The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship A scholarship of $110 is offered by the Club to be awarded to the student obtaining first place in the subject, Canadian History. 54 The University of British Columbia 3. IN APPLIED SCIENCE University Scholarship A scholarship of $150.00 will be awarded, for general proficiency in previous work in this University, to a student proceeding to the Third Year of the Course in Nursing and Health and having successfully completed the hospital probationary period. Applications shall be made to the Registrar not later than September 1st. The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship A scholarship of $100 is offered by the Club to be awarded to the student who attains the highest standing in the first four years' training, academic and practical, of the Nursing and Health course. The Dunsmuir Scholarship* A scholarship of $165, founded by the Hon. James Dunsmuir, will be awarded to the undergraduate student standing highest in the Mining Engineering Course of the Third Year in Applied Science and proceeding to the work of the Fourth Year. , University Scholarship A scholarship of $150 will be awarded to a student proceeding to the Third Year in Applied Science, the award to be based on the work of the Second Year. Royal Institution Scholarship A scholarship of $150 will be awarded for general proficiency in the work of the First Year in Applied Science. 4. IN AGRICULTURE The British Columbia Fruit Growers' Association Scholarship This scholarship of $100, donated by the British Columbia Fruit Growers' Association, will be awarded to a student, preferably of the Third Year, who is specializing in Horticulture. The award will be based on proficiency not only in horticultural subjects, but in the entire work of the year. "Originally donated to the Royal Institution, this has been transferred by that body, with the consent of the donors, to the University of British Columbia. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 55 University Scholarship A scholarship in Agriculture of $150 will be awarded to a student proceeding to the Second Year, the award to be based on the work of the First Year. The David Thom Scholarship A scholarship in Agriculture of $100.00 will be awarded to a student proceeding to the Second Year, the award to be based on the work of the First Year. MATRICULATION SCHOLARSHIPS University Scholarship One scholarship of $150 will be awarded upon the results of the Senior Matriculation Examination. Royal Institution Scholarships Seven General Proficiency scholarships will be awarded on the result of the Junior Matriculation examinations: (a) $150 to the candidate of highest standing in the Province, and (b) $100 to the candidate of next highest standing in each of the following districts: (1) Victoria District, (2) Vancouver Island (exclusive of Victoria District) and Northern Mainland, (3) Vancouver District, (4) Fraser Delta (exclusive of Vancouver District but including Agassiz), (5) Yale, (6) Kootenays. These scholarships will be paid only to students in attendance at the University of British Columbia. Under certain conditions they may be reserved for limited periods. A winner who is completing Senior Matriculation in a high school of the same district may have the scholarship reserved for one year, subject to obtaining satisfactory standing in the Senior Matriculation examination. Also a winner who completes the first two years of the Arts course in an affiliated institution may have the scholarship reserved for two years. Sums accruing from unpaid scholarships may be used in the form of bursaries or loans. 56 The University of British Columbia PRIZES 1. IN ALL FACULTIES The University Prize A book prize of the value of $25, open to all students of the University, will be awarded for an essay on a special literary subject, to be announced at the beginning of the Session by the Department of English. The Players' Club Prize A prize of $50, donated by the Players' Club, is offered for an original play suitable for the Club's Christmas performance. The award will be made on the recommendation of the Faculty members of the Advisory Board of the Players' Club. 2. IN ARTS AND SCIENCE The Gerald Myles Harvey Prize A book prize of the value of $50, given by Mr. J. Newton Harvey in memory of his son, Gerald Myles Harvey, who died on active service, wil be awarded to the student in Arts and Science who submits the best essay on a subject in Economics or Political Science which concerns British Columbia or Canada as a whole. A list of suggested subjects for 1928-29 may be obtained from the Department of Economics, but competitors may write on any subject approved by the Department and by the donor of the prize, and essays written in the course of University work, if so approved, may be submitted for the prize. Intending competitors must notify the Department of Economics before the 31st of December, 1928, of their intention to compete. The Historical Society Prize Through the generosity of R. L. Reid, Esq., K.C., the Historical Society of the University has been able to offer, annually, a prize of $25, open to all students in Arts and Science, for the best essay on an assigned subject. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 57 The Vancouver Women's Conservative Association Prize This prize of $25, given by the Vancouver Women's Conservative Association, is open to students taking the Mathematics of the First Year in the Faculty of Arts and Science. In awarding it preference will be given to the son or daughter of a deceased soldier, provided satisfactory standing is secured in the subject. The Letters Club Prize A prize of $25, presented by R. L. Reid, Esq., K.C., honorary member of the Letters Club, is offered annually for the best essay by an undergraduate student in Arts on an assigned subject in Canadian literature. The award will be made on the recommendation of the Department of English. The subjects for the Session 1928-29 are as follows: 1. Isabella Valancy Crawford. 2. Sir Gilbert Parker. 3. Stephen Leacock. 3. IN APPLIED SCIENCE The Convocation Prize A prize of $50, donated by Convocation of The University of British Columbia, will be awarded annually to the student obtaining first place in the Fourth Year of Applied Science. The Walter Moberly Memorial Prize A book prize of the value of $25, donated by the Vancouver Branch of the Engineering Institute of Canada in memory of the late Walter Moberly, will be awarded for the best engineering thesis submitted by any Fourth Year student in the Faculty of Applied Science. The Professional Engineers' Prizes Five book prizes, each of the value of $25, are offered by the Association of Professional Engineers of British Columbia for competition by those students in the Third Year of the 58 The University of British Columbia Faculty of Applied Science who are registered as pupils with the Association. The prizes are awarded for the best summer essays in five branches of engineering. The Provincial Board of Health Prizes The Provincial Board of Health of the Province of British Columbia offers the sum of $100 in prizes for competition in the Course in Public Health Nursing. BURSARIES The Canadian Club of Vancouver Bursary Through the generosity of the Canadian Club of Vancouver, a sum of $300 will be available in 1928-29 to assist worthy male matriculants who would not otherwise be able to enter upon the University course. Candidates must be British subjects. They should make application for the award as soon as possible after the announcement of matriculation results, and not later than September 1st. The American Women's Club Bursary Through the generosity of the American Women's Club of Vancouver a sum of $110 will be available for 1928-29 to assist a student who has satisfactorily completed the First Year in Arts and Science, and who could not otherwise continue the course in the Second Year. Application should be made to the Registrar not later than September 1st. The David Thom Scholarship From the funds of the David Thom Estate a sum of $60.00 is available annually to a student who has satisfactorily completed the work of the First Year in Agriculture and is proceeding to the work of the Second Year. LOANS Funds are provided from which loans, not to exceed $100, may be made to undergraduate students who have completed Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 59 one year's University work and who are in need of pecuniary assistance. Loans are not granted to graduate students nor to students taking the Teacher Training Course. Applications for loans should be addressed to the President of the University. General Loan Funds The General Loan Fund is maintained by annual grants made by the Board of Governors. The Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy B. C. Division Fund This is a cumulative fund of $50 per year, given by the Institute to the University as a trust, to be used for loans to students taking the mining course. Applicants for loans must be recommended by the Departments of Geology, Mining and Metallurgy. The David Thom Scholarship From the David Thom Estate funds a sum of $500.00 has been set asides for loans to Third and Fourth Year students in Agriculture. A loan from this fund will supplement one from the existing University loan funds. GENERAL REGULATIONS 1. Scholarships, medals, and prizes will be awarded at the close of the session, and, in case of Matriculation Examinations, after the June examination. 2. If the award of a medal, scholarship, or prize is based on an examination, no award will be made to a candidate who obtains less than 75 per cent, of the possible marks. 3. Candidates are not permitted to hold more than one scholarship each, although they may win more and will be given credit in the published lists if they do. Scholarships thus won but not held will pass to candidates next in order of merit, provided they have made the required marks. 4. Scholarships under the jurisdiction of the University are paid in three instalments—on the 15th of November, the 15th 60 The University of British Columbia of January and the 15th of March. Normally this is during the session following their award, and undergraduate winners must continue their courses to the satisfaction of the Faculty concerned. But Faculty may permit a scholarship to be reserved a year, provided the student shows satisfactory reasons for postponing attendance. 5. Winners of scholarships who desire to do so may resign the monetary value, while the appearance of their names in the University list enables them to retain the honour. Any funds thus made available will be used for additional scholarships or student loans. 6. Medals, scholarships, prizes, bursaries and loans are open to winter session students only, unless otherwise stated, and marks obtained in summer session courses are not taken into account in awarding them. 7. The University is in possession of a great deal of information regarding postgraduate scholarships, fellowships and assistantships in other Universities, or as given by various research bodies. Places are available in practically all departments of University work. Students wishing to pursue postgraduate work outside this University are advised to consult the Registrar for information. w THE FACULTY OF ARTS AND SCIENCE TIME TABLE FACULTY OF ARTS KEY TO BUILDINGS: A, Arts; Ag, Agriculture; MORNINGS 10 11 Monday Biology 2 Biology 8 Botany 6e Economics 6 English 1 a.. _.. Sees. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 English 13 French 2 Sees, a, b, c French 4 c Geology 3 and 4... Greek 1 Mathematics 10... Mathematics 17 .... Philosophy 1 a Physics 1 a Botany 6 a Botany 6 d Chemistry 3 Economics 1 a English 1, Sec. 13 English 9 French 8 b French 4 b Geology 1 History 5 Mathematics 1 ... Sees. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 Philosophy 1 C Philosophy 8 1 Sec. B Physics 1 b Physics 8 Agricultural Economics Biology 1 Chemistry 7 Economics 1 b English 14 French 1 Sees, a, b, c, d.. French 3 c French 4d Geology 8 German, Beg. A.. Government 3 History 2 History 7 Latin 1 a. Mathematics 2 Philosophy 3 Physics 4 Zoology 1 Room AplOl AplOl AplOl S300 A 103, 106,205, 203, 206 207 A 100 A 101, 104,105 A 202 Apl02 A 102 A 201 A 208 AplOO S200 AplOl AplOl S417 A 103 A 204 A 100 A 104 A 105 AplOO A 101 A 106 108, 203, 205, 206, 207 A 208 S400 S200 S210 Ag 104 AplOO S417 S400 A 203 A 105, 108,204 207 A 208 A 104 Apl02 A 201 S200 A 100 A 101 A 103 A 106 A 102 S210 AplOl Tuesday Botany 2 Botany 4 Economics 2 English I b Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 French 2 Sees, d, e, f Geology 5 and 12.. Latin 2 Latin 5 Mathematics 1 Sec. 1 Mathematics 16 .... Physics 2 a Zoology 2 , Zoology 3 Botany 3 Botany 6 c Chemistry 9 Economics 1 c Economics 4 English 17 French 4 a Geology 2 German 1 Government I Greek 2 History 6 Mathematics 1 Sees. 2, 3, 4, 5, * 6. 7 Philosophy 2 Physics 2 b ... Botany 1 Botany 6 b Chemistry 1 c .... Chemistry 4 Economics 1 d French 1 Sees, e, f, g, h.. French 8 a French 4 d..: Geology 6 Government 2 History 3 History 9 Latin 1 b Philosophy 8, Sec. A Zoology 4 Zoology 7 Room AplOl A 108 A 100, 106, 205, 206,207, 208 A 101, 104,105 Apl02 A 108 A 102 A 203 AglOl S200 AplOl AplOl AplOl AplOl S417 A 103 A 100 A 203 A 104 A 201 A 108 A 102 A 101 A 105, 106,205 206,207 208 A 204 S200 AplOl Ap235 S300 S417 AplOO A 104, 105,108, 203 A 100 A 202 Apl02 A 102 A 106 A 101 A 103 A 205 AplOl Ap 101 Wednesday Room AplOl Ap 101 Biology 3 _ Botany 6 e AplOl S300 Economics 6 English 1 a A 103, Sees. 7, 8, 9, 10, 106, 203 12, 12 205, 206 207 English 13 A 100 French 2 A 101, Sees, a, b, c 104,105 French 4 c A 202 Geology 3 and 4 Apl02 Greek 1 _ A 102 Mathematics 10 . A 201 Mathematics 17 A 208 Philosophy 1 a AplOO Physics 1 a S200 Botany 6 d AplOl S417 Chemistry 3 A 103 English 1, Sec. 13. A 204 English 9 A 100 French 3 b A 104 French 4 b A 105 Geology 1 AplOO History 5 A 101 Mathematics 1 A 106 Sees. 8, 9, 10, 11, 108,203, 12, 13 205,206, 207 Philosophy 1 C A 208 Philosophy 8, Sec. B S400 Physics 1 b S200 Physics 3 S210 Agricultural Economics Ag 104 Biology 1 AplOO Chemistry 7 ..._ S417 Economics 1 b S400 English 14 A 203 French 1 A 105, Sees, a, b, c, d... 108,204, 207 A 208 French 4 d A 104 Apl02 A 201 German, Beg. A.... Government 3 S200 History 2 A 100 History 7 A 101 Latin 1 a A 103 Mathematics 2 A 106 Philosophy 3 A 102 Physics 4 S210 Zoology I AplOl -1928-29 AND SCIENCE Ap, Applied Science; S, Science. MORNINGS Thubsday Botany 2 Economics 2 English 1 b Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 French 2 ..... Sees, d, e, f Geology 5 and 12.. Latin 2 Latin 5 > Mathematics 1, Sec. 1 Mathematics 16 Physics 2 a . Zoology 2 Zoology 3 A 108 A 100, 106,205 206,207, 208 A 101, 104,105 Apl02 A 103 A 102 A 203 AglOl S200 AplOl AplOl Botany 3 Botany 6 c Chemistry 9 Economics 1 c Economics 4 English 17 French 4 a Geology 2 German 1 Government 1 Greek 2 History 6 Mathematics 1 Sees. 2, 3, 4, 5 6, 7 Philosophy 2 Physics 2b . Botany 1 Chemistry 1 c Chemistry 4 Economics 1 d French 1 Sees, e, f, g, h.. French 8 a French 4 d Geology 6 Government 2 History 3 History 9 Latin lb Philosophy 8, Sec. A Zoology 4 Zoology 7 Room AplOl AplOl S417 A 103 A 100 A 203 A 104 A 201 A 108 A 102 A 101 A 105, 106,205, 206,207, 208 A 204 S200 AplOl S300 S417 AplOO A 104, 105,108, 203 A 100 A 202 Apl02 A 102 A 106 A 101 A 103 A 205 AplOl AplOl Botany 6f Botany 7 a Economics 6 English 1 b Sections 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Friday English 13 French 2 Sees, a, b, c . French 4 c Geology 3 and 4. Greek 1 Mathematics 10 ... Mathematics 17 ... Philosophy 1 a . Physics 1 a Botany 5 a Chemistry 2 Economics 1 a English 1, Sec. 13.. English 9 French 3 b French 4 b Geology 7 History 5 Mathematics 1 Sees. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 Philosophy 1 C Philosophy 8, Sec. B Physics 1 b Agricultural Economics Economics 1 b .... English 14 French 1 Sees, a, b, c, d.. French 3 c French 4 d Geology 8 German, Beg. A.. Government 3 History 2 History 7 Latin 1 a Mathematics 2 Philosophy 8 Zoology 6 Zoology 5 Room AplOl S300 A 103, 106, 203. 205, 206, 207 A 100 A 101, 104,105 A 202 Apl02 A 102 A 201 A 208 AplOO S200 AplOl S300 A 103 A 204 A 100 A104 A105 A 101 A 106 108, 203. 205, 206 207 A 208 S400 S200 Ag 104 S400 A 203 A 105, 108,204, 207 A 208 A 104 Apl02 A 201 S200 A 100 A 101 A 103 A 106 A 102 AplOl AplOl Botany 5 b Lab Chemistry 9 Lab Economics 2 English 1 a Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 French 2 Sees, d, e, t ... Geology 10 Latin 2 Latin 5 Mathematics 1, Sec. 1 Mathematics 16 Physics 2 a Saturday A 108 A 100, 106.206, 206.207, 208 A 101, 104,105 Botany 5 b Lab Chemistry 9 Lab- Economics 1 c Economics 4 English 17 French 4 a Geology 10 German 1 _ Government 1 Greek 2 History 6 Mathematics 1 Sees. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 Philosophy 2 Physics 2 b .... Botany 5 b Lab.... Chemistry 1 c Chemistry 9 Lab.. Economics 1 d . French 1 Sees, e, f, g, h... French 3 a French 4 d Geology 10 Government 2 History 8 History 9 Latin 1 b Philosophy 8, Sec. A Room A 103 A 102 A 203 AglOl S200 A 103 A 100 A 203 A 104 A 201 A 108 A102 A 101 A 105, 106,205, 206,207, 208 A 204 S200 S300 AplOO A 104, 105,108, 203 A 100 A 202 A 102 A 106 A 101 A 103 A 205 10 11 AFTERNOONS TIME TABLE Monday Room Tuesday • Room Wednesday Room Botany 8 Lab Botany 5 Lab Economics 5 English 2 b S300 A 208 A 100, Ap 100, S400 A 104, 105,108, 203 A 204 A 106 A 102 A 205 S200 Bacteriology 1 Botany 6 b and e A 201 A 101 A 105, 106,203, 205,206, 207, 208 A 204 Biology 1 Lab. 3.. Botany 8 Lab. Chemistry 1 a Economics 5 English 2 a English 5 S300 Mathematics 1 Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 A 208 French 1 A 100 French 1 A 104, Sees, i, j, k, 1 French 4 c 105,108, 1 Sees, i, j, k, 1 French 4 c Philosophy 6 Zoology 8 Lab. 203 A 204 History 4 History 4 A 106 Latin 3 Philosophy 9 Sociology A 102 Philosophy 9 Sociology A 205 S200 Zoology 6 Lab Botany 5 Lab Chemistry 7 Lab.... English 10 S300 A 206 A 104 A 105, 203, 204 AplOO A 100 A 101 S210 A 103 Bacteriology 1 Biology 1 Lab. 1.... Botany 2 A 103, 105,106, 205, 206, 207, 208 A 100 A 208 Biology 3 Lab. 3.... Botany 3 Lab. Botany 6 c Lab Chemistry 1 b English 10 .... Botany 6 b and e Lab S800 English 16 French I A 206 Chemistry 1 Lab. 2 English 1 b English 16 . A 104 Sees, m, n, o Geography 1 French 1 A 105, Sees. 7, 8, 9, loJ 11, 12, 13 English 2 c Sees, m, n, o Geography I History 1 203,204 2 History 1 History 8 AplOO Physics 4 Lab. Sociology A 100 A101 Mathematics 4 Physics 3 Lab, Zoology 3 Lab Philosophy 1 b Sociology S210 Zoology 5 Lab. A 103 Zoology 6 Lab. 3 Bacteriology 1 Botany 5 Lab Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 Chemistry 2 Lab. a Chemistry 7 Lab English 12 A 201 Apl02 A 102 Biology 1 Lab. 1.... Botany 2 Lab., Botany 4 Lab. Chemistry 1 Lab. 2 Chemistry 2 Lab. b A 101 A 102 Geology 5 Latin 7 Physics 3 Lab Zoology 2 Lab Zoology 3 Lab Physics 4 Lab. Zoology 5 Lab. 4 Bacteriology Botany 5 Lab Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 Chemistry 2 Lab. a Chemistry 7 Lab.... Physics 4 Lab. Biology 1 Lab. 2... Botany 2 Lab Botany 4 Lab. ..... Chemistry 1 Lab. 2 Chemistry 2 Lab. b Physics 3 Lab. 5 Bacteriology Chemistry 1 Lab. I Chemistry 2 Lab. a S400 Biology 1 Lab. 2... Botany 2 Lab Chemistry 2 Lab. fc —Continued AFTERNOONS Thursday Room Friday Room . Botany 6 c and e Lab English 8 A 201 A 101 A108 106, 203, 205, 206, 207 A 204 Chemistry 1 a English 2 a French 1 S300 A 208 A 100 A 104, 105,108, 203 A 204 A 106 A 102 A 205 S200 English 7 Geology 1 Lab. Sees. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 Sees, i, j, k, 1 French 4 c History 4 Philosophy 6 1 Zoology 1 Lab. Latin 3 Philosophy 9 _ Sociology Zoology 7 Lab Botany 6 c and e Lab Chemistry 8 Lab. b Sees. 1, 2, 8, 4, 5, 6 _.. A 100, 106,205, 206,207, 208 A208 Bacteriology 1 Biology 1 Lab. 5.. Botany 6d Lab Chemistry 1 b Chemistry 3 Lab. a English 10 S300 A 206 A 104 A 105, 203,204 AplOO A 100 A 101 S210 >A 103 English 16 French 1 Geology 1 Lab. Mathematics 4 Sees, m, n, o Geology 2 Lab History 1 History 8 2 Philosophy 1 b Sociology Biology I Lab. 4.... Chemistry 1 Lab. 8 Chemistry 2 Lab. b Chemistry 8 Lab. b English 15 A 101 A 102 Bacteriology 1 Biology 1 Lab. 5.... Botany 6d Lab. Chemistry 1 Lab. 4 Chemistry 2 Lab. a Chemistry 3 Lab. a English 12 A 201 3 Latin 7 Zoology 7 Lab. Geology I Lab. Biology I Lab. 4.... Chemistry 1 Lab. 8 Chemistry 2 Lab. b Chemistry 8 Lab. b Zoology 1 Lab. Biology 1 Lab. 6.. Chemistry 1 Lab. 4 Chemistry 2 Lab. a Chemistry 8 Lab. a 4 Chemistry 1 Lab. 8 Chemistry 2 Lab. b Biology 1 Lab. 6.... Chemistry 1 Lab. 4 Chemistry 2 Lab. a 5 Faculty of Arts and Science Supplemental Examinations SEPTEMBER, 1928 OS Date Hour First Year Second Year Third Year Wednesday, 9 A.M. 2 P.M. 9 A.M. 2 P.M. 9 A.M. 2 P.M. 9 A.M. 9 A.M. 2 P.M. 9 A.M. 2 P.M. 9 A.M. 2 P.M. History 1, 2, 3 History 1, 2, 3 September 12th Thursday, English Literature September 13th Friday, September 14th Chemistry 1 French H Greek Saturday, Physics 1 Physics 1, 2, 3 9 September 15th Philosophy 1 a *« Monday, September 17th a 9 Zoology 1 a. Tuesday, English Composition September 18th Wednesday, September 19th ► Q O 3 03 w a i—t H O H FACULTY OF ARTS AND SCIENCE The degrees offered in this Faculty are Bachelor of Arts (B.A.) and Master of Arts (M.A.). COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A. The degree of B.A. is granted with Honours or as a Pass degree. A Pass degree will be granted on completion of courses amounting to 60 units chosen. in conformity with Calendar regulations. No distinction is made between Pass and Honour students in the First and Second Years, except as regards prerequisites for later work, but in the Third and Fourth Years there are special requirements for Honour students. A double course is offered in Arts and Science and Applied Science leading to the degrees of B.A. and B.A.Sc. (See "Double Course.") Credit will not be given for more than 15 units in the First or Second Year of the Winter Session; nor for more than 18 units in the Third or Fourth Year. Credits obtained at the Summer Session (see University Summer Session) may be obtained with Winter Session credits to complete the 60 units required for the degree of B.A.; but not more than 30 units of credit may be obtained in the two academic years subsequent to Junior Matriculation nor more than 15 in the academic year subsequent to Senior Matriculation. The degree of B.A. will not be granted within three years from Senior Matriculation nor within four years from Junior Matriculation. The maximum credit for Summer Session work in any one Calendar year is 6 units; and the maximum credit for work other than that of the regular Summer and Winter Sessions is 3 units per academic year, and 15 units in all subsequent to Senior Matriculation or First Year Arts. No credit will be granted for work done at other universities in the same academic year in- which work has been attempted at this university, whether in the Summer Session or in the 68 Faculty of Arts and Science Winter Session or otherwise. Extra-mural work done at other universities prior to registration at this university may be accepted, if approved by the Faculty, but may not exceed 3 units in respect of any one academic year or 15 units in all subsequent to Senior Matriculation. If a student is granted credit for extra-mural work taken elsewhere the number of units which he may take at this university without attendance at a Winter or Summer Session will be correspondingly reduced. Candidates for the degree of B.A. are advised to attend at least one Winter Session, preferably that of the Fourth Year. A student seeking the degree of B.A. without attending a Winter Session in his Fourth Year will be required to write, in addition to the examinations in each course, one paper in each of the two departments in which his major work has been done. This paper will be on the whole of the student's work in the department during his Third and Fourth Years. Courses are described in terms of units. A unit normally consists of one lecture hour (or one continuous laboratory period of not less than two or more than three hours) per week throughout the session, or two lecture hours (or equivalent laboratory periods) throughout a single term. Note.—Students in any of the affiliated Theological Colleges who file with the Registrar a written statement expressing their intention of graduating in Theology will be allowed to offer, in each year of their Arts course, in place of optional subjects set down in the Calendar for the Year and course in which they are registered, Religious Knowledge options, to the extent of three units taken from the following list: Hebrew, Biblical Literature, New Testament Greek, Church History, Christian Ethics and Apologetics. FIRST AND SECOND YEARS 1. The requirements of the first two years consist of 30 units, 15 of which must be taken in each year. Courses must be chosen in conformity with the requirements that follow. Details of courses are given under the various departments. First and Second Years 69 Each student must take: Units (a) English 1 in the First Year and English 2 in the Second Year 6 *(&) The first two courses in a language offered for Matriculation, one course in each year 6 (c) Mathematics 1, in the First Year 3 (d) Economics 1, or History 1 or 2 or 3, or Philosophy 1 3 (e) Biology 1, or Chemistry 1, or Geology 1, or Physics 1, or Physics 2 3 (/) Three courses!—not already chosen— selected from the following:— Biology 1, Botany 1, Chemistry 1, Chemistry 2, Economics 1, Economics 2, French 1, French 2, Geography 1, Geology 1, Geology 2, f Beginners' German, German 1, German 2, f Beginners' Greek, Greek 1, Greek 2, History 1, History 2, History 3, Latin 1, Latin 2, Mathematics 2, Mathematics 3, Mathematics 4, Philosophy 1, Physics 1 or Physics 2, Physics 3, Zoology 1 9 Note.—Botany 1, Zoology 1, Geology 1 and 2 and History 3 are not open to First Year students. Economics 1, and Philosophy 1 are open to First Year students only if the permission of the Heads of these departments is obtained. History 2 is open to First Year students only if they ♦See Regulation "2." tSee Regulations "3" and "4.' 70 Faculty op Arts and Science are preparing for entrance to the Normal School. Geology 1, normally a Third Year subject, may be taken in the Second Year and must be so taken by students intending to take the Honour course in Geology. 2. Students, who have not matriculated in Greek, may take Beginners' Greek in their First Year as a matriculation subject and follow it up with Greek 1 and Greek 2 to satisfy the language requirements under 1 (b). 3. No student in his First Year may elect more than one beginners' course in language, and no beginners' course in language will count towards a degree unless followed by a second year's work in that language. t 4. Except in the case of beginners' courses, no course in language may be taken by a student who has not offered that language at Matriculation. A beginners' course in language may not be taken for credit by a student who has obtained credit for that language at Matriculation. 5. A student taking three languages in the first two years may defer the course selected under 1 (e) to the Third or Fourth Year, and a student taking four science courses may defer the course selected under 1 (d) to the Third or Fourth Year. Note :—The following special conditions affecting admission to Applied Science are given for the information of students intending to enter that Faculty: (a) Nursing and Health courses require Junior Matriculation or equivalent (as for Arts). (b) All other courses require: (i) Junior Matriculation or equivalent, (ii) Also a First Year Arts Course or equivalent, which shall include the following subjects: Chemistry 1; Mathematics 1, (Algebra, Geometry and Trigonometry); Physics 1, or 2; English 1; Latin 1, or French 1, or German B. Pass Courses 71 The passing grade is 50 per cent, for Chemistry, Physics and each of the Mathematics subjects; but in the others a pass grade of 40 per cent, will be accepted, provided an average of 50 per cent, has been obtained in the total. Biology 1 may be taken as an optional extra subject, and, if passed with a grade of at least 50 per cent., need not be taken in Applied Science. Economics 1 taken in Arts is accepted in lieu of Economics in Applied Science. A reading kuowledge of French and German is desirable for students in Engineering. No student may enter with any outstanding supplemental in Junior Matriculation or in any of the Chemistry, Mathematics or Physics subjects listed above; or with supplementals in other subjects to the extent of more than three units. Students who have failed to complete the above requirements may apply for permission to take the September Supplemental Examinations in Arts. To ensure the conformity of their courses to Calendar regulations, all students in their Second Year are advised to submit to the Dean of the Faculty, on or before March 31st of each year, a scheme of the courses they propose to take during their last two years. THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS The requirements of the Third and Fourth Years consists of 30 units, of which students must take, in their Third Year, not less than 15 units. PASS CURRICULUM 1. A minimum of 15 units must be taken in two Major subjects, not less than 6 units in either, and a minimum of 6 units in some other subject or subjects. Work in the First or Second Year is required in each of the Major subjects, except in the case of Bacteriology. Both Major subjects must be chosen from one of the following groups: (a) Chemistry, Bacteriology, Botany, Geology, Physics, Zoology. (6) Chemistry, Physics, Mathematics. (c) Economics, Philosophy, Mathematics. 72 Faculty Of Arts and Science (d) English, Greek, Latin, French, German, History, Economics, Philosophy. 2. Details of courses available in the Third and Fourth Years are given under the various departments. •First and Second Year courses may be taken in the Third or Fourth Year, but only with the consent of the Department concerned and of the Department in which the candidate is doing his major work, and no such course (with the exception of Third and Fourth Year subjects which are open to Second Year students) will be counted for more than 2 units in the Third or Fourth Year. But the Department in which such a course is taken may supplement it by a reading course or special course counting one unit. No credit will be given for a language course normally taken in the First Year unless it is taken in the Third Year and continued in the Fourth Year. Some courses, however, are intended for Honour students only. 3. During the Fourth Year one course of private reading, to count not more than 3 units, may be taken with the consent of the department concerned. A student will, for the purpose of this rule, be deemed to be in his Fourth Year if he has completed his First and Second Years and 15 units in Third and Fourth Year courses. Credit for a course of private reading is part of the maximum of 15 units which may be taken in addition to the regular work of Winter and Summer Sessions and no other additional work may be taken in the same academic year. HONOURS 1. Students whose proposed scheme of work involves Honour courses must obtain the consent of the departments concerned and of the Dean before entering on these courses; and this consent will normally be granted only to those students who have a clear academic record at the end of their Second Year with at least Second Class standing in the subject or subjects of special- •This regulation applies to students in Pass courses only, and an exception is made in the case of Greek 1 and German 1. Honour Courses 73 ization. (Cards of application for admission to Honour courses may be obtained at the Registrar's office.) 2. Certain departments offer Honour courses either alone or in combination with other departments. For Honours in a single department, at least 18 of the requisite 30 units must be taken in the department concerned, and at least 6 outside it. For Honours in combined courses, at least 12 units are required in each of two subjects. Particulars of these courses are given below. 3. All candidates for Honours may, at the option of the department or departments concerned, be required to present a graduating essay embodying the results of some investigation that they have made independently. Credit for the graduating essay will be not less than 3 or more than 6 units. 4. Candidates for Honours are required, at the end of their Fourth Year, to take a general examination, oral or written, or both, as the department or departments concerned shall decide. This examination is designed to test the student's knowledge of his chosen subject or subjects as a whole'and is in addition to the ordinary class examinations of the Third and Fourth Years. 5. Honours are of two grades—First Class and Second Class. Students who, in the opinion of the department concerned, have not attained a sufficiently high ranking may be awarded a pass degree. If a combined Honour course is taken, First Class Honours will be given only if both the departments concerned agree; and an Honour degree will be withheld if either department refuses a sufficiently high ranking. 6. The following Honour courses are regularly offered, and other Honour courses may be arranged with the department or departments concerned. HONOUR COURSES IN SINGLE DEPARTMENTS Biology (Botany Option) Prerequisites:—Biology 1, Chemistry 1, and Botany 1. Physics 1 and Zoology 1 are required before completion of the course and should be taken as early as possible. Students are advised to take Chemistry 2 and 3. 74 Faculty of Arts and Science Required Courses:—Botany 3, 4, 5 (a), and 6 (c). Optional Courses:—Biology 2 and 3; courses in Botany not specifically required; and courses in Zoology. Optional courses should be selected in consultation with the department. Biology (Zoology Option) Prerequisites:—Biology 1, Zoology 1, Chemistry 1. Physics 1 and Botany 1 are required before completion of the course and should be taken as early as possible. Students are advised to take Chemistry 2 and 3. Required Courses:—Zoology 2, 3, 5, 6. Optional Courses:—Zoology 4, 7, 8; courses in Botany, Geology 6. These optional courses should be selected in consultation with the Head of the department. Chemistry Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2, and Mathematics 2. Course:—Candidates are required to complete the following courses: Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9 and 10. Classics Course:—Any three of Greek 3, 5, 6, 7, and any three of Latin 3, 4, 5, 6. As proof of ability to write Greek and Latin prose, candidates must attain not less than Second Class standing in Greek 8 and Latin 8. During the candidate's Fourth Year, papers will be set on sight translation; and the candidate is advised to pursue a course of private reading under the supervision of the department. There will also be a general paper on Antiquities, Literature and History. Economics Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German. Course:—Economics 2 if not already taken, any 15 further units in the department, and a graduating essay which will count 3 units. (Tutorial instruction will be arranged in connection with the essay.) Honour Courses 75 Students must pass an oral examination and, if required, address a general audience on a designated subject. Work in this department should be supplemented by a course in Ethics and by the foundational courses in History. English Language and Literature Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German. Course:—English 19 (involving an examination on the life, times, and complete works of some major English author), 20, 21 (a), 21 (b), 22, 24 (the seminar, which must be attended in both years, though credit will be given only for the work of the final year), and a graduating essay which will count 3 units. Candidates will be required to take a final Honours examination, written or oral, or both, on the History of English Literature. In the award of Honours special importance will be attached to the graduating essay and to the final Honours Examination. If the candidate's work outside the department does not include a course in English History, he must take an examination in that subject. Geology Prerequisites:—Geology 1. If possible Geology 2 should be taken. Chemistry 1 and Physics 1 should be taken in the First Year. Zoology 1, to which Biology 1 is prerequisite, should be taken in the Third Year in preparation for Geology 6. Course:—18 units to be chosen from Geology 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12. History Course:—Any 18 units, of which the graduating essay will count 3 units. The seminar (which carries no credit) must be attended in either the Third or the Fourth Year. A reading knowledge of French is required. French Course:—French 3 (a), 3 (b), 3 (c) in the Third Year. French 4 (a), 4 (&), 4 (c) in the Fourth Year. A graduating essay (in French) which will count 3 units. 76 Faculty of Arts and Science Mathematics Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2. Course:—Any 18 units in Mathematics, and Physics 3 and 4. Mathematics 3 or 4, but not both, may be taken among the requisite 18 units. A final Honours Examination is required. Physics Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2. Course.«—-Mathematics 10, 16, 17. Physics 3 and 4, and 12 additional units. COMBINED HONOUR COURSES (a) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and Bacteriology Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1 and 2; Biology 1; Botany 1, or Zoology 1. #" ^ Course:—Bacteriology 1, 2 and 5; the required courses for either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour course in Biology. (b) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and Geology Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Biology 1; Geology 1. Course:—Geology 2, 3 and 6; the required courses for either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour course in Biology. (c) Chemistry and Biology (Botany and Zoology) Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1 and 2; Physics 1 or 2; Biology 1. Course:—Chemistry 3, 4, 5, 7 and 9; the required courses for either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour course in Biology. (d) Chemistry and Physics Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2, and Mathematics 2. Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and Physics 3, 4, 7 or 9, and 8 or 10. Candidates are advised to take Mathematics 10. Honour Courses 77 (e) Chemistry and Geology Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics T or 2, and Geology 1. Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and at least 12 units in Geology. (f) Chemistry and Mathematics Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1; Mathematics 1 and 2. Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, and at least 12 units in Mathematics, including Mathematics 10. (g) Mathematics and Physics Prerequisites:—Mathematics 1 and 2; Physics 1 or 2. Course:—Mathematics, at least 12 units, including Mathematics 10, 16 and 17. ^stuir Physics, at least 12 units, including Physics 3 if not already taken, and Physics 4. (h) Any two of: Economics, English, French, History, Latin, Philosophy. Economics Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German. Course:—Any 12 units, including Economics 2, if not already taken. English Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German. Course:—English 20 and 24, and any three of the English courses of the first division. The seminar must be attended during both of the final years, but credits which count for the B.A. degree will be given only for the work of the Fourth Year. A final Honours Examination, written or oral, or both, is required on the History of English Literature since 1500. French Course:—If the graduating essay is written on a French subject, 3 (a) and 3 (c), 4 (a) and 4 (c); otherwise either these courses or 3 (a) and 3 (6), 4 (a) and 4 (b). 78 Faculty of Arts and Science Courses 3 (6) and 4 (6) are intended primarily for Honour students and should be taken whenever possible, even if they are not required to make up th6 minimum number of units. History Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French. Course:—History 4 or 5 and any 9 additional units, of which the graduating essay, if written in History, will count 3 units. The seminar (which carries no credits) must be attended in either the Third or Fourth Year. Latin tk Course:—Latin 8 and any four of 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. In the final year candidates must pass an examination (a) in sight translation, and (b) in Latin Literature, History and Antiquities. Private reading under the direction of the department is recommended. Philosophy Course:—Any 12 units besides Philosophy 1, six units in each year. \ty COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A. 1. Candidates for the M.A. degree must hold the B.A. degree from this University, or its equivalent. 2. A graduate of another university applying for permission to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his application an official statement of his graduation together with a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects of his course. The Faeulty will determine the standing of such a student in this University. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00. 3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records who proceed to the Master's degree shall be required: To spend one year in resident graduate study; or Courses Leading To the Degree of M.A. 79 (i) To do two or more years of private work under the supervision of the University, such work to be • equivalent to one year of graduate study; or (ii) To do one year of private work under University supervision and one term of resident graduate study, the total of such work to be equivalent to one year of resident graduate study. 4. One major and one minor shall be required. 5. Two typewritten copies of each thesis, on standard-sized thesis paper, shall be submitted. (See special circular of "Instructions for the Preparation of Masters' Theses.") 6. Application for admission as a graduate student shall be made to the Registrar by October 15th. 7. The following requirements apply to all Departments: Prerequisites: Minor:—For a minor, at least six units of work regularly offered in the Third and Fourth years shall be prerequisite. For details or requirements, see regulations of the several Departments. Major:—For a major, at least eight units of work regularly offered in the Third and Fourth years shall be prerequisite. For details of requirements, see regulations of the several Departments. Students who have not fulfilled the requirements outlined above during their undergraduate course may fulfil the same by devoting more than one academic year's study to the M.A. work. M. A. Courses: Minor:—Five or six units of regular Third or Fourth year work, or equivalents in reading courses. Examina- 80 Faculty of Arts and Science tions to be written, or oral, or both at the discretion of the Department concerned. At least second class standing is required in the subjects of the minor. \ Major:—Nine or ten units of regular Third or Fourth year work, or equivalents in reading courses, of which units three to six shall be counted for the thesis. All candidates must submit to a general examination on the major field. This examination may be written, or oral, or both, at the discretion of the Department concerned. At least second class standing is required in the work of the major. Languages:—No candidate will receive the degree of M.A. who has not satisfied the Head of the Department with which he is majoring of his ability to read technical articles either in French or in German. Students doing tutorial work shall not be allowed to come up for final examination in less than two academic years after registration as M.A. students. The following special requirements are prescribed by different departments: Biology (Botany Option) Prerequisites: Minor:—Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany and Zoology. Major:—Biology 1, Botany 1, and eight additional units including Zoology 1. M. A. Course: Minor:—A minimum of five units chosen in consultation with the Department. Major:—Thesis, at least five units, and other courses to complete required units. Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A. 81 Biology (Zoology Option) Prerequisites: Minor:—Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany and Zoology. Major:—Biology 1, Zoology 1, and eight additional units, including Botany 1. M.A. Course: Minor:—A minimum of five units chosen in consultation with the Department. Major:—Thesis, at least five units, and other courses to complete the required number of units. Economics Prerequisites: Minor:—The B.A. degree involving credit for at least fifteen units of work in subjects in the Department, or an equivalent. #"■ "^^^ Major:—The B.A. degree with Honours in Economics; or in Economics in combination with some other subject; or an equivalent. M.A. Course: \ \^^ All candidates for the Master's degree in this Department must attend the Honour Seminar. English Prerequisites: Minor:—At least nine units of credit for English courses elective in the Third and Fourth years of the undergraduate curriculum. Major:—At least fifteen units of credit for courses elective in the Third and Fourth years. M.A. Course: Minor:—Six units of credit in advanced courses in English not already taken. 82 Faculty of Arts and Science Major:—(a) Twelve units of credit in advanced courses not already taken, one of which courses must be English 21a, or its equivalent, if this has not been previously offered for credit. (b) A graduating essay which will count as an advanced course involving three units of credit. (c) Oral examinations on the history of English Literature. (d) A reading knowledge of either French or German. A student who offers both languages will be allowed three units of credit towards the M.A. degree. French Detailed Study: (a) O.F.—Aucassin and Nicolette. (b) XVIth Century—Montaigne, Essais (Hatier). Chefs- d'oeuvre poetiques du XVIe siecle (Hatier). Less Detailed: (c) XVIIth Century and after—The evolution of the French Novel, particularly the novels treated in Le Breton's Roman au XVIIe sidcle—Roman au XVIIIe siecle, and the chief Romantic Novels. (d) XVIIIth Century—Beaumarchais, Barbier de Seville. Rousseau, La Nouvelle Heloise—Emile. Diderot, Le Neveu de Rameau. Voltaire, Les Lettres philosophiques. (e) XlXth Century—Auzas, La poesie au 19e siecle. (Oxford). Alfred de Musset, Theatre. (Oxford). Rostand, Cyrano de Bergerac. (Fasquelle). (f) A general knowledge of French literary history from XVIth Century to end of XlXth. This not to be detailed, but to treat of main movements. (g) A thesis in French on a subject to be approved by the Head of the Department. Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A. 83 Note :—It is' expected that the candidate will have read and will be able to discuss three plays of Moliere, three of Corneille, three of Racine, and something of Boileau, Bossuet, Chateaubriand, La Fontaine, Lamartine, Victor Hugo, Balzac, Flaubert, Anatole France. Some help will be given by lectures, explanations of texts, and advice in reading, but the Department cannot undertake to cover the whole or any considerable part of the syllabus. History Prerequisites: Minor:—Two courses (six units) to be chosen from History 4 to 9 inclusive. Major:—Three courses (nine units) to be chosen from History 4 to 9 inclusive. 4 M.A. Course: Minor:—Two courses (6 units) to be chosen from History 4 to 9 inclusive; or the equivalent in reading courses. All candidates for a minor in History must attend the Honour Seminar. Major:—Two courses (six units) to be chosen from History 4 to 9 inclusive. A thesis embodying original work to which 3 units of credit is given. All candidates for a major in History must attend the Honour Seminar. Examinations shall be written and oral. Candidates for a major will be examined orally on their thesis and their major field. An average of 75 per cent, is required to qualify in the work of a major. Mathematics Prerequisites: Minor:—Mathematics 10 and at least two other Honour Courses. Major:—Candidates must have completed the Honour Course in Mathematics, or its equivalent. 84 Faculty of Arts and Science MA.. Course: Minor:—Mathematics 16 and an additional three units to be chosen from the Honour Courses. Major:—Any four of the graduate courses and a thesis. EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT 1. Examinations in all subjects, obligatory for all students, are held in December and in April. Applications for special consideration on account of illness or domestic affliction must be submitted to the Dean not later than two days after the close of the examination period. In cases where illness is the plea for absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be presented on the appropriate form which may be obtained from the Dean's Office. 2. The passing mark will be 50 per cent, in each subject, except in the case of the First and Second Years when the work of either year is taken as a whole in one session, in which case an aggregate of 50 per cent, will be required and not less than 40 per cent, in each subject. In Beginners' Greek and Beginners' German, however, the passing mark is 50 per cent. In any course which involves both laboratory work and written examinations, students may be debarred from examinations if they fail to present satisfactory results in laboratory work, and they will be required to pass in both parts of the course. 3. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent. 4. If a student's general standing in the final examinations of airy year is sufficiently high, the Faculty may grant him supplemental examinations in the subject or subjects in which he has failed, but a student obtaining less than 30 per cent, in a subject will not be granted a supplemental examination in that subject, except by special permission of the Faculty. Notice will be sent to all students to whom such examinations have been granted. Examinations and Advancement 85 5. Supplemental Examinations will be held in September in respect of Winter Session examinations, and in June or July in respect of Summer Session examinations. They will not be granted at any other time except by special permission of the Faculty, and on payment of a fee of $7.50 per paper. To pass a supplemental examination a candidate must obtain at least 50 per cent. A candidate with a supplemental examination outstanding in any subject which is on the Summer Session curriculum may clear his record by attending the Summer Session course in the subject and passing the required examinations. 6. If a student fails in two Supplemental Examinations (whether on the regular date or by way of special examination) in respect of the same Summer Session course, no further Supplemental Examination will be granted to that student in respect of that course. 7. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied by the necessary fees (See schedule of Fees) must be in the hands of the Registrar at least two weeks before the date set for the examinations. 8. No student may enter a higher year with supplemental examinations still outstanding in respect of more than 3 units of the preceding year, nor with any supplemental examination outstanding in respect of the work of an earlier year or of Matriculation unless special permission to do so is granted by Faculty. Such permission will be granted only when Faculty is satisfied that the failure to remove the outstanding supplemental examinations had an adequate cause. 9.' A student may not continue in a later year any subject in which he has a supplemental examination outstanding from an earlier year, except in the case of compulsory subjects in the Second Year. 10. A student who is not allowed to proceed to a higher year may not register as a partial student in respect of the subjects of that higher year. But a student who is required to repeat 86 Faculty of Arts and Science his year will be exempt from attending lectures and passing examinations in subjects in which he has already made at least 50 per cent. In this case he may take, in addition to the subjects of the year which he is repeating, certain subjects of the following year. 11. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to withdraw from the University. 12. Any student whose academic record, as determined by the tests and examinations of the first term of the First or Second Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to discontinue attendance at the University for the remainder of the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to the University as long as any supplemental examinations are outstanding. 13. Term essays and examination papers will be refused a passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English, and, in this event, students will be required to pass a special examination in English to be set by the Department of English. DEPARTMENTS IN ARTS AND SCIENCE Department of Bacteriology Professor: Hibbert Winslow Hill. Instructor: Freda L. Wilson. Assistant: Helen M. Mathews. 1. General Bacteriology:—A course consisting of lectures, demonstrations, and laboratory work. The history of bacteriology, the place of bacteria in nature, the classification of bacterial forms, methods of culture and isolation, and various bactericidal substances and conditions will be studied. The relationship of bacteria to agriculture, household science, and public health will be carefully considered. Text-book:—Buchanan, Agricultural and Industrial Bacteriology, Appleton. Bacteriology 87 Students proceeding to Bacteriology 2 need procure Jordan only (see Bacteriology 2). Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1, and Biology 1. Seven hours a week. First Term. 2 units. 2. Special Bacteriology:—A course consisting of lectures, demonstrations, and laboratory work. The more common pathogenic bacteria will be studied, together with the reaction of the animal body against invasion by these bacteria. The course will include studies in immunity and the various diagnostic methods in use in public health laboratories. Text-book:—Jordan, General Bacteriology, Latest Edition, Saunders. Prerequisite:—Bacteriology 1. Seven hours a week. Second Term. 2 units. 3. As in Dairying 3 (under Faculty of Agriculture.) 1}£ units. 4. As in Dairying 5 (under Faculty of Agriculture.) IV2 units. 5. Advanced Bacteriology:—A reading and laboratory course, including immunology. Tutorial instruction of one hour per week; laboratory and demonstration hours to be arranged with the class. Text-books:—Kolmer, Infection and Immunity. Jordan, General Bacteriology, Latest Editions, Saunders. Prerequisites:—Bacteriology 1 and 2. 3 units. 6. Soil Bacteriology:—A laboratory and lecture course, in which the bacteria of soils are studied qualitatively and quantitatively, with special reference to soil fertility. Text-book:—Lohnis and Fred, Text-book of Agricultural Bacteriology, Latest Edition, McGraw-Hill. Prerequisite:—Bacteriology 1. Five hours a week. First term. 2 units. 7. As in Dairying 7 (under Faculty of Agriculture). 3 units. 88 Faculty of Arts and Science Department of Botany Professor: A. H. Hutchinson. Associate Professor: Prank Dickson. Assistant Professor: John Davidson. Assistant: Jean Davidson. Assistant: R. W. Pillsbury. Assistant: Dorothy Newton. Biology 1. Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory to more advanced work in Botany or Zoology; also to courses closely related to Biological Science, such as Agriculture, Forestry, Medicine. The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelationships of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and division of labour; life-histories; relation to environment. The course is prerequisite to all courses in Botany and Zoology. Text-book: — Smallwood, Text-book of Biology, Lea & Febiger, 1920. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 2. Principles of Genetics:—The fundamentals of Genetics illustrated by the race histories of certain plants and animals; the physical basis of heredity; variations; mutations; acquired characters; Mendel's law with suggested applications. Text-book:—Castle, Genetics and Eugenics, Harvard Press. Prerequisite:—Biology 1. Two lectures per week. First Term. 1 unit. 3. General Physiology:—A study of animal and plant life processes. Open to students of Third and Fourth Years having prerequisite Biology, Chemistry and Physics; the Department should be consulted. Text-book:—Bayliss, Principles of General' Physiology, Longmans, Green. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. Reference reading. Second Term. 3 units. Botany 89 Botany 1. General Botany:—A course including a general survey of the several fields of Botany and introductory to more specialized courses in Botany. This course is prerequisite to all other courses in Botany, except the Evening Course. Partial credit for this course (2 units) may be obtained through the Evening Course. Text-book:—Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany, Vol. I, University of Chicago Press. Prerequisite:—Biology 1. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 2. Morphology:—A comparative study of plant structures. The relationship of plant groups. Comparative life-histories. Emphasis is placed upon the increasing complexity of plant structures, from the lower to the higher forms, involving a progressive differentiation accompanied by an interdependence of parts. Text-book:—Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany, Vol. I, University of Chicago Press. Prerequisite:—Botany 1. Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. First Term. 2 units. 3. Plant Physiology. Text-book:—V. I. Palladin, Plant Physiology, English Edition (Translation of 6th Russian Edition), 1918, Blakiston. Prerequisite:—Botany 1. Two lectures and four hours laboratory work per week. First Term. 2 units. 4. Histology:—A study of the structure and development of plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning, staining, mounting, drawing, reconstructing. Use of microscope, camera lueida; photo-micrographic apparatus. Text-books:—Eames and McDaniels, Introduction to Plant Anatomy, McGraw-Hill. Chamberlain, Methods in Plant Histology, University of Chicago Press. 90 Faculty of Arts and Science Prerequisite:—Botany 1. Seven hours per week. Second Term. 2 units 5. Systematic Botany. 5 (a) Economic Flora:—An introduction to the classification of plants through a study of selected families of economic plants of British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine and industrial arts; harmful to crops and stock. Weeds, and poisonous plants. Methods of control. Prerequisite:—Botany 1. Texts:—Jepson, Economic Plants of California, University of California; Thomson and Sifton, Poisonous Plants and Weed Seeds, University of Toronto Press. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. First Term. l1/^ units. 5 (b) Dendrology:—A study of the forest trees of Canada, the common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of the United States which are not native to Canada. Emphasis on the species of economic importance. Identification, distribution, relative importance, construction of keys. Prerequisite:—Botany 1. Text-books:—Morton & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada, Dominion Forestry Branch, Ottawa; Sudworth, Forest Trees of the Pacific Slope, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C. Davidson and Abercrombie, Conifers, Junipers and Yew, T. F. Unwin. One lecture and one period of two or three hours' laboratory or field work per week. 2 units. 5 (c) Descriptive Taxonomy:—An advanced course dealing with the collection, preparation and classification of "flowering plants." Methods of field, herbarium and laboratory work. Plant description, the use of floras, preparation of keys, identification of species. Systems of classification. Nomenclature. Prerequisites:—Botany 1 and 5 (a). Botany 91 Texts:—Hitchcock, Descriptive Systematic Botany, Wiley & Sons, N. Y.; Henry, Flora of Southern British Columbia, Gage & Co., Toronto. One lecture and four hours laboratory per week. Second Term. lx/2 units. 6 (a) General Plant Pathology:—Identification and life histories of pathogens causing disease of some common economic plants; means of combating them. Text-book:—Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw- Hill. Prerequisite:—Botany 1. One lecture and two hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 1 unit. 6 (b) Forest Pathology:—Nature, identification and control of the more important tree-destroying fungi and other plant parasites of forests. I Text-book:—Rankin, Manual of Tree Diseases, Macmillan. One lecture and two hours laboratory per week during one- half of the Second Term. y2 unit. 6 (c) Plant Pathology (Elementary):—A course similar to 6 (a), but including more details concerning the diseases studied. Text-book:—Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw- Hill. Prerequisite:—Botany 1. Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 2 units. 6 (d) Plant Pathology (Advanced):—A course designed for Honour or Graduate students. Technique; isolation and culture work; inoculations; details concerning the various stages in the progress of plant diseases; a detailed study of control measures. Prerequisite:—Botany 6 (a) or 6 (c). One lecture and four hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 6 (e) Mycology:—A course designed to give the student a general knowledge of the fungi from a taxonomic point of view. Text-books:—Stevens, Plant Disease Fungi, Macmillan. Prerequisite:—Botany 1. 92 Faculty of Arts and Science Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. Credit will be given for a collection of fungi made during the summer preceding the course. First Term. 2 units. 6 (/) History of Plant Pathology:—A lecture course dealing with the history of the science of Plant Pathology from ancient times to the present. Text-book:—Whetzel, An Outline of the History of Phytopathology, Saunders. Prerequisite:—Botany 6 (a) or 6 (c). One lecture per week. Second Term. V2 UQit- 7. Plant Ecology. 7 (a) Forest Ecology and Geography:—The inter-relations of forest trees and their environment; the biological characteristics of important forest trees; forest associations; types and regions; physiography. Text-book:—M. E. Hardy, The Geography of Plants, Oxford University Press. Prerequisite:—Botany 1. One lecture and one period of field and practical work per week. First Term. 1 unit. Evening and Short Courses in Botany A Course in General Botany, comprising approximately fifty lectures, is open to all interested in the study of plant life of the Province. No entrance examination and no previous knowledge of the subject is required. The course is designed to assist teachers, gardeners, foresters, and other lovers of outdoor life in the Province. As far as possible, illustrative material will be selected from the flora of British Columbia. The classes meet every Tuesday evening during the University session (Sept.-May) from 7.30 to 9.30 p.m. Field or laboratory work, under direction, is regarded as a regular part of the course. No examination is required except in the case of University students desiring credit for this course. This course may be Chemistry 93 substituted for the lecture part of Botany 1. Other students desiring to ascertain their standing in the class may apply for a written test. A detailed statement of requirements, and work covered in this course, is issued as a separate circular. Copies may be had on request. Department of Chemistry Professor: R. H. Clark. Professor of Analytical Chemistry: E. H. Archibald. Associate Professor: W. F. Seyer. Associate Professor: M. J. Marshall. Assistant Professor: J. Allen Harris. Instructor: John Allardyce. Instructor: D. F. Stedman. Assistant: A. F. Gallaugher. Assistant: R. H. Ball. Assistant: H. R. Lyle Streight. Assistant: A. Ernest Morell. Assistant: E. H. Nunn. 1. General Chemistry.—This course is arranged to give a full exposition of the general principles involved in modern Chemistry and comprises a systematic study of the properties of the more important metallic and non-metallic elements and their compounds, and the application of Chemistry in technology. Text-book:—Byers, Inorganic Chemistry, Scribners. Three lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis. (a) Qualitative Analysis.—One lecture and six hours laboratory per week throughout the First Term. (During the first six weeks of the term an additional lecture may be substituted for a part of the laboratory work.) (b) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the more important methods of gravimetric and volumetric analysis. Text-book:—Cumming & Kay, Quantitative Analysis, Gurney & Jackson. Prerequisite:—Chemistry 1. 94 Faculty of Arts and Science One lecture and six hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 3 units. Course (b) must be preceded by Course (a). 3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study of the compounds of carbon will include the methods of preparation and a description of the more important groups of compounds in both the fatty and the aromatic series. Chemistry 3 will only be given to those students taking Chemistry 2, or those who have had the equivalent of Chemistry 2. Books recommended:—Holleman-Walker, Text-book of Organic Chemistry, Wiley; Gatterman, The Practical Methods of Organic Chemistry, Macmillan.. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 4. Theoretical Chemistry.—An introductory course on the development of modern Chemistry, including osmotic phenomena, the ionization theory, the law of mass action, and the phase rule. Text-book:—James Walker, Introduction to Physical Chemistry, Macmillan. Prerequisite:—Chemistry 2. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. Second Term. V/2 units. 5. Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis. (a) Qualitative Analysis.—The work of this course will include the detection and separation of the less common metals, particularly those that are important industrially, together with the analysis of somewhat complex substances occurring in nature. One lecture and six hours laboratory per week. First Term. (b) Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made will include the more difficult estimations in the analysis of rocks, as well as certain constituents of steel and alloys. The principles on which analytical chemistry is based will receive a more minute consideration than was possible in the elementary course. Prerequisite:—Chemistry 2. Chemistry 95 One lecture and six hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 3 units. 6. Industrial Chemistry.—Those industries, which are dependent on the facts and principles of Chemistry, will be considered in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures will be supplemented by visits to manufacturing establishments in the neighbourhood, and it is hoped that some lectures will be given by specialists in their respective fields. Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2 and 3. Two lectures per week. 2 units. 7. Physical Chemistry.—The lectures, which are a continuation of those given in 4, include the kinetic theory of gases, thermo-chemistry, the application of the principles of thermodynamics to chemistry, osmotic phenomena, applications of the dissociation theory, colloidal solutions, and a study of the physical properties of gases, liquids, and solids and of their chemical constitutions. Text-books: — Findlay, Physico-Chemical Measurements, Longmans. For reference:—Ramsay's Series of Books on Physical Chemistry, Longmans. Getman, Theoretical Chemistry, Wiley. Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2, 3 and 4. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 8. Electro-Chemistry. — Solutions are studied from the standpoint of the osmotic and the dissociation theories. The laws of electrolysis, electroplating, electromotive force, primary and secondary cells are considered in some detail. For reference:—Le Blanc, Elements of Electro-Chemistry, Macmillan; Creighton-Fink, Theoretical Electro-Chemistry, Vol. I, John Wiley & Sons; Allmand, Applied Electro-Chemistry, Longmans, Green. Prerequisite:—■Chemistry 4. Three lectures and three hours laboratory per week. First Term. 2 units. 96 Faculty of Arts and Science 9. Advanced Organic Chemistry.—Important organic reactions will be discussed. The Carbohydrates, Proteins, Enzyme Action, Terpenes and Alkaloids will be studied in more or less detail. In the laboratory some complex compounds will be prepared and quantitative determinations of carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen, sulphur and the halogens made with the view of identifying organic compounds. For reference:—Cohen, Organic Chemistry, Arnold. Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2 and 3. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 10. History of Chemistry.—Particular attention will be paid to the development of chemical theory. For reference:—Von Meyer-McGowan, History of Chemistry, Macmillan. Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2, 3, and 4. Two hours a week. Second Term. 1 unit. 11. Physical Organic Chemistry.—Stereochemical theories will be discussed in greater detail than in Chemistry 9, and chemical and physico-chemical methods employed in determining the constitution of organic compounds will be studied. The electronic conception of valency as applied to organic compounds will be considered, and an outline of the work done in Electro- Organic chemistry will be given. The lectures may be taken without the laboratory work. Prerequisites:—Chemistry 7 and 9. Lectures: 2 units. Laboratory, three hours per week. 1 unit. 3 units. 12. Colloid Chemistry.—The Chemistry of colloids and the application of colloidal chemistry to industry. For reference:—Bogue, Colloidal Behaviour, Vol. I and II, McGraw-Hill; Freundlich, Colloid Chemistry, Methuen; Reports on Colloid Chemistry by British Association for Advancement of Science. Prerequisites:—Chemistry 3 and 4. Two hours a week. First Term. 1 unit. Chemistry 97 14. Organic Agricultural Chemistry.—An introduction to the compounds of carbon, with special applications to problems in agriculture. The laboratory work will be adapted to the needs of the individual student. Prerequisite:—Chemistry 2. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 15. Dairy Chemistry.—The chemistry of the carbohydrates, fats, and proteins will be discussed in outline, and the chemical processes involved in enzyme action and fermentation will receive consideration. Text-book:—Chamberlain, Agricultural Chemistry, Macmillan. Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2 and 3. One lecture and three hours laboratory per week. 2 units. 17. Chemical Thermodynamics.—Derivation of fundamental equations and application to the gas laws, theory of solutions, chemical equilibrium, electrochemistry and capillarity. Study of the quantum theory and the Nernst heat theorem. Text-book:—Lewis & Randall, Principles of Thermodynamics, McGraw-Hill. Reference:—Sackur, Thermochemistry and Thermodynamics, Macmillan. Prerequisite:—Chemistry 7. Two lectures per week. Second Term. 1 unit. 18. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry.—A more detailed treatment of the chemistry of the metals than is possible in Chemistry 1, together with the chemistry of the Rare Elements. Prerequisite—Chemistry 2 and 4. One lecture per week. 3 units. Text-book:—Lewis & Randall, Principles of Thermodynamics, McGraw-Hill. Reference:—Sackur, Thermochemistry and Thermodynamics, Macmillan. 19. Clinical Laboratory Chemistry.—This course is a general introduction to the chemical problems met with by the technician in the modern clinical laboratory. The underlying 98 Faculty of Arts and Science chemical facts and principles of the various tests in common use will be considered, with a general discussion of their physiological significances. Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2 and 3. Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory work per week. 3 units. Department of Classics Professor: Lemuel Robertson. Professor of Greek: O. J. Todd. Associate Professor: H. T. Logan. Instructor: Geoffrey B. Riddehough. Assistant: H. R. Trumpour. Assistant: Day Walker. Assistant: Winifred E. Boyes. Greek Beginners' Greek.—White, First Greek Book, Chap. I- XLVIII; Copp, Clark. Four hours a Week. ■ ^^ 3 units. 1. Lectures.—White, First Greek Book, Chap. XLIX- LXXX. Xenophon, Anabasis I and IV, Goodwin and White, Ginn. History.—Shuckburgh, History of Greece, Chap. I-V, Unwin. Four hours a week. Mr. Logan. 3 units. 2. Lectures.—Plato, Apology, Dyer-Seymour, Ginn; Aeschylus, Prometheus Bound, Wecklein-AUen, Ginn. Composition—Arnold's Greek Prose Composition, Abbott, Longmans. Selected passages will occasionally be set for Unseen Translation. History.—Shuckburgh, History of Greece, Chap. VI-X, Unwin. Four hours a week. Mr. Todd, Mr. Logan. 3 units. 3. Lectures.—Thucydides, History, Book VII, Marchant, Macmillan; Sophocles, Antigone, Jebb and Shuckburgh, Cambridge; Euripides, Heracles, Gray and Hutchinson, Cambridge. Classics 99 Literature.-—Wright, A Short History of Greek Literature, American Book Company. Three houra a week. Mr. Logan, Mr. Todd. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 5. Lectures.—Homer, IUad (Selections), Monro, Iliad, 2 Vols., Oxford; Demosthenes, Third Olynthdac, First and Third Philippics, Butcher, Oxford (Vol. I.). Literature.—Wright, A Short History of Greek Literature, American Book Company. Three hours a week. 3 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 6. Lectures.—Aristophanes, The Birds, Hall and Geldart, Oxford; Herodotus, History, Hude, Oxford (the equivalent of one book will be read; Lysias, Orations (Selections), Hude, Oxford. (Open only to those who have taken or are taking Greek 3 or 5.) Three hours a week. Mr. Todd, Mr. Robertson. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 7. Lectures.—Aristotle, Ars Poetica, Bywater, Oxford; Plato, The Republic (Selections), Burnet, Oxford. (Open only to those who have taken or are taking Greek 3 or 5.) Three hours a week. 3 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to be taken in both Third and Fourth Years. One lecture a week (for Third Year students); individual conferences. Mr. Todd. 1 unit. 9. Greek History to 14 A.D.—The course will begin with a brief survey of contributary civilizations of pre-Hellenic times and will include a study of social and political life in the Greek world during the period. Knowledge of Greek is not prerequisite. Three hours a week. 3 units (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 100 Faculty of Arts and Science 10. Greek Literature in English Translation.—A survey of Greek literary history from Homer to Lucian, with reading and interpretation of selected works from the most important authors. Knowledge of Greek is not prerequisite. Members of the class will provide themselves with the following books: Aeschylus, translated by Campbell (Oxford); Sophocles, translated by Campbell (Oxford); Euripides, Medea and Alcestis, translated by Murray (Allen and Unwin); Aristophanes, translated by Frere, Vol. I (Dutton). Two hours a week. 2 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) For those who wish to extend the work to 3 units additional reading will be provided. Latin 1. Lectures.—Cicero, De Senectute, Shuckburgh-Egbert, Macmillan, N. Y.; Ovid, Elegiac Selections, Smith, Bell. Composition.—Bradley, Arnold's Latin Prose Composition, Longmans, to exercise 19. History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece and Rome, Dent. Three hours a week. 3 units. Mr. Robertson, Mr. Todd. A fourth hour a week will be devoted to lectures on the Roman History prescribed. Attendance at these lectures is voluntary and no formal credit is given. 2. Lectures.—Virgil, Aeneid, Bk. VI, Page, Macmillan; Cicero, Pro Archia, Nail, Macmillan; Horace Odes II, Page, Macmillan. History.—Boak, A History of Rome to 565 A.D., Macmillan, chapters 14 to 20. Three hours a week. Mr. Robertson, Mr. Logan. 3 units. A fourth hour a week will be devoted to lectures on the Roman History prescribed. Attendance at these lectures is voluntary and no formal credit is given. Classics 101 3. Lectures.—Terence, Phormio, Sloman, Oxford; VirgiL Bucolics and Georgics, Page, Macmillan. Literature:—Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford. Three hours a week. Mr. Todd, Mr. Logan. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 4. Lectures.—Horace, Epistles, Wilkins, Macmillan; Cicero, Selected Letters, Pritchard & Bernard, Oxford. Literature: Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford. Three hours a week. 3 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 5. Lectures.—-Juvenal, Satires, Duff, Cambridge; Seneca, Select Letters, Summers, Macmillan. (Open only to those who have taken or are taking, Latin 3 or 4.) Three hours a week. Mr. Robertson. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 6. Lectures.—Tacitus, Histories I, II, Godley, Macmillan; Garrod, Oxford Book of Latin Verse (Selections), Oxford. (Open only to those who have taken or are taking Latin 3 or 4.) Three hours a week. ^ 3 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 7. Lectures.—Roman History from 133 B.C. to 180 A.D. Text-books: A Short History of the Roman Republic, Heit- land, Cambridge; A History of the Roman Empire, Bury, Murray. A knowledge of Latin is not a prerequisite for this course. Three hours a week. Mr. Logan, 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to b« taken in both Third and Fourth Years. One lecture a week (for Third Year students); individual conferences. Mr, Todd. 1 unit. 102 Faculty of Arts and Science Department of Economics, Sociology and Political Science Professor: Theodore H. Boggs. Associate Professor: H. F. Angus. Associate Professor: S. E. Beckett. Assistant: Doris E. Lazenby. Economics 1. Principles of Economics.—An introductory study of general economic theory, including a survey of the principles of value, prices, money and banking, international trade, tariffs, monopoly, taxation, labour and wages, socialism, the control of railways and trusts, etc. Fairchild, Furniss, Buck, Elementary Economics, Macmillan; The Canada Year Book, 1927. Economics 1 is the prerequisite for all other courses in the department, but may be taken concurrently with Economics 2, or Government 1. This rule may be waived in the case of students of the Department of Nursing who may find it impossible to take both Economics 1 and Sociology 1. Three hours a week. 3 units. 2. History of Economic Life and Economic Thought.—A brief outline of Economic Thought, and of Economic and Social conditions in England previous to 1776. A survey of the more important phases of European Organization from the time of the Middle Ages, with special reference to the Industrial Revolution, the Progress of Agriculture, and resultant social conditions. The development of modern Economic Thought, with a study of the influence of Smith, Malthus, Ricardo, Mill and others, and the place of the Deductive and Historical Methods. Toynbee, The Industrial Revolution, Longmans. Marshall and Lyon, Our Economic Organization, Macmillan; and assigned readings. Three hours a week. Mr. Beckett. 3 unita 3. Labour Problems and Social Reform.—A study of the rise of the factory system and capitalistic production, and of the more important phases of trade unionism in England, Canada, Economics 103 and the United States. A critical analysis of various solutions of the labour problem attempted and proposed; profit-sharing, co-operation, arbitration and conciliation, scientific management, labour legislation and socialism. Furniss, Labor Problems, Houghton Mifflin. Carpenter, Guild Socialism, Appleton. Simkhovitch, Marxism versus Socialism, Williams & Norgate; and assigned readings. Three hours a week. Mr. Boggs. 3 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 4. Money and Banking.—The origin and development of money. Banking principles and operations, laws of coinage, credit, price movements, foreign exchange. Banking policy in the leading countries, with particular reference to Canada. Holdsworth, Money and Banking, Appleton. Foster and Catchings, Money, Houghton Mifflin. Dunbar, Theory and History of Banking, Putnam, 1917. Phillips, Readings in Money and Banking, Macmillan; and assigned readings. Three hours a week. Mr. Boggs. 3 units. 5. Government Finance.—An outline course dealing with the principles and methods of taxation, and administration of public funds. Topics examined include: growth of taxation methods; theories of justice in taxation; classification, increase, economic effects, and control of expenditures; property, business, personal, commodity, and inheritance taxes, with reference to Canada, Britain and other countries; the single tax; double taxation; shifting, incidence and economic effects of taxation; flotation, administration, conversion and redemption of government loans. Lutz, Public Finance, Appleton, 1924; and assigned readings. Three hours a week. Mr. Beckett. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 104 Faculty of Arts and Science 6. International Trade and Tariff Policy.—A survey of the theory of international trade and the foreign exchanges; the balance of trade, foreign investments and other fundamental factors; the problem of Reparations and of War Debts; the protective tariff and commercial imperialism; the commercial policy of the leading countries, with considerable attention to Canada. Griffin, Principles of Foreign Trade, Macmillan. Fraser, Foreign Trade and World Politics, A. A. Knopf. Taussig, Selected Readings in International Trade and Tariff Problems, Ginn; and assigned readings. Three hours a week. Mr. Boggs. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 7. Corporation Economics.—Historical development of tht different forms of industrial organization, including the partnership, joint-stock company, and the corporation, and the later developments, such as the pool, trust, combination, and holding company. Methods of promotion and financing, over-capitalization, stock market activities, the public policy toward corporations, etc. Readings to be assigned. Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 8. Provincial and Local Finance. — A brief summary of fundamental principles of taxation. Sources of revenue, and tax systems of federal, and provincial and municipal governments, especially of British Columbia. War Finance and its influences on local finance. Chief problems of provincial and municipal finance and administration. Separation of sources of provincial and municipal revenues. Methods of municipal supervision and control. Government debts. Assigned readings. Three hours a week. Mr. Beckett. 3 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) Economics 105 Agricultural Economics 1. Agricultural Economics.—The principles of Economics as applied to Agriculture; historical background, the agricultural problem; and some special topics, such as the agricultural Burplus, production in relation to population growth, the farm income, and the share of Agriculture in the national income. Taylor, Agricultural Economics, Macmillan. References and assigned readings from Gray, Carver, Nourse, and others. Three lectures per week. Mr. Clement. 3 units. 2. Marketing.—The principles of Marketing as applied to the individual farjm and to Agriculture as a whole. The general principles of Marketing, the marketing of agricultural products as compared to wholesale and retail distribution of manufactured goods, the contributions of national Farmer Movements, co-operative marketing as illustrated by the marketing of wheat, fruit and milk in Canada. Brown, Marketing, Harper and Brothers; Mackintosh, Agricultural Co-operation in Western Canada, Ryerson Press, Toronto; references and assigned readings from Macklin, Hib- bard, Boyle, Benton, and others. Three lectures per week. Mr. Clement. 3 units. Government 1. Constitutional Government.—This course deals with the nature, origin, and aims of the State; and with the organization of government in the British Empire, the United States of America, France, and Germany. Readings to be assigned. Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units. 2. Introduction to the Study of Law.—(a) A rapid survey of Legal History, (b) Outlines of Jurisprudence. Readings to be assigned. Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units. 106 Faculty of Arts and Science 3. Imperial Problems.—A course on problems of government within the British Empire, to be given in alternate years with Economics 7. Readings to be assigned. Government 1 is a prerequisite of this course, but may be taken concurrently with it. Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) Sociology 1. Principles of Sociology.—An introductory study of early man and his relation to his environment; of races of men and their distribution; of the early forms and development of industrial organization, marriage and the family, arts and sciences, religious systems, government, classes, rights, etc. A review also of certain of the social problems of modern society growing out of destitution, crime, overcrowding, etc. A critical survey of schemes for betterment. Blackmar & Gillin, Outlines of Sociology, Macmillan. Beach, An Introduction to Sociology and Social Problems, Houghton- Mifflin Company. Three hours a week. Mr. Beckett. 3 units. 2. Social Origins and Development.—The different views relating to the origin and evolution of human society; the geographic factor and economic methods in their bearing upon social life; primitive mental attitudes; the development of ethical, etc., ideas among primitive peoples; primitive institu- tons, tools, art, and their modern forms; the growth of cardinal social ideas through the ancient and classical period to the present time. (Not given in 1928-29.) Education 107 Department of Education Professor: G. M. Weir. Associate Professor: Jennie Benson Wyman. Special Lecturer: H. T. J. Coleman. Lecturers in High School Methods: the following Heads of Departments: R. H. Clark, H. Ashton, D. Buchanan, T. C. Hebb, L. Robertson, W. N. Sage (Acting Head), G. G. Sedgewick, also W- K. Beech and C. H. Scott of the Vancouver School staff. Lecturers in Elementary School Methods: A. Anstey, A. R. Lord, F. W. Dyke, C. H. Scott, R. Straight, Miss E. J. Trembath. Lecturer in Junior High School Organization and Administration: H. B. King. Courses in Education Teacher Training Course 1. Registration Documentary evidence of graduation in Arts or Science from a recognized university must be submitted to the University Registrar by all candidates other than graduates of The University of British Columbia. All correspondence in connection with the Teacher Training course should be addressed to the University Registrar, from whom registration cards may be procured. 2. Certificates and Standing At the close of the University session, successful candidates in the Teacher Training Course will be recommended to the Provincial Department of Education for the Academic Certificate, and to the Faculty of Arts and Science for the University Diploma in Education. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent. All students registered in the Teacher Training Course at the University are entitled to the privileges accorded to students in the various Faculties, and are also subject to the regulations of the University regarding discipline and attendance at lectures. First or Second Class standing in History and Principles of Education and in Educational Psychology of the Teacher 108 Faculty of Arts and Science Training Course is accepted as equivalent to a Minor for an M.A. degree, subject in each case to the consent of the Head of the Department in which the student wishes to take his Major. 3. Preparatory Courses in Arts and Science After 1928 candidates will not be admitted to courses in High School Methods unless they shall have obtained at least six (6) units of credit in the corresponding courses normally offered in the third and fourth years. After 1930 the above prerequisite will be nine (9) units. Special cases will be considered on their merits by the Head of the Department concerned and the Professor of Education. 4. Courses Offered A. Throughout the University Session. (1) Educational Psychology: Text: Gates, Psychology for Students of Education, Macmillan. References: Pillsbury, Education as a Psychologist Sees It, Macmillan; Thomson, Instinct, Intelligence and Character, Longman; Burnham, The Normal Mind, Appleton. Prerequisite: Philosophy 1, or its equivalent—obligatory from 1929. (2) School Administration and Law: Texts: Sears, Classroom Organization and Control (Revised Edition), Houghton Mifflin. Manual of School Law, British Columbia. References: Cubberley, Public School Administration, Houghton, Mifflin; Cubberley, The Principal and His School, Houghton, Mifflin; Perry, The Management of a City School, Macmillan (Revised Edition); Davis, Junior High School Education, World Book Company; Johnson, Administration and Supervision of the High School, Ginn & Co.; Report of the School Survey Commission, British Columbia; Fifth Year book of the Department of Superintendence; Assigned readings. Education 109 (3) History and Principles of Education: (a) Educational leaders and movements with special reference to the period since 1800. (b) Educational systems:—Canada with special reference to British Columbia; England; France; Germany; the United States. Texts: Cubberley, A Brief History of Education, Houghton Mifflin. Chapman and Counts, Principles of Education, Houghton Mifflin. References: Williams and Rice, Principles of Secondary Education, Ginn & Co.; Birchenough^ History of Elementary Education in England and Wales, University Tutorial Press; Sandiford, Comparative Education, J. M. Dent; Balfour, Educational Systems of Great Britain and Ireland, Oxford; Farrington, Public Primary School System of France, Columbia University; Kandel, The Reform of Secondary Education in France, Columbia University; Alexander, The Prussian Elementary Schools, Macmillan; Kandel, Twenty-five Years of American Education, Mae- millan; Cubberley, Readings in the History of Education, Houghton Mifflin. (4) Interpretation and Construction of Educational Tests and Measurements. Text: Hines, A Guide to Educational Measurements, Houghton Mifflin. References: Pintner, Intelligence Testing, Holt; Monroe, DeVoss and Kelly, Educational Measurements, Houghton Mifflin; Williams, Graphic Methods in Education, Houghton Mifflin; Otis, Statistical Measurement, World Book Co.; Ruch, Improvement of the Written Examination, Scott Foresman & Co.; Ruch and Stoddard, Tests and Measurements in High School Instruction, World Book Co. The above courses are obligatory for all students. 110 Faculty of Arts and Science B. During the Fall Term. From the three courses listed below candidates will select at least six hours of work a week. (1) Psychology of the Elementary School Subjects. Texts: Reed, Psychology of Elementary School Subjects, Ginn & Co.; Stone, Silent and Oral Reading, Houghton Mifflin. References: Freeman, Psychology of the Common Branches, Houghton Mifflin; Stormzand, Progressive Methods of Teaching, Houghton Mifflin; Charters, Teaching the Common Branches, Houghton Mifflin. Assigned readings from the Year Books and Educational Journals. i (2) Methods in Elementary School Subjects: Assigned Readings. (3) Junior High School Organization and Administration: Assigned Readings. C. During the Spring Term. (1) Methods in High School Subjects: Text: Judd, Psychology of Secondary Education, Ginn & Co. References: Douglass, Modern Methods in High School Teaching, Houghton Mifflin Co. Assigned Readings. Methods Courses in the following high school subjects are offered: English, History, Latin, French, Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry. Two courses are obligatory (for teaching and examination purposes), while one course may be attended as an auditor. Nine hours a week. 5. Courses in Education for Third and Fourth Year Undergraduates in Arts Undergraduates who intend to register in the Teacher Training Course are advised to take six units in Education for credit towards the BA. degree. Education ill 1. Introduction to the Study of Education.—This course is intended to serve as an introduction to the formal study of education. The following topics, among others, will be discussed: Significant phases of educational development in Eastern Canada and British Columbia; Section 93, B. N. A. Act—legal and social implications; present-day educational problems; recent educational developments, such as scientific school supervision, use of tests and measurements, problems of curriculum reconstruction, principles of educational finance; a general study of the philosophy of the educational process—the knowledge-as- power conception, the disciplinary conception, etc., the learning process, the teaching process, etc.; problems in educational sociology—social relations of the school, problems of rural education, rural-school types and problems of reorganization, adult vocational and extension education; educational and vocational guidance; comparative survey of outstanding educational developments in Europe and America in the last half century. An attempt will be made to familiarize the student with current tendencies in educational theory and practice and critically to examine the sociological, economic, and philosophic background of these tendencies. ' ► I Text: Cubberley, Introduction to the Study of Education, Houghton Mifflin. i References: Judd, Introduction to the Scientific Study of Education, Ginn & Co.; Smith, Principles of Educational Sociology, Houghton Mifflin. Readings from the Yearbooks, School Surveys and Educational Journals. 3 units. 2. Elementary Educational Psychology.—An introductory survey of the field of psychology as applied to education. A study of the literature on the learning process, formal discipline, transfer of training, work and fatigue and of individual differences in relation to heredity and environment. Texts and references to be assigned. 3 units. The following conditions apply to courses in Education: (a) Not more than six units in Education may be taken for credit towards the B.A. degree. 112 Faculty of Arts and Science (b) An undergraduate with special qualifications may (on the recommendation of the Faculty) be allowed to substitute an advanced course in Education (of similar content) for one Of the courses mentioned above. (c) Until the work of the first and second years has been completed, courses in Education are not open (for credit) to undergraduates. 6. Observation Assignments and Practice Teaching 1. Fall Term: At least forty (40) hours in the elementary schools of the Province. Obligatory for all students. 2. Spring Term: At least sixty (60) hours in the high schools of the Province. Obligatory for all students. Department of English Professor: G. G. Sedgewick. Associate Professor: W. L. MacDonald. Associate Professor: F. G. C. Wood. Associate Professor: Thorleif Larsen. Associate Professor: F. C. Walker. Assistant Professor: M. L. Bollert. Assistant Professor: Frank H. Wilcox. Assistant Professor: Philip A. Child. Special Lecturer: Charles G. D. Roberts Assistant: Dorothy Blakey. Assistant: M. Dorothy Mawdsley. Assistant: Edmund Morrison. First Year 1. (a) Literature. — Elementary study of a number of literary forms to be chosen from the short story, the play, the novel, the essay, the simpler sorts of poetry. Texts for 1928-29: Hastings, Clough and Mason, Short Stories, Houghton Mifflin. Euripides, Bacchae, in Gilbert Murray's paraphrase. Shakespeare, Julius Caesar. Sheridan, The School for Scandal, Everyman. Ibsen, The Doll's House, Everyman. The Golden Book of Modem English Poetry, Dent. Two hours a week. English 113 (b) Composition. — Elementary forms and principles of composition. Two hours a week. 3 units. The work in composition consists of (i) themes and class exercises, and (ii) of written examinations. Students will be required to make a passing mark in each of these two parts of the work. Second Year 2. (a) Literature. — Studies in the history of English Literature. Lectures and texts illustrative of the chief authors and movements from Tottel's Miscellany to Shelley. Neilson and Thorndike, A History of English Literature, Macmillan. Two hours a week. (b) Composition.—Narrative and descriptive themes; the writing of reports. One hour a week. 3 units. (c) Literature.—Readings from Nineteenth Century poetry since 1830. For this course, which is intended for prospective Honour students in English and for others especially interested in the study of Literature, no formal credit is given. One hour a week. Third and Fourth Years The curriculum in English for students of the Third and Fourth Years is arranged in three divisions. The first includes a central body of general courses which will be offered, as far as possible, every year, and to each of which are assigned 3 units of credit. In the second division are listed courses carrying 2 units of credit and usually given in alternate years. And the third consists of courses designed especially for Honour and Graduate students, and open to others only by special permission. 114 • Faculty of Arts and Science Division I 9. Shakespeare.—This course may be taken for credit in two successive years. In 1928-29, 9 (b) will be given as follows: i. A detailed study of the text of A Midsummer- Night's Dream, Henry V, Othello, Antony and Cleopatra. ii. Lectures on Shakespeare's development, on his use of sources, and on his relation to the stage and the dramatic practice of his time. Students will provide themselves with annotated editions of the four plays named above, and with The Facts about Shakespeare, by Neilson and Thorndike, Macmillan. They are advised to get the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed. Neilson, or the Oxford Shakespeare, ed. Craig. Three hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units. 9 (a). (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 10. The Drama to 1642.—The course begins with a study of the Theban plays of Sophocles and of Aristotle's Theory of Tragedy. The main subject of the course, however, is Elizabethan Drama: (1) its beginnings in the Miracle and Morality Plays and in the Interludes; (2) its development in Shakespeare's predecessors—Lyly, Peele, Greene, Kyd, and Marlowe; (3) its culmination in Shakespeare; (4) and its decline in Jonson, Beaumont and Fletcher, Middleton, Webster, Massinger, Shirley, and Ford. Texts:—Lewis Campbell, Sophocles in English Verse, World's Classics, Oxford. Everyman and Other Interludes, Dent. Chief Elizabetlian Dramatists, ed. Neilson. Shakespeare, ed. Craig, Oxford, or the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed. Neilson. Three hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 3 units. 13. The English Novel from Richardson to the Present Time. —The development of English fiction will be traced from Richardson, Fielding, Smollett, and Sterne through Goldsmith, Mrs. Radcliffe, Jane Austen, Scott, C. Bronte, Dickens, Thackeray, English 115 and George Eliot to Trollope, Meredith, Stevenson, and a few representative novelists now living. A fair knowledge of the works of Jane Austen, Scott, Dickens, Thackeray, and George Eliot is a prerequisite for those taking this course. Three hours a week. Mr. Wood. 3 units. 14, Eighteenth Century Literature.—This course aims to give a view, as comprehensive as possible, of the main currents of English thought and literature during the period 1660-1800. From year to year various periods will be stressed and the work of various writers emphasized. Generally speaking, the course is mainly concerned with the work of such men as Dryden, Pope, Swift, Addison, Steele, Johnson, Goldsmith, Burke and BurnB. Three hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 3 units. 16. Romantic Poetry, 1780 to 1830.—Studies in the beginnings and progress of Romanticism, based chiefly on the work of Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Keats, Shelley, Scott. Texts: The Oxford editions of the first five poets named. For reference: Elton, A Survey of English Literature, 1780-1830. Three hours a week. Mr. Walker. 3 units. 17. Victorian Poetry.—This course is concerned chiefly with the work of Tennyson, Browning, and Arnold. A few weeks at the close of the term will be devoted to a survey of the development of later poetry down to the work of Hardy. Texts: Browning, Complete Poetical Works, Cambridge Edition. Arnold, Poems, Oxford Edition. Tennyson, Poems, Globe Edition. Page, British Poets of the Nineteenth Century, Sanborn. For reference: Elton, A Survey of English Literature, 1830-1880. Three hours a week. Mr. Wilcox. 3 units. 19 (a). Private Reading.—Students who are candidates for an Honours degree in English may elect a course of private reading in their Junior Year. 3 units. 116 Faculty of Arts and Science 19 (b). Private Reading.—Students of the Senior Year may pursue, with the consent and under the direction of the Department, a course of private reading. In such courses examinations will be set, but no class instruction will be given. 3 units. Division II 5. The Elements of Poetics.—Studies in the criticism and appreciation of poetry; the poetic frame of mind; the emotional element in poetry; poetic content and the nature of poetic truth; poetic form and its varieties; metrics; contemporary developments in poetry; literary criticism, its nature and function; and an outline of aesthetic theory from Aristotle to Croce. Exercises in criticism and metrical composition. | Winchester, Principles of Literary Criticism. Two hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 2 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 6. Narrative Writing.—A study of narrative composition: (a) critical reading of a considerable number of modern short stories and of two or three modern novels; (b) frequent critical and narrative themes. Only a limited number of students will be admitted to this course. Two hours a week. 2 units. (Given in 1928-29.) 7. Technique of the Drama.—A practical study of dramatic form and structure based on the analysis of modern plays, with special reference to the one-act play as an art form. Playmaking, by Wm. Archer, and Representative One-act Plays by British and Irish Authors, Little, Brown, are the texts used in this course. Two hours a week. Mr. Wood. 2 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 8. English Poetry, exclusive of the Drama, from the death of Chaucer to 1649—(1) The Renaissance; (2) the Fifteenth English 117 Century; (3) the Scottish Chaucerians; (4) John Skelton and the poets of the Transition; (5) the Elizabethan Lyric; (6) the Sonneteers; (7) Spenser and the Spenserians; (8) the Jacobean Poets; (9) the Caroline Poets; (10) the Theory of Poetry throughout the period. Texts:—Ward, The English Poets, Vol. I. Spenser, ed Smith and de Selincourt, Oxford. Two hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 2 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 11. English Drama since 1600.—A survey of English drama from the time of Ben Jonson to the present. Later Elizabethan drama, representative plays of the Restoration, the works of Goldsmith, Sheridan, and of early Nineteenth Century writers will be considered. There will follow a study of some dramatists of recent years, including Wilde, Shaw, Galsworthy, Pinero, Jones, Stephen Phillips, Barrie, and the Irish School. Two hours a week. Mr. Wood. 2 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 12. Narrative Poetry. — Discussion of the types,—epic, ballad, and romance,—with readings, in suitable translations or modern versions where desirable; modern ballads and metrical romances represented by the work of Scott, Tennyson, Morris, Masefield and others. Two hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 2 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 15. American Literature.—A survey of the principal writers of this continent during the Nineteenth Century. Texts: Broadus, A Book of Canadian Prose and Verse, Oxford. Foerster, American Prose and Poetry, Houghton, Mifflin. Two hours a week. Mr. Wilcox. 2 units. (Given in 1928-29.) 118 Faculty of Arts and Science 18. Social, literary, religious and scientific movements of the Victorian period: Carlyle, Ruskin, Macaulay, Newman, Darwin, Mill, Arnold, Butler, Stevenson. Two hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 2 units. (Given in 1928-29.) Division III 20. Chaucer and Middle English. — (a) Middle English grammar with the reading of representative texts, (b) The Canterbury Tales. Texts: A Middle English reader and the Oxford Chaucer, ed. Skeat. Three hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 21a. Anglo-Saxon—Moore & Knott, The Elements of Old English, George Wahr. Bright, Anglo-Saxon Reader, Henry Holt. ) Two hours a week. Mr. Walker. 2 units. 21b. Anglo-Saxon.—Beowulf. Two hours a week after Christmas. Mr. Walker. 1 unit. 22. Studies in Linguistic History. — Origins, growth, and development of the English language. A brief introduction to Germanic philology; the Indo - European language group; Grimm's Law; the Anglo-Saxon period; Norman, French, and Latin influences; study of the gradual evolution of forms, sounds, and meanings. Two hours a week before Christmas. Mr. Walker. 1 unit. 24. Seminar.—In this class advanced students will get practice in some of the simpler methods of criticism and investigation. The subject for 1928-29 will probably be some problems in the history of literary criticism. Two hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 2 units. Geology 119 Department of Geology and Geography Professor: R. W. Brock. Professor of Physical and Structural Geology: S. J. Schofield. Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy: M. Y. Williams. Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrology: T. C. Phemister. Assistant: J. A. E. Kania. 1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction to the science of Geology. The following subjects are treated in the lectures and laboratory: (o) Physical Geology, including weathering, the work of the wind, ground water, streams, glaciers and the ocean, the structure of the earth, earthquakes, volcanoes and igneous intrusions, metamorphism, mountains and plateaus, and ore-deposits. Two lectures per week, First Term. Mr. Schofield. (b) Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology, including the study and identification of the most comlmon minerals and rocks, the interpretation of topographical and geological maps, and the study of structures by the use of models. Two hours laboratory per week, First Term. Mr. Schofield. (c) Historical Geology, including the earth before the Cambrian, the Palaeozoic, the Mesozoic, the Cenozoic and Quarter- nary eras. Two lectures per week, Second Term. Mr. Williams. (d) Laboratory Exercises in Historical Geology, consisting of the general study of fossils, their characteristics and associations, their evolution and migration as illustrated by their occurrence in the strata. The principles of Palaeogeography will be taken up and illustrated by the study of palaeogeography of North America. Two hours laboratory per week, Second Term. Mr. Williams. Field Work will replace laboratory occasionally, and will take the form of excursions to localities, in the immediate neighborhood of Vancouver, which illustrate the subject matter of the lectures. 120 Faculty of Arts and Science Prerequisite: Matriculation Chemistry or Physics, or Chemistry 1 or Physics 1, taken either before or concurrently. Text-book: Pirsson and Schuchert, Introductory Geology, Wiley. Reference Books: Geikie, Text-book of Geology. Merrill, Rocks, Rock-Weathering and Soils. Coleman and Parks, Elementary Geology. Shimer, Introduction to the Study of Fossils. Davis, Geographical Essays. Hugh Miller's works. Students will be required to make a passing mark in each of the above subdivisions. 3 units. 2. (a) General Mineralogy.—A brief survey of the field of Mineralogy. Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1) Crystallography, (2) Physical Mineralogy, and (3) Descriptive Mineralogy of 40 of the most common mineral species, with special reference to Canadian occurrences. Laboratory Work consists of the study of the common crystal forms and of 40 prescribed minerals, accompanied by a brief outline of the principles and methods of Determinative Mineralogy and Blowpipe Analysis. Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley. Prerequisite: Chemistry 1. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week, First Term. Mr. Phemister. 1^2 units. 2. (b) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy. — This course supplements 2(a) and consists of a more complete survey of Crystallography, Physical and Chemical Mineralogy, with a critical study of about 50 of the less common minerals, special emphasis being laid on their crystallography, origin, association and alteration. Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley. Prerequisite: Geology 2(a). Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week, Second Term. Mr. Phemister. IV2 units. Geology 121 3. Historical Geology.—Continental evolution and development of life with special reference to North America. Text-book: Schuchert, Historical Geology, 2nd Ed., Wiley. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Three hours per week, First Term. Mr. Williams. V/2 units. 4. Structural and Physiographical Geology.—The following subjects are treated in the lectures: Fractures, faults, flowage, structures common to both fracture and flow, mountains, major units of structure, forces of deformation, the origin and development of land forms with special reference to the physiography of British Columbia. Text-book: Leith, Structural Geology, 2nd Ed., Holt. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Three hours per week, Second Term. Mr. Schofield. IV2 units. 5. (a) History of Geology.—A brief history of the study of the earth and the development of the geological sciences. Mr. Brock. (b) Geology of Canada.—The salient features of the geology and economic minerals of Canada. Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield, Mr. Brock. (c) Regional Geology.—The main geological features of the continents and oceanic segments of the earth's crust, and their influences upon life. Mr. Brock. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Three lectures and one hour laboratory per week. 3 units. 6. Palaeontology.—A study of invertebrate and vertebrate fossils, their classification, identification and distribution both geological and geographical. Reference books: Grabau and Shimer, North American Index Fossils. Zittel-Eastman, Text-book of Palaeontology. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. Mr. Williams. 3 units. 122 Faculty of Arts and Science 7. Petrology.—This course consists of systematic studies of (i) optical mineralogy and (ii) petrography, with an introduction to petrogenesis. The laboratory work deals with the determination of rocks, first under the microscope, and then in hand specimen. Text-books: Pirsson, Rocks and Rock Minerals, Wiley. Johannsen, Essentials for the Microscopical Determination of Rock-forming Minerals and Rocks, University of Chicago Press. Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley. Reference works: Johannsen, Manual of Petrographic Methods. Rosenbusch, Microscopical Physiography of the Rock- making Minerals, translated by Iddings. Rosenbusch, Elemente der Gesteinslehre. Harker, Petrology for Students. Gruben- mann, Die Kristallinen Schiefer. Prerequisites: Geology 1 and 2. Two lectures and two laboratory periods of 2 hours per week. Mr. Phemister. 4 units. 8. Economic Geology.—A study of the occurrence, genesis, and structure of the principal metallic and non-metallic mineral deposits with type illustrations; and a description of the ore deposits of the British Empire, special stress being placed on those in Canada. Text-book: Emmons, General Economic Geology, McGraw- Hill. Reference books: Lindgren, Mineral Deposits. Ries, Economic Geology. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 7 must precede or accompany this course. Four hours per week. Mr. Brock, Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield, Mr. Phemister. 4 units. 9. Mineralography.—Principally a laboratory course dealing with the study and recognition of the opaque minerals by means of the reflecting microscope. Geology 123 The work consists of practice in the cutting, grinding and polishing of ore specimens, accompanied by training in micro- chemical methods of mineral determination. During the second term each student is assigned a suite of ores from some mining district for a critical examination and report. Text-book: Davy and Farnham, Microscopic Examination of the Ore Minerals, McGraw-Hill. Prerequisite: Geology 7 and 8 must precede or accompany this course. Two hours laboratory per week. Mr. Phemister. 1 unit. 10. Field Geology.—The methods taught are the fundamental ones used by professional geologists and by the officers of the Geological Survey of Canada. The course is essentially practical, and is designed to teach methods of observing, recording and correlating geological facts in the field. The students construct geological maps of selected areas in the vicinity of Vancouver which require the use of the various methods and instruments employed in field geology. Reference books: Lahee, Field Geology. Hayes, Handbook for Field Geologists. Spurr, Geology Applied to Mining. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 4, if not already taken, must be taken concurrently. Three hours per week. Mr. Schofield. 1^ units. 12. Meteorology and Climatology.—A course covering in a general way the whole field, with practice in using instruments, constructing and using weather charts, and weather predicting. Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per week. Second Term. Mr. Schofield. IV2 units. 14. Crystallography.—This course consists of a systematic study of the morphology of crystals, with an introduction to mathematical crystallography. The practical work deals with the measurement of crystals and, in the case of students in chemistry, a certain number of the crystals measured will be grown in the laboratory. 124 Faculty of Arts and Science Students are advised to consult with the instructor before registering for this course. Text-book: Tutton, Crystallography and Practical Crystal Measurement, Macmillan. Two lectures and six hours laboratory work per week. Mr. Phemister. 5 units. Geography 1. Principles of Geography. — A general course dealing especially with the effects of the physical features of the earth upon life, and the ways in which various forms of life respond to their physical environment. The following topics are studied: earth relations; earth features; climate and climatic factors; oceans; materials of the land and their uses; changes of the earth's surface; coasts, plains, plateaus, mountains, inland waters, and their relations to life; human geography. Text-book: Salisbury, Barrows and Tower, Elements of Geography, Holt. Three lectures per week. Mr. Brock and Mr. Schofield. 3 units. 10. Introduction to Geography.—A brief introduction to the study of modern Geography, outlining the history and content of the subject, physical geography and human geography. One lecture a week. Mr. Brock and Mr. Schofield. 1 unit. Department of History Professor: Associate Professor: W. N. Sage. Assistant Professor: F. H. Soward. Special Lecturer: Francis Painter. Assistant: Kaye Lamb. Assistant: Walter Lanning. Students who intend to specialize in History are advised to associate with it from the first some allied subject, such as Economics. Economics 1, 2, 3, Government 1 and Sociology 1 will be found especially helpful. History 125 A reading knowledge of French and German will be found extremely valuable in Third and Fourth Year courses, while in certain classes of more advanced work Latin is indispensable. Hereafter, French at least will be required for Honour work. A list of books for reading and reference may be obtained from the professor in charge of each course. First and Second Years 1. Main Currents in Modern World History.—This course is intended primarily for First Year students and covers the period in World History between the French Revolution and the present day. It will include a discussion of such topics as the Balance of Power in the Eighteenth Century, the French Revolution, the Napoleonic Era, the Industrial Revolution, the Growth of Democracy in the Nineteenth Century, the Eastern Question, Nationality as a Factor in the Nineteenth Century, the Expansion of Europe, the Armed Peace (1870-1914), the Awakening of the Far East (1868-1914), the World War, the Russian Revolution, the League of Nations, Problems of the Pacific. Text-book: Schapiro, Modern and Contemporary European History, Houghton Mifflin Co. (revised edition), or Carleton Hayes, Political and Social History of Modern Europe, Vol. II, 1815-1924. Macmillan. Three hours a week. Mr. Soward. 3 units. 2. Canadian History. — This course opens with a brief analysis of the reasons for European colonization of America and a sketch of the colonial effort of Spain, France and Great Britain. In the French regime, exploration, the development of government, the conflict of church and state, and the struggle with Great Britain for the West are studied. In the British period, the relations of the French and English and the evolution of Canadian self-government are given special attention. On the colonization of America and the history of New France, students are especially advised to consult: Ramsay Muir, Expansion of Europe; Abbott, Expansion of Europe; the 126 Faculty of Arts and Science works of Francis Parkman; Munro, Crusaders of New France; Fiske, New France .and New England; Eastman, Church and State in Early Canada; Lucas, History of Canada, Vol. I, New France; Wrong, Conquest of New France and Rise and Fall of New France. On the British Period: Skelton, The Canadian Dominion, Life and Letters of Sir Wilfrid Laurier; Trotter, Canadian History, a Syllabus; Egerton, History of Canada, Part II, 1763- 1921; Kennedy, The Constitution of Canada, Documents of the Canadian Constitution, 1759-1915; Bracq, Evolution of French Canada; Morison, British Supremacy and Canadian Self-government; Trotter, Federation of Canada; Wallace, Sir John Macdonald; Dafoe, Laurier. An essay counting 10% of the year's work must be submitted early in the autumn term. Subject, The Causes of European Expansion; Champlain and Frontenac; a comparison and contrast. Three hours a week. 3 units. 3. English History. — The history of England from the Norman Conquest to the Revolution of 1688. This course is intended primarily for Second Year students who mean to specialize in history. It aims at interpreting the constitutional, political, economic, and religious development of England and Wales during the period prescribed. Attention will also be paid to the history of Scotland and Ireland and the origin of Overseas Britain. The sequel to this course is History 8. Text-book: Muir, A Short History of the British Commonwealth, Vol. I. A preliminary essay counting 10 per cent, of the year's work must be handed in as soon as possible after the opening of the autumn term. Subject: The Geographic Background of British History, or Feudalism in England, or The Rise of the English Towns. Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. 3 units. History 127 Third and Fourth Years History 4, 5 and 6 are intended especially for Third Year students, History 7 and 8 for Fourth Year. History 4 (or 5) must be taken by all candidates for Honours. All Honour students (whether in History alone or in a Combination Course) must take the History Seminar in their Third and Fourth Years. The Seminar is intended as training in intensive work and carries no credits. If the Graduating Essay be written in History, it will carry a value of 3 units. 4. Mediaeval History.—A sketch of Mediaeval History from the Council of Nicaea to the Fall of Constantinople, 325-1453 A.D. The following subjects will be treated: the triumph of Christianity; the breakdown of the Western Roman Empire; the Barbarian Invasions; the earlier monastic movements; Mohammed and Islam; the rise of the Papacy; the Franks and Charlemagne; the struggle between Empire and Papacy; the Normans in Europe; the Crusades; the Mediaeval Towns; the later monastic movements; the rise of the universities; Frederick II; the later Mediaeval Empire; the National Kingdoms in France, Spain, England and Scotland; the Turks and the collapse of the Byzantine Empire. Text-book: Thorndike, A History of Mediaeval Europe, Houghton Mifflin. Additional text-books for Honour students: Oman, The Dark Ages. Tout, Empire and Papacy. Lodge, The Close of the Middle Ages. Bryce, The Holy Roman Empire. A preliminary essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's work, must be handed in as soon as possible after the opening of the autumn term. Subject: The Causes of the Downfall of the Western Roman Empire, or Theodoric the Ostragath, or The Rise of the Prankish Empire. Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. 3 units. 5. Renaissance and Reformation.—Mediaeval civilization in the time of Dante; the forerunners of the Renaissance; the Renaissance in Italy (illustrated with slides); the Protestant 128 Faculty of Arts and Science Reformation and the Catholic Reaction; in conclusion, a short account of the subsequent history of religious thought down to our own times. An introductory essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's work, must be handed in early in the autumn term. Subject: Dante the Humanist, or The Rise of the Critical Spirit 1200- 1520, or The Beginning of National Literature. Text-books: W. H. Hudson, The Story of the Renaissance. Fisher, The Reformation. McGiffert, Martin Luther. Additional reading, especially for Honour students: Sichel, The Renaissance. Taylor, Some Aspects of the Renaissance. Symonds, A Short History of the Renaissance in Italy. Symonds, The Renaissance in Italy. Burckhardt, The Renaissance in Italy, Andre Michel, Histoire de I'Art (III, IV). Christopher Hare, Life and Letters in the Italian Renaissance. Preserved Smith, Erasmus. Emerton, Erasmus. Allen, The Age of Erasmus. Three hours a week. 3 units. 6. The Age of Louis XIV, the Pre-Revolution, the Revolution and Napoleon. The break-up of the medieval system, the evolution of modern intellectual and material conditions, and the effect of the revolutionary spirit. An introductory essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's work, must be handed in early in the autumn term. Subject: The Foreign Policy of Louis XIV; Gallicanism in the Eighteenth Century. Text-books: Lowell, The Eve of the French Revolution. Shailer Matthews, The French Revolution. Johnston, Napoleon. Additional reading required of Honour students: Taine, L'ancien regime (abridged), Heath. Aulard, The French Revolution. Lacour-Gayet, Napoleon, or Rose, Napoleon. Fisher, Bonapartism. Tilley, Modern France. Abbott, Expansion of Europe. Three hours a week. 3 units. History 129 7. Europe, 1815-1919.—The political, social and economic history of the chief countries of continental Europe, with especial attention to international relations. Intended for Fourth Year students. An introductory essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's work, must be handed in early in the autumn term. Subject: Geographic Factors in the European History of the 19th Century, or The Growth of Democracy, 1815-1914. Text-book: Hazen, Europe Since 1815, Henry Holt. Additional reading required of Honour students: Gooch, History of Modern Europe, 1878-1919. Fueter, World History, 1815-1920. Moon, Imperialism and World Politics. Knight, Barnes and Flugel, Economic History of Europe in Modern Times. k^^ Reading and reference: Cambridge Modern History. Lavisse et Rambaud, Histoire Generate. Moon, Syllabus of International Relations. Buell, International Relations. Tilley, Modern France, Mowat, A History of European Diplomacy, 1815-1914. Rambaud, Histoire de la Civilization Francaise. Grant Robertson, Bismarck. Thayer, Cavour. Fairgrieve, Geography and World Power. Wright, Historical Geography of Europe. Marvin, Century of Hope and The Unity Series. Gooch, Germany. Makeef, Russia. Huddleston, France. Toynbee, Turkey. Toynbee, The Balkans. Fay, The Origins of the World War. Three hours a week. Mr. Soward. 3 units. 8. Great Britain Since 1688. The British Empire — This course aims at an interpretation of the constitutional, political, economic and religious development of the British Isles since the Revolution of 1688. Attention will also be paid to the growth of the British Empire during the eighteenth, nineteenth and twentieth centuries. This course is the sequel to History 3. Text-book: Muir, Short History of the British Commonwealth, Vol. II. Additional reading required of Honour students: Grant Robertson, England under the Hanoverians. Slater, The Making 130 Faculty of Arts and Science of Modern England. Trevelyan, British History in the Nineteenth Century. For reading and reference: Cambridge History of British Foreign Policy. Poole and Hunt, The Political History of England (Vols. VIII-XII). Cambridge Modern History (Vols. V-XII). Toynbee, The Industrial Revolution. Egerton, A Short History of British Colonial Policy. Basil Williams, Life of Chatham. Morley, Life of Gladstone. Moneypenny and Buckle, Life of Disraeli. Howard Robinson, The Development of the British Empire. The History of Great Britain. A preliminary essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's work, must be handed in early in the autumn. Subject: William Pitt the Great Commoner, or The Irish Question in the Eighteenth Century, or The Social Effects of the Industrial Revolution. Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. 3 units. 9. History of the United States of America.—This course begins with a sketch of the American colonies at the outbreak of the Revolution and traces the history of the United States from the commencement of the War of Independence to the close of the World War. Text-book: Pease, The United States, Harbourt Brace & Co. Texts for additional reading required for Honour students: Keenleyside, American-Canadian Relations. Malin, Interpretations of Recent American History, Century. Faulkner, American Economic History, Hayers. An essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's work, must be handed in early in the autumn. Subject: Hamilton and Jefferson, A Comparison and Contrast, or The Growth of Nationalism in the United States, 1776-1826. Mr. Soward. 3 units. Honour Seminar, 1928-29. (a) "Historical Method," Mr. Soward. (b) "The History of British Columbia," Mr. Sage. Mathematics 131 Department of Mathematics Professor: Daniel Buchanan. Professor: F. S. Nowlan. Associate Professor: G. E. Robinson. Associate Professor: E. E. Jordan. Associate Professor: L. Richardson. Assistant Professor: B. S. Hartley. Assistant: May L. Barclay. Assistant: C. Islay Johnston. Assistant: A. P. Mellish. Assistant: H. D. Smith. Assistant: C. G. Patten. Courses 2, 3, and 4 are open to students who have completed Course 1. Pass Courses 1. (a) Algebra. — An elementary course, including ratio, proportion, variation, interest and annuities, theory of quadratic equations, simple series, permutations, combinations, the binomial theorem, logarithms. ^ Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra, Chapters I to XV, Oxford. I Four hours a week. First Term. (b) Analytical Geometry.—Fundamental concepts, loci, the straight line and circle. Buchanan and Nowlan, Analytical Geometry. Two hours a week. Second Term. (c) Trigonometry. — An elementary course involving the use of logarithms. Playne and Fawdry, Practical Trigonometry, Copp Clark. Wentworth and Hill, Tables (Ginn). Two hours a week. Second Term. 3 units. 2. (a) Analytical Geometry.—A review of the straight line and circle, and a study of the other conies. Fawdry, Co-ordinate Geometry, Bell. Two hours a week. First Term. Mr. Buchanan. 132 Faculty of Arts and Science (b) Algebra.—The binomial theorem, induction, remainder theorem, Horner's method of approximating roots, exponential logarithmic and other series, undetermined coefficients, partial fractions, convergence and divergence. Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra (Larger Edition), Oxford. Two hours a week. Second Term. Mr. Buchanan. (c) Calculus.—An introductory course in differential and integral calculus, with various applications. Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus, Ginn. One hour a week. Mr. Buchanan. 3 units 3. The Mathematical Theory of Investments.—This course deals with the theory of interest, annuities, debentures, valuation of bonds, sinking funds, depreciation, probability and its application to life insurance. Rietz, Crathorne and Rietz, Mathematics of Finance, Holt. Three hours a week. Mr. Robinson. 3 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 4. Descriptive Astronomy.—The object of this course is to acquaint the student with the various heavenly bodies and their motions. It is intended primarily for Pass students, and only a knowledge of elementary mathematics is essential. The subject- matter treated includes: The shape and motions of the earth, systems of coordinates, the constellations, planetary motion, gravitation, tides, time, the stars and nebulae, theories of evolution of the solar system. Moulton, Introduction to Astronomy, Macmillan. Two hours a week. Mr. Buchanan. 2 units. Students desiring credit for an additional unit in connection with this course may register for Mathematics 18. They will be required to write essays on prescribed subjects dealing with various phases of Astronomy. 1 unit. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) Mathematics 133 Honour Courses 10. Calculus.—The elementary theory and applications of the subject. Granville, Differential and Integral Calculus, Ginn. Three hours a week. Mr. Nowlan. 3 units. 11. Plane and Spherical Trigonometry.—The work in plane trigonometry will deal with the following: Identities and trigonometrical equations, the solution of triangles with various applications, circumscribed, inscribed and escribed circles, De Moivre's theorem, expansions of sin ng, etc., hyperbolic and inverse functions. The work in spherical trigonometry will cover the solution of triangles with various applications to astronomy and geodesy. Loney, Plane Trigonometry, Parts I and II. Dupuis and Matheson, Spherical Trigonometry and Astronomy, Uglow. Two hours a week. Mr. Hartley. 12. Synthetic Plane and Solid Geometry.—The course in plane geometry is intended to cover such topics as the principle of duality, cross ratio geometry, etc. In solid geometry the principal properties of solid figures are studied, as well as the theory of projection in space, with various applications to the conic sections. Dupuis, Elementary Synthetic Geometry, Macmillan. Wilson, Solid Geometry and Conic Sections, Macmillan. Two hours a week. Mr. Robinson. 2 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 13. Plane and Solid Analytical Geometry.—A general study of the conies and systems of conies, and elementary work in three dimensions. 2 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 14. Theory of Equations and Determinants. — A course covering the main theory and use of these subjects. 134 Faculty of Arts and Science Bumside and Panton, Theory of Equations, Vol. I, Dublin. Weld, Theory of Determinants. Two hours a week. Mr. Jordan. 2 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 15. Higher Algebra. — Selected topics in higher algebra, including infinite series, continued fractions, the theory of numbers, probability. Hall and Knight, Higher Algebra, Macmillan. Chrystal, Text-book of Algebra, Part II. Two hours a week. ' 2 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 16. Calculus and Differential Equations.—A continuation of the previous course in calculus, treating partial differentiation, expansions of functions of many variables, singular points, reduction formulae, successive integration, elliptic integrals, and Fourier series. Ordinary and partial differential equations, with various applications to geometry, mechanics, physics and chemistry. Granville, Differential and Integral Calculus, Ginn. Murray, Differential Equations, Longmans, Three hours a week. Mr. Buchanan. 3 units. 17. Applied Mathematics. — A course dealing with the applications of mathematics to dynamics of a particle and of a rigid body, and to the two body problem in celestial mechanics. Loney, Theoretical Mechanics. Three hours a week. Mr. Richardson. 3 units. 18. History of Mathematics.—A reading course covering the historical development of the elementary branches of mathematics from the earliest times to the present. Ball, History of Mathematics. Cajori, History of Elementary Mathematics. Mr. Buchanan. 1 unit. Graduate Courses 20. Vector Analysis.—Weatherburn, Vector Analysis. 21. Theory of Functions of a Real Variable. — Goursat- Hedrick, Mathematical Analysis, Vol. I. Modern Languages 135 22. Theory of Functions of a Complex Variable.—Townsend, Functions of a Complex Variable. 23. Differential Geometry.—Eisenhart, Differential Geometry. 24. Projective Geometry.—Veblen and Young, Projective Geometry, Vol. I. 25. Celestial Mechanics.—Moulton, An Introduction to Celestial Mechanics. 26. Advanced Differential Equations.—Moulton, Periodic Orbits. 27. Theory of Numbers and Algebraic Numbers. — Reid, Elements of the Theory of Algebraic Numbers. 28. Hyper-complex Numbers—Dickson, Algebras and Their Arithmetics. 29. Modem Algebraic Theories. — Dickson, Modem Al gebraic Theories. Department of Modern Languages Professor: H. Ashton. Associate Professor: A. F. B. Clark. Associate Professor: Isabel Maclnnes. Associate Professor: Henri Chodat. Assistant Professor: Janet T. Greig. Assistant: E. E. Delavault. Assistant: G. Barry. Assistant: M. Portsmouth. Assistant: W. Tipping. Assistant: Y. Doriot. Assistant in German: S. J. Battle. With the consent of the Professor in charge of the course, a student taking a Pass Degree may be admitted to any course in the Third and Fourth Years in addition to, but not in lieu of, 3(a) and 4(a). Students from other universities who have already taken the work of 3(a) or 4(a), may be given special permission by the Head of the Department to substitute other courses. 136 Faculty of Arts and Science French 1. (a) Moliere, Les Precieuses Ridicules, Longmans, Toronto. Berthon, Grammaire Frangaise. Clement and Macirone, Void la France, Heath. Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 1. 3 units. 1. (b) Prescribed texts as for 1(a). Revision of the essentials of French grammar and syntax applied to the correct writing of French. There will be an oral examination based on the texts read. 3 units. Note :—Students who choose French will be informed which course 1(a) or 1(b) they must take. The decision will be made after a consideration of the marks in French obtained at the Matriculation examination. Students in 1(b) will normally take not more than two years French, as they will not be sufficiently prepared to profit by the Third and Fourth Year courses. If, however, they make rapid progress in the First Year they may be transferred to the higher course in the Second Year when they have satisfied the examiners of their fitness for more advanced work. Students who have not passed the Matriculation examination in French (or its equivalent) are not allowed to take either of the First Year courses in this subject. 1. (c) Lectures in French on Literature for students who intend to take French throughout the four years. One hour a week; no credit, no examination. Summer Reading:—See the announcement after the Fourth Year courses. 2. (a) La Fontaine, One Hundred Fables, Ginn. Moliere. Les Femmes Savantes, Didier. France, Le Livre de Mon Ami, Oxford. Conversation in French on the above. Written resumes. Composition from Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 1. 3 units. There will be oral tests. 2. (b) Texts as above. 3 units. 2. (c) Lectures in French on Literature for students who Modern Languages 137 intend to take French throughout the four years. One hour a week; no credits, no examination. Summer Reading: See the announcement after the Fourth Year Courses. 3. (a) The Literature of the Age of Louis XIV.—Lectures on the history and social conditions of the period, and on the development of the literature. Careful reading and discussion of the following texts: Racine, Andromaque, Didier. Moliere, Le Misanthrope, Didier; Le Tartuffe, Heath. An Anthology of Seventeenth Century French Readings, Princeton University Press. Conversation and written resumes based on the above. This course is obligatory for all students taking Third Year French. 3 units. 3. (b) The Literature of the Eighteenth Century.—Lectures on the history and social conditions of the period, with special emphasis on the philosophe movement, and the beginnings of romanticism. The inter-relations of French and English thought and literature will be touched upon. Careful reading and discussion of the following texts: Selections from Voltaire (Havens), Century Co. Rousseau, Morceaux choisis (Mornet), Didier. Diderot, Extraits (Fallex), Delagrave. Beaumarchais, Le Barbier de Siville, Macmillan. 3 units. 3. (c) French Composition and translation from English into French. Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 2. 3 units. Summer Reading: See the announcement after the Fourth YTear Courses. 4. (a) The Romantic Drama.—Musset, Quatre ComSdies, Oxford. Hugo, Hernani, Oxford. Rostand, Cyrano de Bergerac. 3 units. 4. (b) Literature and Society in the XVIIth Century.— Mme de La Fayette, La Princesse de Cleves (Cambridge); La Bruyere, Les Caracteres (Cambridge); Mme de Sevigne, Lettres (Manchester) ; Moliere, Les Precieuses Ridicules (Longman), Les Femmes Savantes (Hatier), L'Avare (Hatier), Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme (Hatier). 3 units. 138 Faculty of Arts and Science 4. (c) Bibliography, Composition and Oral French.—Book required: Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 3. 3 units. 4. (d) Eighteenth Century Drama.—Lesage, Turcaret, Cambridge; Marivaux, Le jeu de I'amour et du hasard, Hatier, Paris (Les classiques pour tous); Regnard, Le joueur, Hatier, Paris; Sedaine, Le Philosophe sans le savoir, Hachette, London. 3 units. Notes—Courses 3 (a) (b) (c) and 4 (a) (b) (c) (d) call for much work out of class. They should be chosen only by students able and willing to work alone. Students intending to take 4(a) or 4(b) should apply to the Head of the Department before the end of the present academic year for instructions for summer reading. k^1 Summer Reading Upon entering the courses for the years stated below the student must satisfy the instructor that he has read the books mentioned below. Second Year: 1. Bernardin de St Pierre, Paul et Virginie. 2. Balzac, Eugenie Grandet. 3. Saintine, Picciola; or Vigny, Poesies Choisies. Third Year: 1. Chateaubriand, Atala. 2. Le Sage, Gil Bias. 3. Vigny, Servitude et grandeur militaires. 4. Banville, Gringoire; or Musset,, Poesies Choisies. Fourth Year: 1. Moliere, L'Avare. 2. Moliere, Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme. 3. Moliere, Les Femmes Savantes. 4. Racine, Andromaque. 5. Racine, Les Plaideurs. 6. Musset, Fantasio. 7. Musset, Un Caprice. Modern Languages 139 The above have all been chosen from the series Les Classiques pour tous so as to lighten the cost of buying books for vacation reading. At the present rate of exchange they can be bought at the University Bookstore for ten or fifteen cents each. As these books can be carried in the pocket and read at odd moments no excuse will be accepted for failure to do summer reading. German A. Beginners' Course. Composition, Grammar, Conversation.—Texts: (a) Zinnecker, Deutsch fur Anf anger; Heath, (b) Haertel, German Reader for Beginners. 3 units. B. Beginners' Course (Scientific) Composition, Grammar, Conversation.—Texts: (a) Zinnecker, Deutsch fur Anf anger, Heath, (b) Gore, German Science Reader, Heath. 3 units. 1. Completion and Revision of Zinnecker. Composition and conversation based on texts read. Von Wildenbruch, Das edle Blut, Scribner. Moser, Der Bibliothekar, Ginn. Bruns, Book of German Lyrics, Heath. Science Section with alternate reading. 3 units. 2. (a) Whitney and Stroebe, Easy German Composition, Holt. Composition and conversation based on texts read. Heine, Die Harzreise, Allyn & Bacon. Lessing, Minna von Barnhelm, Heath. Bruns, Book of German Lyrics, Heath. 3 units. 2. (b) A general survey of German literature. Prerequisite for German 3. Lectures in English and open to students of other literatures. 3. ,The Classical Period. Texts: Lessing, Emilia Galotti, Heath. Goethe, Faust I, Heath. Schiller, Die Jungfrau von Orleans, Holt. Composition based on above texts and Whitney and Stroebe, German Composition, Holt. 3 units. 4. (a) Nineteenth Century Drama. 3 units. 4. (b) Nineteenth Century Fiction. 3 units. These courses, which include the reading of a number of standard works, will be given alternately. ' 5. A reading course in the short story. 3 units. 140 Faculty of Arts and Science Department of Philosophy Professor: H. T. J. Coleman. Associate Professor: James Henderson. Associate Professor of Psychology and Education: Jennie Benson Wyman. 1. (a) Elementary Psychology. Text-book: Warren, Elements of Human Psychology, Houghton Mifflin Co. References: Woodworth, Psychology, A Study of Mental Life. Stout, A Manual of Psychology. Titchener, A Text-book in Psychology; A Beginner's Psychology. James, Psychology (Briefer Course). Pillsbury, Essentials of Psychology. Two hours a week. 2 units. (b) Elementary Logic. Text-book: Mellone, Introductory Text-book of Logic, Blackwood (latest edition). One hour a week. 1 unit. (c) A fourth hour per week will be devoted to lectures introductory to the main problems of Philosophy, and a special study of Descartes' Discourse on Method and Berkeley's Treatise Concerning the Principles of Human Knowledge. Attendance at this hour is voluntary and no formal credit is given. Students contemplating Honours are, however, advised to take this course. 2. Ethics. Text-book: Everett, Moral Values, Holt. A special study will be made of selected portions of Aristotle's Ethics, Mill's Utilitarianism, and Kant's Metaphysic of Morals. Three hours a week. 3 units. 3. History of Greek Philosophy from Thales to Plato (inclusive). Text-books: Bakiewell, Source Book in Ancient Philosophy, Charles Scribner's Sons, and Burnet, Greek Philosophy (Part 1), Philosophy 141 Macmillan. In connection with this course a special study will be made of Plato's Republic, Phaedo, and Philebus. Three hours a week. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 4. The History of Philosophy from the Renaissance to the Present time. Text-book: Alexander, A Short History of Philosophy, Macmillan. Works of Reference: Rand, Modern Classical Philosophers, and the various Histories of Philosophy. Three hours a week. 3 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 5. The Philosophy of Kant, with special study of the Critique of Pure Reason. Two hours a week. 2 units. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 6. Philosophic Movements since the time of Kant. Post- Kantian Idealism, Pragmatism, Modern Realism, Bergson and others. Two hours a week. 2 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 7. Introduction to Education. A course of lectures and discussions dealing with educational movements since the beginning of the 19th century, and with the theories of life and of mind which are implicit in these movements. Texts: Spencer, Education, Everyman Edition. Dewey, Democracy and Education, Macmillan. References: Butler, The Meaning of Education. Moore, What is Educationt Adams (ed.), The New Teaching. Holmes. What is and What might be. Articles in Cyclopedia of Education, Macmillan. Philosophy 1 is recommended as preparatory to this course. Three hours a week. 3 units. 142 Faculty of Arts and Science 8. Social Psychology. — A study of those particular phases of mental life and development which are fundamental in social organization and activity. Texts: McDougall, Social Psychology, The Group Mind, Methuen, London. Ginsberg, Psychology of Society, Methuen, London. Collateral reading will be prescribed from the following : Hobhouse, Mind in Evolution, Morals in Evolution. Sutherland, Origin and Growth of the Moral Instinct. Cooley, Human Nature and the Social Order. Wallas, Human Nature in Politics; The Great Society. Ross, Social Psychology. Trotter, Instincts of the Herd in Peace and War. Bernard, Introduction to Social Psychology. Philosophy 1 is recommended as preparatory to this course. Three hours a week. 3 units. 9. (1) A study of the concept of intelligence. Current theories of the nature and growth of intelligence. Its practical bearing in modern life. Principles and applications of the measurement of intelligence. History of the movement. The nature and causes of mental defects and peculiarities. References: Spearman, The Nature of Intelligence and the Principles of Cognition, Macmillan; Woodrow, Brightness and Dullness in Children, Lippincott; Peterson, Early Conceptions and Tests of Intelligence, World Book Co.; Gesell, The Mental Growth of the Pre-School Child, Macmillan; Freeman, Mental Tests, Houghton Mifflin; Pintner, Intelligence Testing, Henry Holt. (2) Principles of Experimental Procedure. Method of Measurement. Practical training in the methods of individual and group examinations. Treatment of subnormal, normal and gifted children. Text: Terman, Measurement of Intelligence, Houghton Mifflin Co. References: Terman, Stanford Revision of Binet Simon Scale, Warwick and York; Wells, Mental Tests in Clinical Practice, World Book Co.; Bisch, Clinical Practice, Williams and Wilkins; Mateer, The Unstabe Child, Appleton; Hollingworth, Physics 143 Gifted Children, Macmillan; Wallin, Clinical and Abnormal Psychology, Houghton Mifflin; Cyril Burt, The Young Delinquent, Appleton. Students will note that Courses 3 and 4, and Courses 5 and 6 are given in alternate years. This arrangement is designed to meet the needs of students who desire to pursue the study of philosophy beyond the elementary stage. Department of Physics Professor: T. C. Hebb. Associate Professor: A. E. Hennings. Associate Professor: J. G. Davidson. Assistant Professor: G. M. Shrum. Assistant: H. W. Fowler. 1. Introduction to Physics.—A general study of the principles of mechanics, properties of matter, heat, light, sound, and electricity, both in the lecture-room and in the laboratory. The course has two objects: (1) To give the minimum acquaintance with physical science requisite for a liberal education to those whose studies will be mainly literary; (2) to be introductory to the courses in Chemistry, Engineering, and Advanced Physics. Students must reach the required standard in both theoretical and practical work. Open only to students who have not matriculated in Physics. Text-book: Millikan, Gale and Pyle, Elements of Physics. Three lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 2. College Physics.—This course consists of a general course in Physics suitable for those students who have obtained standing in Junior Matriculation Physics or its equivalent. It will cover mechanics, properties of matter, heat, light, sound and electricity in a fuller manner than would be possible in an introductory course. Text-book: Stewart, Physics, a Text-book for Colleges. Prerequisite: High School Physics. Three lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 144 Faculty of Arts and Science 3. Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat.—A study of the statics and dynamics of both a particle and a rigid body, the laws of gases and vapors, temperature, hygrometry, capillarity, expansion, and calorimetry. Text-book: Millikan, Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat. Prerequisite: Physics 1 or 2. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units 4. Electricity, Sound, and Light. — A study of the fundamentals of magnetism, electricity, sound, and light. Text-book: Millikan and Mills, Electricity, Sound and Light. Prerequisite: Physics 1 or 2. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 5. Dynamics of a Particle and of a Rigid Body.—A rigorous mathematical study of this subject. Prerequisites: Physics 3 and Mathematics 10. Two lectures per week. 2 units. 6. Advanced Electricity and Magnetism. — In this course, especial attention is given to the theoretical phases of Electricity and Magnetism. Text-book: Starling, Electricity and Magnetism. Prerequisites: Physics 3 and 4 and Mathematics 10. Two lectures per week. 2 units. 7. Kinetic Theory of Gases.—A course of lectures giving an exposition of the classical deductions and an outline of recent experimental advances of the subject. Text-book: Loeb, Kinetic Theory of Gases. Two lectures per week. 2 units. 8. Theoretical and Experimental Optics.—A course of lectures accompanied by laboratory work consisting of accurate measurements in diffraction, dispersion, interference, and polarization. Zoology 145 Books for reference: Houstoun, Treatise on Light. Mann, Advanced Optics. Wood, Physical Optics. Preston, Theory of Light. Drude, Theory of Optics, and Edser, Light for Students. Prerequisites: Physics 3 and 4, and Mathematics 10. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 9. Recent Advances in Physics.—A course of lectures dealing with the electrical properties of gases, the electron theory, and radioactivity. Books for reference: Thomson, Conduction of Electricity through Gases. Rutherford, Radio-active Substances and Their Radiations. Millikan, Electron. Thomson, Positive Rays. Hughes, Photo-electricity, and Kaye, X-Rays. Prerequisites: Courses 3 and 4, and Differential and Integral Calculus. Two lectures per week. 2 units. 10. Advanced Experimental Physics. — In this course the candidate for Honours is expected to perform one or more classical experiments and to do some special work. Carefully prepared reports, abstracts, and bibliographies will constitute an essential part of the course. Six hours laboratory per week. 3 to 6 units 11. Thermodynamics.—A course of lectures elucidating the fundamental principles of the subject. Text-book: Birtwhistle, The Principles of Thermodynamics. One lecture per week. 1 unit. Department of Zoology Professor: C. McLean Fraser. Assistant Professor: G. J. Spencer. Instructor: Gertrude M. Smith. Assistant: Mildred H. Campbell. Note—Biology 1 is prerequisite to all courses in Zoology. 1. General Morphology.—General morphology of animals Comparative anatomy. The relationships of animal groups. Comparative life-histories. 146 Faculty of Arts and Science Text-books': Parker and Haswell, Manual of Zoology, Macmillan. (American Edition, 1916.) This course is prerequisite to other courses in Zoology. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 2. Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates.—A detailed comparative study of a member of each of the classes of Vertebrates. Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. First Term. 2 units. 3. Comparative Anatomy of Invertebrates. — A detailed comparative study of a member of each of the main classes of Invertebrates. Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 2 units. 4. Morphology of Insects.—General Entomology. Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. First Term. 2 units. 5. Histology.—Study of the structure and development of animal tissues. Methods in histology. Ten hours per week. Second Term. 3 units. 6. Embryology.—A general survey of the principles of vertebrate embryology. Preparation and examination of em- bryological sections. Ten hours per week. First Term. 3 units 7. Economic Entomology.—A study of the insect pests of animals and plants; means of combating them. Lecture and laboratory work, six hours per week. Second Term. 2 units. 8. Private Reading. — A course of reading on Biological theories. In this course examinations will be set, but no class instruction will be given. 2 units. THE f^y FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE ^^ > V FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE FOREWORD The object of the courses in Applied Science is to train students in exact and fertile thinking, and to give them a sound knowledge of natural laws and of the means of utilizing natural forces and natural products for the benefit of man and the advancement of civilization. Experience shows that such a training is the best yet devised for a large and increasing proportion of the administrative, supervisory and technical positions. The object, then, is to turn out, not finished engineers or industrial leaders—these are the product of years of development in the school of experience—, but young men with a special capacity and training for attaining these goals, and thus for helping to develop the industries of the province. Consequently the undergraduate course is made broad and general rather than narrow and highly specialized. Furthermore, such a course is not only better suited to the British Columbia conditions that the graduate will encounter in his after life, but also better for later specialization, for it furnishes a more solid foundation, a better background, a broader outlook and a more stimulating atmosphere, all necessary if the specialist is to achieve the maximum results of which he is capable. The student is offered a full undergraduate course and an additional year of graduate study. The preliminary year required in Arts is intended to increase the student's general knowledge and to broaden his outlook. It is hoped that enough interest will be aroused to encourage the student to continue some study of the humanities as a hobby or recreation. The first two years in Applied Science proper are spent in a general course that includes Mathematics and all the basic Bciences. This gives not only a broad training, but enables the student to discover the work for which he has special liking or 150 Faculty of Applied Science aptitude and to select more intelligently the subjects in which to specialize during the two final years at college. During the latter periods students acquire more detailed knowledge and get practice in applying scientific knowledge, in solving problems, in doing things; and there is also training in Economics, Law and Industrial Management. During the long period between sessions, the student is required to engage in some industrial or professional work that will afford practical experience not obtainable in the laboratory or field classes, but that is a necessary supplement to academic study. An engineering degree in the Applied Science Course of the University is accepted by the Association of Professional Engineers of the Province of British Columbia in lieu of four of the six years practical experience required by the Engineering Act of the Province for registration to practise engineering. FACILITIES FOR WORK For laboratory and other facilities see Pages 25-37. ADMISSION The general requirements for admission to the University are given on pages 41, 42. The following are special conditions affecting admission to Applied Science: 1. Nursing and Health courses require Junior Matriculation or equivalent (as for Arts). 2. All other courses require: (a) Junior Matriculation or equivalent. (b) Also a First Year Arts course or equivalent,* which shall include the following subjects: Chemistry 1; Mathematics 1 (Algebra, Geometry and Trigonometry); Physics 1, or 2; English 1; Latin 1, or French 1, or German B. •Students preparing for admission to Applied Science are recommended to take their First Year in Arts and Science rather than Senior Matriculation, but if such students proceed by way of Senior Matriculation they must take Chemistry and Physics, and are required to make 50 per cent, in each of these two subjects and also in Algebra, Geometry and Trigonometry. Courses in Applied Science 151 Th« passing grade is fifty per cent, for Chemistry, Physics and each of the Mathematics subjects; but in the others a pass of forty per cent, will be accepted, provided an average of fifty per cent, has been obtained in the total. Biology 1 may be taken as an optional extra subject, and, if passed with a grade of at least fifty per cent., need not be taken in Applied Science. Economics 1 taken in Arts is accepted in lieu of Economies in Applied Science. A reading knowledge of French and German is desirable for students in Engineering. 3. No student may enter with any outstanding supplemental in Junior Matriculation or in any of the Chemistry, Mathematics or Physics subjects listed above; or with supplemental in other subjects to the extent of more than three units*. Students who have failed to complete the above requirements may apply for permission to take the September supplemental examinations in Arts. p I DEGREES The degrees offered students in this Faculty are: Bachelor of Applied Science (B.A.Sc). (See below.) Master of Applied Science (M.A.Sc). (See Page 178.) COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.Sc. The degree of Bachelor of Applied Science is granted on the completion of the work in one of the coursest given below: I. Chemical Engineering. II. Chemistry. III. Civil Engineering. IV. Electrical Engineering. V. Forest Engineering. *A unit normally consists of one lecture hour, or one continuous laboratory period of not less than two or more than three hours, per week throughout the session; or two lecture hours or equivalent laboratory periods throughout a single term. tThe curriculum described in the following pages may be changed from time to time as deemed advisable by the Faculty. 152 Faculty of Applied Science VI. Geological Engineering. VII. Mechanical Engineering. VIII. Metallurgical Engineering. IX. Mining Engineering. X. Nursing and Health. A double course in Arts and Science and in Applied Science is offered, leading to the degree of B.A., and B.A.Sc. (See Page 178.) Note:—A series of noon-hour talks is given during the session by the Faculty and prominent outsiders on the subjects: choice of a profession; occupations for which an Applied Science course forms a suitable preparation; life and work in different engineering professions and industries. The purpose of these talks is to assist students to select the course best suited to their tastes and aptitudes, and their probable life-work. PRACTICAL WORK OUTSIDE THE UNIVERSITY In order to master professional subjects it is very important that the work done at the University should be supplemented by practical experience in related work outside. Therefore students are expected to spend their summers in employment that will give such experience. But summer employment will not be accepted as an excuse for failure to write off supplemental examinations at the regular date specified in the Calendar or for failure to enter University on the opening date, except when the summer employment affords experience necessary for the course the student in specializing in, as Geological Survey field work for geological students, and the student furnishes a statement from his employer showing that circumstances made it impossible for the student to get back to the University at the proper time. Under these circumstances the student may, upon the approval of the Dean, register without penalty after the specified date of admission. Before a degree will be granted, a candidate is required to satisfy the Department concerned that he has done at least four months' practical work related to his Courses in Applied Science 153 chosen profession. Third and Fourth Year Essays (see Page 154) should be based, as far as possible, upon the summer work. Practical work such as Shop-work, Freehand Drawing, Mechanical Drawing, Surveying, etc, done outside the University, may be accepted in lieu of laboratory or field work (but not in lieu of lectures) in these subjects, on the recommendation of the Head of the Department and approval of the Dean. Students seeking exemption as above must make written application to the Dean accompanied by certificates indicating the character of the work done and the time devoted to it. GENERAL OUTLINE OF UNIVERSITY COURSES The work of the First and Second Years is the same in all courses, except those in Nursing and Health. m First Year Subject. Math. 1 Trigonometry Math. 2 Solid Geometry Math. 3 Algebra Math. 4 Calculus CE. 1 Descriptive Geom. .. M.E. 1 Drawing 1 Physics 1 Mechanics Physics 2 Heat Chem. 2a. Qual. Analysis ... M.E. 2a Shop Practice Biology 1* Introductory.... C.E. 2 Surveying C.E. 30 Engineering Prob. 1 C3 ttf 211 211 211 212 189 212 229 229 186 213 182 189 199 First Term. Second Term. J 0, Field Work I 4 I •• ggg 3 6 3 3 2 9 "Biology 1, Arts, passed with a grade of at least 60 per cent, will be accepted in lieu of this course. 154 Faculty of Applied Science Second Year Subject. Math. 6 Calculus Math. 7 Anal. Geom Chem. 2b Quan. Analysis C.E. 4 Graphics M.E. 6a Elem. Theory Physics 3 Electricity Physics 4 Mechanics C.E. 5 Mapping C.E. 6 Surveying Geology 1 General tCE. 7 Surveying CE. 31 Engineering Prob. 2., 8 « U, so 212 212 186 190 214 229 229 190 190 206 191 200 First Term. gee Second Term. Field Work 13 1.. 3» tStudents entering Civil, Forest, Geological, Metallurgical, and Mining Engineering are required to take Civil Engineering 7 (see Page 191) immediately after the spring examinations, i THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS Essays Essays are required of all students entering the Third and Fourth Years, and must conform to the following:— 1. The essay shall consist of not less than 2,000 words. 2. It must be a technical description of the engineering aspects of the work on which the student was engaged during the summer, or of any Scientific or engineering work with which he is familiar. In the preparation of the essay, advantage may be taken of any source of information, but due acknowledgment must be made of all authorities consulted. It should be suitably illustrated by drawings, sketches, photographs or specimens. 3. It must be typewritten, or clearly written on paper of substantial quality, standard letter size (8^x11 inches), on one side of the paper only, leaving a clear margin on top and left-hand side. Students are recommended to examine Courses in Applied Science 155 sample reports to be found in the library or in the departments. 4. All essays must be handed in to the Dean not later than November 15th. All essays, when handed in, become the property of the Department concerned, and are filed for reference. Students may submit duplicate copies of their essays in competition for the students' prizes of the Engineering Institute of Canada, or the Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. Essays will be considered as final Christmas examinations. A maximum of 100 marks is allowed, the value being based on presentation, English and matter. In third year essays presentation, that is, the manner in which the material is arranged and presented to the reader, is given most weight, with English second and matter third. In fourth year essays most emphasis is placed on matter, but the other two are still rated highly. COURSES I. Chemical Engineering The course in Chemical Engineering should prepare the student for the duties of managing engineer in a chemical manufactory. As such he must be conversant not only with the chemical processes involved, but he must be prepared to design and to oversee the construction of new buildings and to direct the installation and use of machinery. In the industrial life of British Columbia the chemical engineer may be more particularly concerned with the manufacture of acids and alkalies, the preparation from natural sources of various organic and inorganic compounds, the pulp and paper industry, and the utilization of the waste from a number of industrial plants indigenous to the Province. Accordingly, the course of study includes a number of courses in the older branches of engineering along with the maximum of chemical training allowed by the time at the disposal of the student. 156 Faculty of Applied Science Third Year Subject. aj d 6 M First Term. 3£ 3» Second Term. 2£ 3« Essay Economics 1 Introductory Met. 1 Introductory Geol. 2 (a) Mineralogy .. Chem. 3 Organic Chem. 4 Theoretical Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis .. E.E. 1 General Physics 5 Light CE. 12 Hydraulics 154 200 226 207 187 187 187 217 229 193 Subject. Fourth Year Essay Chem. 6 Industrial ... Chem. 7 Physical Chem. 8 Electro Chem. 9 Adv. Organic Chem. 16 Engineering Met. 2 General Thesis a* g m 154 188 188 188 188 188 226 First Term. 3« Second Term. & 12 3 *3 ii II. Chemistry The aim of this course is to train the students in the practice of Chemistry, and to give a thorough, knowledge in the fundamental principles of this subject, that they may be prepared to assist in the solution of problems of value to the industrial and agricultural life of the Province. The course is arranged to give in the first two years a knowledge of the fundamental Courses in Applied Science 157 principles of Chemistry and Physics, with sufficient mathematics to enable the theoretical parts of the subject to be understood. In the Third Year, Analytical, Organic, and Physical Chemistry are studied from the scientific side and in relation to technology; while in the Fourth Year a considerable amount of time is devoted to a short piece of original work. Third Year Subject. S ■■ First Term. 00^1 V OJ % fr- 2 &j Second Term. H g s u Essay Econ. 1 Introductory . Chem. 3 Organic Chem. 4 Theoretical .. Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis Met. 1 Introductory .. Geol. 2 (a) Mineralogy Met. 5 Assaying German (Arts) B Physics 5 Light 154 200 187 187 187 226 207 227 139 229 Fourth Year 3 it ■ Q * S « First Term. Second Term. Subject. lull* DO Jd ge$ |8> 154 86 230 188 188 188 188 226 2 2 2 3 2 2 7 3 3 3 9 "a 2 3 'h 2 •• Chem. 6 Industrial 3 3 Thesis 18 158 Faculty of Applied Science III. Civil Engineering The broad field covered by Civil Engineering makes it an adjunct of many other branches of engineering, yet the Civil Engineer occupies a distinctive field and is intimately associated with a wide group of undertakings vitally affecting the health, comfort and prosperity of the commonwealth. The various branches of Civil Engineering deal with problems in water supply and water purification; in sewerage systems, sewage disposal plants, and the handling of municipal and industrial wastes; in hydraulic power development; in irrigation and drainage for agricultural activities; in all types of structures, bridges and buildings, piers and docks, sea walls and protective works; in transportation, canals, locks, highways, electric and steam railways; and in the management and direction of public works, public utilities, industrial and commercial enterprises. The course in Civil Engineering is designed to provide, in so far as time will permit, foundations for continued growth along those lines which the student's interests and environment determine, without compelling too early specialization. Training in pure and applied science, in the humanities, in economics and engineering law, and in the technical phases of professional work establishes a broad basis for the stimulation of a sincere spirit of public service and for the development of that capacity for reliable work and judgment which makes safe the assumption of responsibilities. The methods of instruction are planned with the view of bringing out the powers and initiative of the students while training them in habits of accurate analysis and careful work. Students are encouraged to secure summer work which will give them an insight into the various phases of the career upon which they are about to enter, and the summer essays lay the foundation for the ability to set forth, in clear and precise language, descriptions and analyses of projects and engineering activities. In the Fourth Year thesis an opportunity is given for special investigation and research under the supervision of experienced engineers. Courses in Applied Science 159 Third Year Subject. J! .. '3 9 a & S « g 09 First Term. j 3 t1- Is J 5« Second Term. S 01 5S 2e8 l§* 5a Essay C.E. 8 Foundations CE. 9 Elementary Design CE. 10 Strength of Mtls.. CE. 11 Railways CE. 12 Hydraulics CE. 13 Mapping C.E. 14 Surveying CE. 15 Drawing M.E. 6 (b) Laboratory ... E.E. 1 General Econ. 1* Introductory CE. 16 Surveying CE. 21 Water Power CE. 28 Seminar 154 191 2 192 192 2 193 2 193 1 193 , . 193 2 194 • • 1 215 . . 217 2 200 2 194 F 196 1 199 1 Field Work •Economics 1 in Arts will be accepted in lieu of the Science Course. Fourth Year Subject. S ■■ ■2 » First Term. ?.* 5a Second Term. u Is* 5« Essay . CE. 17 CE. 18 CE. 19 CE. 20 CE. 22 C.E. 23 CE. 24 CE. 25 CE. 26 CE. 27 CE. 28 CE. 29 Structural Design . Engineering Economics Law—Contracts Geodesy Municipal Transportation Mechanics of Mtls. . Theory of Structures Trips Thesis Seminar Hydraulic Machines 154 194 194 195 195 196 197 197 198 198 198 199 199 3 6 Required 1 1 2 2 2 1 Sat. A i l M. 3 6 3 1 160 Faculty of Applied Science IV. Electrical Engineering This course is designed for those students who desire a general training in the theory and practice of Electrical Engineering in addition to the basic principles of Mechanical Engineering. The Third Year of tb*e course is devoted mainly to Mechanical Engineering, together with work which involves the broad principles which underlie all engineering work. The Fourth Year is devoted to Electrical Engineering, the fundamental principles of industrial economics, works organization, management, and financing. Vancouver and the surrounding country afford excellent facilities for the study of engineering works under commercial conditions. The managing officials of these works are pleased to permit students, in charge of a member of the Faculty, to inspect and conduct tests at pre-arranged times. Organized visits to industrial plants constitute a regular part of the advanced work. Third Year Subject. £ i; Q * «- « o * First Term. 2£ Second Term. gas !§* 5» Essay M.E. 3 Kinematics M.E. 4 Dynamics M.E. 5 Design M.E. 7 Thermo-dynamics CE. 10 Str. of Materials E.E. 2 General C.E. 12 Hydraulics M.E. 2b Shop Practice Math. 8 (Adv. Calculus) or Math. 9 (Differential Equa.) 154 214 214 214 215 192 218 193 213 212 2 3 2 3 1 3 3 3 4 3 8 Courses in Applied Science 161 Fourth Year Subject. O 6< g 50 First Term. 111 Second Term. ?.* gs s ■§s* 5« Essay E.E. 4 Machines E.E. 5 Traction E.E. 6 Transmission E.E. 7 Design E.E. 8 Radio M.E. 8 Thermo-dynamics M.E. 10 Design M.E. 14 Mechanical Design ... Math. 8 (Adv. Calculus) or Math. 9 (Differential Equa.) C.E. 18 Engr. Economics CE. 19 Engr. Law CE. 29 Hydr. Machines 154 221 222 223 223 223 215 216 217 212 212 194 195 199 2 6 2 1 1 2 .. 2 1 3 1 1 , , 1 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 L • J^ 1 2 ' 2 2 2 1 . . I 1 .. 1 V. Forest Engineering In British Columbia the forest industries, including logging and the manufacture of lumber, pulp and paper, now lead all others, and are rapidly expanding. They must always play a very important part in the economy of the Province, because seven-eighths of the productive land is absolute forest soil, that will grow good timber but no other crop of value; and because over half the remaining stand of saw-timber — the last big reserve — of Canada is here. The development of these industries is requiring more and more the services of engineers, and especially is this true in logging. Furthermore, most of the forest land is owned by the public, and the management of these vast estates is a task that will require constant growth on the part of the government forest services. This indicates very briefly the various fields of service open to Forest Engineers, and for which the course of studies is designed. Primarily the course is planned for the lumber industry, and a major part of the time — apart from the preliminary foundation work — is devoted to the branches of 162 Faculty of Applied Science engineering most used in it. In addition, the fundamental subjects of forestry are covered. As in other engineering courses the students are expected to obtain practical experience during the summer vacations, this being an essential supplement to the studies at the University. Vancouver contains large sawmills, wood-working plants, and plants for seasoning and preserving wood — more, in fact, than any other place in the Province. Pulp mills, logging operations and extensive forests are within easy reach. The advantages of location are therefore exceptional. A special feature is the affiliation of the Forest Products Laboratory of Canada, maintained at the University by a co-operative arrangement with the Dominion Forestry Branch. A description of this Laboratory and its activities is given in another part of this calendar. It affords opportunities for instruction in testing the mechanical properties of timber and other structural materials, and facilities are now provided for experimental and demonstration work in wood seasoning. Third Year Subject. 3 M First Term. 3-s bS3 §°* gE S .5 o-^ Second Term. rt oi QJ 5* Essay F.E.'l General Forestry . F.E. 2 Mensuration F.E. 3 Protection F.E. 4 Finance Bot. 1 General Botany ... Bot. 5 (b) Dendrology .... E.E. 1 Fundamentals .... CE. 8 (a) Foundations C.E. 9 Structural Design . C.E. 10 Strength Materials C.E. 11 Railways CE. 13 Mapping C.E. 14 Surveying CE. 12 Hydraulics 154 201 201 201 202 183 184 217 191 192 192 193 193 193 193 1 4 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 2 3 "\ Courses in Applied Science 163 Fourth Year Subject. F.E. 5 Technology . F.E. 6 Organization F.E. 7 History .... F.E. 8 Silviculture . F.E. 9 Lumbering . F.E. 10 Logging ... F.E. 11 Milling .... F.E. 12 Products .. Bot. 6 (b) Pathology ) Zool. 7 Entomology \' Bot. 7 (a) Ecology C.E. 17 Structural Design C.E. 18 Economics C.E. 19 Law M.E. 6 (b) Steam Lab. ... 154 202 202 203 203 203 204 204 204 185 235 185 194 194 195 215 First Term. SB ►3^ O Q. . S * £ 5n Second Term. S a# 3 2 1 .. 1 2 .. 1 4 n "»l "A i 2 3 i > > 2 1 3 VI. Geological Engineering This course is designed to meet the requirements of students who intend to enter Geology as a profession. It gives a broad training not only in Geology, but also in the sciences of Biology, Chemistry, Physics, and Mathematics, which are extensively applied in the solution of geological problems. The engineering subjects are useful not only to the Mining and Consulting Geologist and the Geological Surveyor, but to the Geologist engaged in original research in any branch of the science. The course therefore furnishes a foundation for the professions of Mineralogist, Geological Surveyor, Mining Geologist, Consulting Geologist, Palaeontologist, Geographer, etc., and is useful for those who will be in any way connected with the discovery or development of the natural resources of the country. As a supplement to the work in the classroom, laboratory and field during the session, the student is expected to obtain practical experience during the summer vacations. 164 Faculty of Applied Science Third Year Subject. First Term. 1* 111 5a Second Term. fa U ■3 is sh 5a Essay Geol. 2 Mineralogy ... Geol. 3 Historical Geol. 4 Structural Geol. 5 Regional Chem. 4 Theoretical .. Econ. 1 (Arts) Min. 1 Metal Mining .. Met. 5 Fire Assaying . Met. 1 General Ore Dressing 1 General Zool. 1 C.E. 13 Mapping Chem. 5* Adv. Analysis Met. 6* Wet Assaying . 154 207 208 208 208 187 200 224 227 226 227 235 193 187 227 'Either Chem. 5 or Met. 6 must be taken. Fourth Year Subject. 3 ■■ 3 8> R * First Term. Second Term. Essay Geol. 6 Palaeontology .... Geol. 7 Petrology Geol. 8 Economic C.E. 18 Engr. Economics . Geol. 9 Mineralography .. Geol. 10 Field Min. 2 Coal and Placer ... Min. 3 Metal Mining Min. 5 Surveying Met. 2 Smelting Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory Thesis 154 209 209 209 194 210 210 224 225 225 223 228 2 4 I *3 3 Courses in Applied Science 165 VII. Mechanical Engineering As this branch of Engineering forms an outstanding feature in all industrial development, the course of training is general and basic in its character. Because of its general character it is not possible in the time available to give the student an intimate knowledge of the details of practice in any special line of work. The course is designed more particularly for those who are likely to take up the manufacture of machinery, power plant work (including design and construction of steam, gas, oil, or hydraulic plants), heating and ventilation of buildings, refrigeration, or industrial management. Students in this course are given a systematic course in the fundamentals of Electrical Engineering. Governed by the fact that values and costs are controlling factors in the practice of Engineering, the subjects of the final years are treated with a view of developing a business sense, an understanding of men, and the ability to report clearly on industrial problems. This demands the study of Economics, the use of good English, and the participation in outside industrial work during the vacation. Third Year As in Electrical Engineering. (See Page 160.) Fourth Year Subject. Essay M.E. 9 Thermodynamics M.E. 10 Design M.E. 11 Heating M.E. 12 Plant Design M.E. 13 Metals E.E. 3 Standard Practice C.E. 18 Engr. Economics CE. 19 Engr. Law CE. 29 Hydraulic Mach Math. 8 (Adv. Calculus) or Math. 9 (Differential Equa.) *§ SB a, « R b 154 216 216 216 216 217 220 194 195 199 212 First Term. H 3a Second Term. Hi* ■81 166 Faculty of Applied Science VIII.-IX. Metallurgical and Mining Engineering Modern Metallurgical practice covers a wide and expanding field. The Metallurgical Engineer has to design and operate a great variety of plants and processes. He must be able to deal with furnace and solution processes, based on chemical principles, and mechanical crushing and separating processes, based on physical principles, together with an immense variety of principal and auxiliary machinery, from small to immense, used in the separation and refining of ores, artificial mineral products and metals. The whole forms a keenly competitive and strictly commercial industry, based on, and closely limited by, the practical economic considerations of costs and profits. Rapid and continuous change and improvement is the rule. Methods and machines quickly become obsolete. The field for research and improvement in methods and machinery is ever widening, though the economic margin is ever narrowing. The Metallurgical course, in the Third and Fourth Years, based on the fundamental earlier years, is designed to give the student a broad general knowledge of standard metallurgical methods and machinery, with a fundamental grasp of the actual applications of the basic sciences in practical metallurgical operations, also sufficient laboratory practice to illustrate and fix these in his mind and train him for an actual junior position after graduation. Modern mining operations cover a field notable for its breadth and variety. The discovery, steadily becoming more difficult, and the development, steadily becoming more scientific, of new mineral deposits are based largely on a knowledge of the laws and processes of Nature, ultimately physical and chemical, but, immediately, chiefly geological in kind. On the other hand, the operations of actual mining are largely mechanical in kind, and call for use and knowledge of mechanical and electrical equipment, adapted to underground methods and conditions. The conditions under which mining operations are carried on are often of great natural difficulty, and many of the factors to be dealt with are, to a large extent, obscure or indefinite Courses in Applied Science 167 oftener than measureable. The qualities of good judgment and decision are therefore of great importance in the application of technical knowledge to mining. As in metallurgy, economic considerations are paramount. The Mining course is correspondingly broad in scope. In addition to the fundamental sciences, it includes fundamental subjects in Civil, Electrical and Mechanical Engineering, Economics and Economic Geology. The special mining subjects cover the underlying principles and practice on which the discovery, development and economic operation of mines are based, the practical application of technical knowledge to actual operations, and the use of judgment and decision, by precept, example and illustration. Sufficient practical training and laboratory work are included to fit the student for an actual junior position after graduation. While not given as separate subjects, the social, administrative and ethical sides of the professions of Mining and Metallurgy are included in the general treatment of appropriate subjects. In this University, emphasis is naturally placed on British Columbia conditions and its chief mineral products, namely: Gold, Silver, Lead, Zinc, Copper, Coal and Coke. The University is conveniently located in proximity to coal and metal mining districts, large coal and metal mining operations being carried on within a few hours' journey, in connection with which there are large washing and ore concentration plants. There is a large metallurgical plant at Tacoma, within an easy day's journey. Students have little difficulty in obtaining positions in mines or smelters during their vacation, as several of the larger companies have established the practice of accepting student employees in reasonable numbers during the vacation months. Students are recommended to spend their vacations at practical works, in connection with Metallurgy or Mining, and are required to do so between the Third and Fourth Years as an essential part of their course, without which a degree will not be granted. An essay covering this work is also required, as specified in the Fourth Year curriculum. 168 Faculty of Applied Science Students are advised to become student members of Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. the VIII. Metallurgical Engineering Third Year « ,, £ bo s « First Term. Second Term. Subject. IBM j a a. Ml 5a n ^8. 5a 150 200 192 192 193 193 215 207 217 224 227 226 227 227 2 3 3 3 2 2 5 3 •2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 C.E. 9 Elem. Design 3 CE. 10 Str. of Materials C.E. 12 Hydraulics 2 1 2 3 3 C.E. 13 Mapping 3 3 2 E.E. 1 General 2 2 2 2 1 2 Met. 5 Fire Assay 3 Fourth Year Subject. s ■■ R<2 >- s First Term. Second Term. mM H ^8, 2 » £ Is* 5a .J <u " a is'1- if Geol. 9 Mineralography . 154 210 209 194 188 228 225 226 226 227 *3 2 3 2 3 2 1 3 9 6 *3 2 *2 2 2 2 1 C.E. 18 Engr. Economics ... Chem. 8 Electro- Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory . Min. 3 Metal Mining 9 12 Courses in Applied Science 169 IX. Mining Engineering Third Year As in Metallurgical Engineering. (See Page 168.) Fourth Year Subject. 4) P. & KJ1 First Term. 00 .M 2i* Essay Geol. 7 Petrology Geol. 8 Economic C.E. 18 Engr. Economics .. CE. 19 Engr. Law Met. 2 Smelting Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory Min. 2 Coal and Placer ... Min. 3 Metal Mining Min. 4 Machinery Min. 5 Surveying Min. 7 Methods Min. 6 Design SgJ 5a Second Term. fa * n. e* iB OJ Ss2 ■2 5 5a 154 209 2 4 2 4 209 3 1 3 1 194 2 . . 2 .. 195 1 . , 1 , , 226 2 . . 2 • ■ 228 .. 9 . . 9 224 2 2 • • 225 2 . . 2 , , 225 2 , . 2 , , 225 1 1 , . . . 226 , , , , 1 , , 225 3 •• 3 Short Courses in Mining The regular Short Courses in Mining for the Session commence on the second Monday in January, and continue for eight weeks. These courses include Mining, Smelting, Ore Concentration, Geology and Ore-deposits, Mineralogy and Bock Study, Fire Assaying, Chemistry, and Surveying. The courses are thoroughly practical in nature. They are not primarily intended for those who have had a technical training, but rather for those who have had practical experience in mining and prospecting, or are connected with the business of mining in any way. The courses are designed to give practical and technical knowledge, helpful in practical mining work and mining business. While they are short they are complete in themselves, and require no other preparation than a common-school education or ability to read and write. 170 Faculty of Applied Science Experience has shown that they fill a real need, and they have proved very successful in the past. As they do not form part of the regular University course, a special bulletin is issued, in which details of the courses and requirements for admission are given. Copies of this may be obtained on application to the Registrar of the University. These courses will not be given unless at least ten students register for them. X Nursing and Health 1. Nursing A.—A five-year undergraduate course. (See below.) 2. Nursing B.—A graduate course of one academic year in Public Health Nursing. (See Page 174.) 3. Nursing C.—A graduate course of one academic year in Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing. (See Page 175.) Registration for these courses will be subject to the general University Regulations. (See Pages 43-45) and to the special requirements of the Department. All regulations are subject to change from year to year, and subjects or courses may be modified during the year as the Faculty may deem advisable. Nursing A (Five-year Undergraduate Course) This is a five-year combined course leading to the Degree of B.A.Sc. (Nursing) and to the diploma in nursing. It is given by the University in co-operation with the Associated Hospital Schools of Nursing, which means those that have signified their willingness to supply the professional part of the course, and have received the approval of the University Senate for that purpose. Up to the present time the Vancouver General is the only Hospital which has entered into association with the University to this end. The course is open to applicants who meet the general requirements mentioned above, and who, in the opinion of the Courses in Applied Science 171 Department, are personally fitted for the profession of nursing. In addition they must be able to satisfy the entrance requirements of the associated Hospital Schools of Nursing. The aim of the five-year combined course is to afford a broader education than can be given by the Hospital Schools of Nursing alone, and thus to build a sound foundation for those who desire to fit themselves for Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing or for Public Health Nursing service. The First and Second Years, which are academic, give the students an introduction to general cultural subjects and a foundation in the sciences underlying the practice of nursing. Between the First and Second years a probationary period of four months will be spent in an associated Hospital School of Nursing. The Third and Fourth Years are devoted to professional training in an Associated Hospital, and are planned to afford experience and training in the care of the sick, and to develop the skill, observation and judgment necessary to the efficient practice of nursing. The Fifth Year affords two alternative courses, one in Public Health Nursing (Nursing B) and the second in Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing (Nursing C). I First Year (Academic) Subject. is First Term. I,* fe i- <° 5« Second Term. £gis 3a English 1 (a) English 1 (b) Choice of Mathematics 1 or Latin 1 or French 1 or History 1, 2, or 3 Physics 1 Chemistry 1 Biology 1 Nursing 1 112 113 131 100 136 125 229 186 182 231 172 Faculty of Applied Science Probationary Period (Hospital) The probationary period of four months, to be taken between the first and second academic years, will be spent in an Associated Hospital. In order to meet the admission requirements of the Associated Hospital School of Nursing, the student must have attained such age as may be fixed by the Associated Hospital School of Nursing before entering upon this probationary period; in the Vancouver General Hospital School of Nursing the eighteenth birthday must be passed. During this period the student will undergo rigid examination as to fitness in physique, temperament and character for the practice of nursing. This will afford the Hospital School of Nursing information upon which to judge the students' qualifications for the profession of nursing. It also enables the student to determine whether she feels herself personally fitted or inclined to proceed in the course. The Hospital Schools of Nursing reserve the right to reject candidates who do not reach the required standards. Second Year (Academic) Subject. S ;: First Term. a a, « fe h v 5a Second Term. u ►3 s 5a English 2 (a) English 2 (b) Zoology 1 Philosophy 1 Economics 1 Bacteriology 1 Bacteriology 2 Nursing 2 Anatomy and Physiology 113 113 235 140 102 86 87 231 231 Third and Fourth Years (Professional) The Third and Fourth Years will be spent in practical training in an associated Hospital School of Nursing. Students Courses in Applied Science 173 in these years are required to register with the University even though during this portion of the course they are in residence at the Hospital. During these professional years students are subject to the authority and are under the direction of the officers of the associated Hospital Schools of Nursing. The required professional period is twenty-eight months, in which is included the probationary period of four months. Full maintenance and such allowance as the associated Hospital authorities may designate are accorded, and a yearly vacation of three weeks is granted at the convenience of the Superintendent of the School of Nursing. Instruction in the following Nursing subjects is given by members of the medical staff of the associated Hospital and by qualified nurse, instructors: Introductory Ethics of Nursing; Practical Nursing Procedure; Elementary Nutrition and Cookery; Drugs and Solutions; Materia Medica; Surgical Nursing; Medical Nursing (including charting); Gynecological Nursing; Nursing of Communicable Diseases; Obstetrical Nursing; Diet in Disease; Pediatric Nursing and Infant Feeding; Nursing in Diseases of the Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat; Nursing in Tuberculosis; Urinalysis; Introduction to Anaesthesia; Introduction to Physiotherapy and X-Ray. This schedule is open to change at any time, at the discretion of the associated Hospital School of Nursing. The period of Hospital service includes actual nursing experience in the following departments: Medical. Operating Room. Surgical. Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat. Gynecological. Obstetrical. Pediatric and Orthopaedic. Infectious. Observation and Neurological. Tuberculosis. Infants. Diet Kitchen. The Social Service Department of the Hospital offers opportunity for a four weeks' service to a limited number of students. Selection will be made by the Superintendent of Nurses from the students desirous of receiving this course. 174 Faculty of Applied Science Fifth Year (Academic and Professional) The Fifth Year will be spent in either Nursing B or Nursing C, at the option of the student. The selection between these courses need not be made until registering with the University for the Fifth Year. Nursing B (Public Health Nursing) A graduate course of one academic year, including work in the University, and appropriate field work under the supervision of the various associated Public Health organizations. Nursing B (Public Health Nursing) Subject Preventable Diseases Epidemiology Tuberculosis Venereal Diseases Mental Hygiene Bacteriology Infant Welfare Orthopedics Public Health Public Health Administration Public Health Organiations Vital Statistics Principles and Practice of Public Health Nursing Rural Public Health Nursing Urban Visiting Nursing Programme .. Health Education History of Nursing and Contemporary Nursing Problems School Hygiene Hospital Social Service Metabolism and Nutrition Psychology for Nurses Principles of Education Applied to Teaching Public Speaking and Parliamentary Procedure Sociology Geography 10 Motor Mechanics For Details See Page: Field Work 231 231 231 231 231 232 232 232 232 232 232 233 233 233 233 233 233 234 234 234 234 234 234 234 234 234 175 Total Hours k Lectures 21 21 11 3 11 11 5 15 4 4 18 34 6 2 16 11 12 3 11 16 34 18 21 16 Total Hours Laboratory 10 To run concurrently with the academic work. * Hours to be arranged. Courses in Applied Science 175 Nursing C (Teaching and Supervision) A graduate course of one academic year, including work in the University, and opportunity for practice teaching and for the observation of Training School administration and ward supervision in associated Hospitals. Nursing C Subject See Page: For Details Preventable Diseases Mental Hygiene Bacteriology Infant Welfare Orthopedics History of Nursing and Contemporary Nursing Problems Teaching in Schools of Nursing Principles of Supervision in Schools of Nursing Metabolism and Nutrition Psychology for Nurses Principles of Education Applied to Teaching Public Speaking and Parliamentary Procedure Sociology Electives from Nursing B or from related Science Courses Field Work 231 231 232 232 232 233 233 233 234 234 234 234 234 176 Total Hours Lectures Total Houra Laboratory 21 11 11 5 11 34 16 11 16 34 18 21 * Hours to be arranged. Field Work in Nursing B and C Through the courtesy and co-operation of the following agencies arrangements have been made for supervised field work, or observation: FOR NURSING B Vancouver General Hospital.—The Social Service Department, Miss Laura B. Timmins, Director. 176 Faculty of Applied Science The Provincial Department of Health.—Dr. H. E. Young, Provincial Health Officer. The Victorian Order of Nurses.—Miss M. Duffield, District Superintendent. The Medical Department of the Vancouver Public Schools.— Dr. H. White, Medical Director; Miss E. Breeze, Director, School Hygiene. The Vancouver Rotary Clinic for Diseases of the Chest.— Dr. H. A. Rawlings, Director. The Department of Child Hygiene, City of Vancouver.— Dr. F. T. Underhill, City Health Officer; Miss L. Sanders, Supervisor, Department of Child Hygiene. The Government Venereal Disease Clinic.—Dr. J. Ewart Campbell, Director; Miss E. V. Cameron, Nurse in charge. The Provincial Mental Hospital, Essondale.—Dr. A. L. Crease, Medical Superintendent. FOR NURSING C The Vancouver General Hospital.—Dr. F. C. Bell, Superintendent ; Miss K. "W. Ellis, Superintendent of Nurses. The academic work and field work will run concurrently throughout the two University terms, with the exception of the last four weeks of the Second Term which, in Nursing B, will be devoted entirely to field work under the supervision of the Provincial Rural Public Health Nursing organizations and, in Nursing C, to such Hospital Service as may be arranged by the Associated Hospitals. Field work for some students may have to be delayed until after the close of the University year. During the period spent in the Hospital, all students will be subject to the authority, and under the direction, of the officers of the Associated Hospital School of Nursing. Adequate opportunity for observation, as well as for practice, is thus afforded in all of the more important fields of Public Health Nursing and in the field of Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing. Courses in Applied Science 177 Admission to Nursing B and C The courses are open to students of the five-year course, and also to nurses who have graduated from recognized Schools of Nursing, who are eligible for registration in British Columbia and who are personally fitted for their proposed work. For Nursing C it is also required that applicants shall fulfil the University Educational requirement of Junior Matriculation. Applications for admission to the courses of Nursing B or C Bhould be sent to the Department of Nursing and Health not later than July 15th of the current year. A certificate of good health and physical condition, signed by a regular practising physician, must be presented with the applications. As a preparation for Nursing B, nurses without previous Public Health Nursing service are advised to obtain at least one month's experience in a visiting nursing agency, or other public health or social agency approved by the Department. While not obligatory, this month is most important, and various Field Agencies—the Provincial Board of Health, the Vancouver General Hospital Social Service Department and the Victorian Order of Nurses, have each agreed to receive nurses for this month in so far as it can be arranged. Inquiry should be made at as early a date as possible to the Department of Nursing and Health that arrangements may be made with the Field Agencies. Nurses will be responsible for their own maintenance, and will receive no remuneration during this period. Nurses registering for Nursing C who have had no experience in family case-work, social service or visiting nursing, are also advised to secure this month's experience with one of the Public Health organizations if possible. For the convenience of graduate nurses already engaged in nursing, who wish to take Nursing B or C, but are unable to take a year off, provision is made that either one may be taken as a part-time course over a period of two or more years. Nurses registering in this way must fulfil the same requirements as the regular-course students. 178 Faculty of Applied Science DOUBLE COURSE FOR THE DEGREES OF B.A. AND B.A.Sc. The requirements for the first and second years are as set forth in the Calendar for the first and second years of Arts (Pages 68-71) except as follows: 1. Physics 1 or 2, Mathematics 2 (c) (Calculus) and Chemistry 1 must be taken. The passing grade for each of these subjects is fifty per cent. (See also, admission to Applied Science, Page 150.) 2. Biology 1, Chemistry 2, Mathematics 2 (a) and 2 (b), and Physics 3 or 4 may not be taken. These subjects are covered later in Applied Science. 3. A course in German is recommended (and, for those intending to enter Geological or Civil Engineering, French also). The third, four, fifth and sixth years of the double course correspond to the first, second, third and fourth years of Applied Science. The degree of B.A. is conferred on completing the fifth year of this course. COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A.Sc. 1. Candidates for the degree of Master of Applied Science must hold a B.A.Sc. degree from this University, or its equivalent. 2. A graduate of another university applying for permission to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his application an official statement of his graduation together with a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects of his course. The Faculty will determine the standing of such a student in this University. The fee for examination of certifi eates is $2.00 Courses in Applied Science 179 3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records who proceed to the Master's degree shall be required: (a.) To spend one year in resident graduate study; or (6.) (At the discretion of the Faculty concerned): (i.) To do two or more years of private work under the supervision of the University, such work to be equivalent to one year of graduate study; or (ii.) To do one year of private work under University supervision and one term of resident graduate study, the total of such work to be equivalent to one year of resident graduate study. 4. One major and one minor shall be required and a thesis must be prepared on some approved topic in the major subject. (Two typewritten copies of each thesis shall be submitted. Set special circular of "Instructions for the Preparation of Masters Theses"). The choice of and relationship between major and minor subjects, and the amount of work in each, or of tutorial work, must be approved by each of the departments concerned, by tin Committee on graduate studies, and by the Dean. 5. First or Second Class standing in History and Principles of Education and Educational Psychology of the Teacher Training Course will be accepted as equivalent to a Minor for the M.A.Sc. degree, subject in each case to the consent of the Head of the Department in which the student wishes to Major. 6. Examinations, written or oral, or both, shall be required, and a standing equivalent to at least 75 per cent, in the major subjects and 65 per cent, in the minor. 7. Application for admission as a graduate student shall be made to the Registrar by October 15th. For fees see Page 47. 180 Faculty of Applied Science EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT 1. Examinations are held in December and in April. December examinations will be held in all subjects of the First and Second Years, and are obligatory for all students of these years. December examinations in subjects of the Third and Fourth Years, excepting those subjects that are completed before Christmas, shall be optional with the Departments concerned. Applications for special consideration on account of illness or domestic affliction must be submitted to the Dean not later than two days after the close of the examination period. In cases where illness is the plea for absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be presented on the appropriate form which may be obtained from the Dean's office. 2. Candidates in order to pass must obtain at least 50 per cent, in each subject. The grades are as follgws: First Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent. But in the First and Second Years of the course in Nursing and Health the requirements for passing are the same as those for the First and Second Years in Arts and Science. (See Page 84.) 3. If a student's general standing in the final examinations of any year is sufficiently high, the Faculty may grant him supplemental examinations in the subject or subjects in which he has failed. Notice will be sent to all students to whom such examinations have been granted. 4. Supplemental examinations will be held on September 18th, 19th, 20th and 21st, and will not be granted at any other time, except by special permission of the Faculty, and on payment of a fee of $7.50 per paper. 5. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied by the necessary fees (see Schedule of Fees Page 47), must be in the hands of the Registrar at last two weeks before the date set for the examinations. 6. No student may enter a higher year with supplemental examinations still outstanding in respect of more than 4 units Examinations and Advancement 181 of the preceding year, or with any supplemental examination outstanding in respect of the work of an earlier year unless special permission to do so is granted by Faculty. Such permission will be granted only when Faculty is satisfied that the failure to remove the outstanding supplemental examinations had an adequate cause. Students in Nursing A must remove all outstanding supplemental examinations before entering their third year. 7. No student will be allowed to take any subject unless he has previously passed, or secured exemption, in all pre-requisite Bubjects. If any subject has another which is concurrent with it, both must be taken in the same session. 8. A student who is not allowed to proceed to a higher year may not register as a partial student in respect of the subjects of that higher year. But a student who is required to repeat his year may, on application in writing, be exempted by the Faculty from attending lectures and passing examinations in subjects in which he has already made at least Second Class standing. In this case he may take, in addition to the subjects of the year which he is repeating, certain subjects of the following year. 9. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to withdraw from the University. 10. Any student whose academic record, as determined by the tests and examinations of the first term of the First or Second Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to discontinue attendance at the University for the remainder of the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to the University as long as any supplemental examinations are outstanding. 11. Term essays and examination papers will be refused a passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English. 182 Faculty of Applied Science DEPARTMENTS IN APPLIED SCIENCE N.B.—The following subjects may be modified during the year as the Faculty may deem advisable. Department of Botany Professor: A. H. Hutchinson. Associate Professor: Frank Dickson. Assistant Professor: John Davidson. Assistant: Jean Davidson. Assistant: R. W. Pillsbury. Assistant: Dorothy Newton. Biology 1. Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory to more advanced work in Botany or Zoology; also to courses closely related to Biological Science, such an Agriculture, Forestry, Medicine. The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelationships of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and division of labour; life-histories; relation to environment. Text-book: Smallwood, Text-book of Biology, Lea & Febiger, 1924. The course is prerequisite to all other courses in Biology. One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per week. 2. Principles of Genetics.—The fundamentals of Genetics illustrated by the race-histories of certain plants and animals; the physical basis of heredity; variations; mutations; acquired characters; Mendel's law with suggested applications. Prerequisite: Biology 1. Text-book: Castle, Genetics and Eugenics, Harvard Press Two lectures per week. First Term. 3. General Physiology of animal and plant life processes. Open to students of Third and Fourth Years having prerequisite Biology, Chemistry and Physics; the Department should be consulted. Botany 183 Text-book: Bayliss, Principles of General Physiology, Longmans-Green. Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per week. Second Term. Botany 1. General Botany.—A course including a general survey of the several fields of Botany and introductory to more specialized courses in Botany. Prerequisite: Biology 1. Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany, Vol. I, University of Chicago Press. This course is prerequisite to all other courses in Botany, except the Evening Course. Partial credit for this course (2 units) may be obtained through the Evening Course. Two lectures and one period of two hours laboratory per week. a f \ 2. Morphology. General Morphology of plants. A comparative study of plant structures. The relationships of plant groups. Comparative life histories. Emphasis is placed upon the increasing com plexity of plant structures, from the lower to the higher forms, involving a progressive differentiation accompanied by an inter dependence of parts. Prerequisite: Botany 1. Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany, Vol. I, University of Chicago Press. Two lectures and two periods of two hours laboratory per week. First Term. 3. Plant Physiology. Prerequisite: Botany 1. Text-book: Palladin, Plant Physiology, English EditioD (Translation of 6th Russian Edition), 1918, P. Blakiston. Two lectures and two periods of two hours laboratory per week. First Term. 184 Faculty of Applied Science 4. Histology.—A study of the structure and development of plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning, staining, mounting, drawing, reconstructing. Use of microscope, camera lucida; photo-micrographic apparatus. Text-book: W. C. Stevens, Plant Anatomy, P. Blakiston. Prerequisite: Botany 1. One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 5. Systematic Botany. 5. (a) Economic Flora.—An introduction to the classification of plants through a study of selected families of economic plants of British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine and industrial arts; harmful to crops and stock. Weeds, and poisonous plants. Methods of control. Prerequisite: Botany 1. Text-books: Jepson, Economic Plants of California, Jepson, University of California. Thomas and Sifton, Poisonous Plants and Weed Seeds, University of Toronto Press. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. First term. 5. (6) Dendrology.—A study of the forest trees of Canada, the common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of the United States which are not native to Canada. Emphasis on the species of economic importance. Identification, distribution, relative importance, construction of keys. Prerequisite: Botany 1. Text-books: Morton & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada, Dominion Forestry Branch Ottawa. Sudworth, Forest Trees of the Pacific Slope, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C.; Davidson and Abercrombie, Conifers, Junipers and Yew, T. F. Unwin. One lecture and one period of two or three hours laboratory or field work per week. Botany 185 5. (c) Descriptive Taxonomy.—An advanced course dealing with the collection, preparation and classification of "flowering plants." Methods of field herbarium and laboratory work Plant description, the use of floras, preparation of keys, identification of species. Systems of classification. Nomenclature. Prerequisites: Botany 1 and 5(a). Text-books: Hitchcock, Descriptive Systematic Botany, Wiley & Sons, N.Y.; Henry, Flora of Southern British Columbia, Gage & Co., Toronto. One lecture and four hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 6. (a) General Plant Pathology. — Identification and life- histories of parasites causing plant-diseases; means of combating them. * ■ Prerequisite: Botany 1. Text-book: Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases. One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 6. (b) Forest Pathology.—Nature, identification and control of the more important tree-destroying fungi and other plant parasites of forests. Text-book: Rankin, Manual of Tree Diseases, Macmillan. One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per week during one-half of one term. 7. (a) Forest Ecology and Geography.—The inter-relationB of forests and their environment; the biological characteristics of important forest trees; forest associations; types and regions; physiography. Text-book: Hardy, The Geography of Plants, Oxford University Press. One lecture per week during one term. Field trips and laboratory work during the session amounting to thirty hours, one period per week. 186 Faculty of Applied Science Department of Chemistry Professor: R. H. Clark. Professor of Analytical Chemistry: E. H. Archibald. Associate Professor: W. F. Seyer. Associate Professor: M. J. Marshall. Assistant Professor: J. Allen Harris. Instructor: John Allardyce. Instructor: D. F. Stedman. Assistant: A. F. Gallaugher. Assistant: R. H. Ball. Assistant: H. R. Lyle Streight. Assistant: A. Ernest Morell. Assistant: E. H. Nunn. 1. General Chemistry.—This course is arranged to give a full exposition of the general principles involved in modern Chemistry and comprises a systematic study of the properties of the more important metallic and non-metallic elements and their compounds, and the application of Chemistry in technology. Text-book: Horace Byers, Inorganic Chemistry, Scribner's. Three lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per week. 2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis. (a) Qualitative Analysis.—During the first six weeks of the term an additional lecture may be substituted for a part of the laboratory work. Text-book: A. A. Noyes, Qualitative Analysis, Macmillan. Prerequisite: Chemistry 1. One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory per week. (6) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the more important methods of gravimetric and volumetric analysis. Text-book: Cumming & Kay, Quantitative Analysis, Gurney & Jackson. Prerequisite: Chemistry 1. One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory per week. Course (b) must be preceded by Course (a). Chemistry 187 3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study of the compounds of carbon will include the method of preparation and a description of the more important groups of compounds in both the fatty and the aromatic series. Chemistry 3 will also be given to those students taking Chemistry 2, or those who have had the equivalent of Chemistry 2. Text-books: Holleman-Walker, Text-book of Organic Chemistry, Wiley; Gatterman, The Practical Methods of Organic Chemistry, Macmillan. Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per week. 4. Theoretical Chemistry.—An introductory course on the development of modern Chemistry, including osmotic phenomena, the ionization theory, the law of mass action, and the phase rule. Text-book: James Walker, Introduction to Physical Chemistry, Macmillan. Prerequisite: Chemistry 2. Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per week. Second Term. \ 5. Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis. (a) Qualitative Analysis. — The work of this course will include the detection and separation of the less common metals, particularly those that are important industrially, together with the analysis of somewhat complex substances occurring in nature. One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per week. First Term. (6) Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made will include the more difficult estimations in the analysis of rocks, as well as certain constituents of steel and alloys. The principles on which analytical chemistry is based will receive a more minute consideration than was possible in the elementary course. Prerequisite: Chemistry 2. One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 188 Faculty of Applied Science 6. Industrial Chemistry. — Those industries which are dependent on the facts and principles of Chemistry will be considered in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures will be supplemented by visits to manufacturing establishments in the neighbourhood, and it is hoped that some lectures will be given by specialists in their respective fields. Prerequisite: Chemistry 2 and 3. Two lectures per week. 7. Physical Chemistry.—The lectures, which are a continuation of those given in 4, include the kinetic theory of gases, thermo-chemistry, the application of the principles of thermodynamics to chemistry, osmotic phenomena, applications of the dissociation theory, colloidal solutions, and a study of the physical properties of gases, liquids, and solids and of their chemical constitutions. Text-book: Findlay, Physico-Chemical Measurements, Longmans-Green. Reference books: Ramsay's Series of Books on Physical Chemistry, Longmans. Getman, Theoretical Chemistry, Wiley. Prerequisite: Chemistry 2, 3 and 4. Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per week. 8. Electro-Chemistry.—As in Arts. (See Page 95.) 9. Advanced Organic Chemistry. — As in Arts. (See Page 96.) 11. Physical Organic Chemistry.—As in Arts. (See Page 96.) 12. Colloid Chemistry—As in Arts. (See Page 96.) 16. Chemical Engineering. — Theory and design of fractionating columns, condensers, multiple effect evaporators; chamber, tunnel, drum, rotary and spray driers. Theory and practice of technical filtration; calculation of capacity of box Civil Engineering 189 filters, filter presses, centrifugals, etc. Principles of counter current extraction. Prerequisites: Chemistry 3 and 4. Text-book: Walker, Lewis & McAdams, Principles of Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill. Reference books: Liddell, Handbook of Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill. Robinson, Elements of Practical Distillation. McGraw-Hill. Two lectures per week during second term of Fourth Year. 17. Chemical Thermodynamics.—As in Arts. (See Page 97.) 18. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry.—As in Arts. (See Page 97.) Department of Civil Engineering Professor: Wm. E. Duckering. Associate Professor: E. G. Matheson. Assistant Professor: F. A. Wilkin. Assistant Professor: A. H. Finlay. Instructor: A. Lighthall. Instructor: A. G. Stuart. Assistant: Arthur H. Lang. 1. Descriptive Geometry.—:Geometrical drawing; orthographic, isometric and axometric projections. Text-book: Armstrong, Descriptive Geometry, second edition, Wiley. One three-hour period per week. Mr. Matheson, Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Finlay, Mr. Stuart, Mr. Lang. 2. Field Work 1.—Elementary surveying. Practical problems involving the use of the chain, telemeter, compass, transit and level. Traverses, closed circuits, contour and detail surveys. Levels for profiles, benches and contours. Work commences immediately upon the close of spring examinations, and consists of field work, eight hours per day for twenty days, or equivalent. Mr. Stuart, Mr. Wilkin. 190 Faculty of Applied Science 3. Materials of Engineering*—Manufacture and properties of iron and steel; principal alloys; considerations governing selection of materials; manufacture and properties of cements; concrete; stone and brick masonry; principal kinds of commercial timber; treating and preservation of timber; discussion of standard specifications for engineering work. Text-book: Moore, Materials of Engineering, McGraw-Hill. References: Mills, Materials of Engineering; Johnson, Materials of Construction, Wiley; Upton, Materials of Engineering, Wiley. One lecture per week. Mr. Matheson. 4. Graphical Statics. — Elementary theory of structures; composition of forces; general methods involving the force and equilibrium polygons; determination of resultants, reactions, centres of gravity, bending moments; stress in framed structures, cranes, towers, roof-trusses and bridge-trusses. Algebraic check methods will be used throughout. Text-book: Hudson and Squire, Elements of Graphic Statics, McGraw-Hill. Prerequisites: Physics 4 must either precede or accompany Civil 4. One two-hour period per week. Mr. Lighthall. 5. Mapping 1.—Draughting from notes obtained in Civil 2. Maps of telemeter, compass and transit surveys. Contour and topographical maps in convention or color. Prerequisite: Civil 2. One three-hour period per week. Mr. Stuart. 6. Surveying 1. — Chain and angular surveying; the construction, adjustment and use of the transit, level, compass, stadia, minor field instruments, planimeter, and pantograph; leveling; topography; contour surveying; stadia; railway curves; vertical curves; transition curves. Prerequisite: Civil 2. •Elective Civil Engineering 191 ■Text-book: Breed and Hosmer, Elementary Surveying, Vol. I, Wiley. References: Allen, Curves and Earthwork, McGraw-Hill; Sullivan, Spiral Tables, McGraw-Hill. Two lectures per week. Mr. Stuart. 7. Field Work 2.— (a) Railway surveys, reconnaissance, preliminary and location surveys, methods of taking topography, cross-sectioning; estimating quantities; running in easement and vertical curves, etc. The notes secured will be used in class work for mapping and for estimating quantities and costs. (6) Hydrographie surveys, topography of a section of river-bed by sounding and fixing position by transits and sextants; the three-point problem; stream-gauging by surface and deep floats and by the current meter. (c) Solar and stellar observations for latitude and azimuth; adjustments of instruments; the use of plane table, sextant and minor instruments. Prerequisite: Civil 2. Time, same as for Civil 2. Mr. Matheson, Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Lighthall. 8. Foundations and Masonry.—(a) Borings; bearing power of soils; pile and other foundations; cofferdams; caissons; open dredging; pneumatic and freezing processes; retaining walls; estimates of quantities and costs. Prerequisite: Civil 4. Text-book: Jacoby and Davis, Foundations of Bridges and Buildings, McGraw-Hill. One lecture and one three-hour period per week. First Term. Mr. Matheson. (b) Theory of Earth Pressure; combined stresses, ellipse of stress, principal and conjugate axes, as applied to the determination of earth pressures; Rankine's Coulomb's, Wey- raueh's, Cain's and Rebhann's theories and solutions for earth pressure; retaining walls; dams. 192 Faculty of Applied Science Prerequisite: Civil 4; Civil 8a must accompany 8b during the First Term. References: Ketchum, Walls, Bins and Grain Elevators; Howe, Retaining Walls for Earth; Cain, Earth Pressure, Walls and Bins; Morley, Theory of Structures. One lecture per week each term. Mr. Matheson. 9. Structural Design 1.—Problems in draughting, illustrating designs in structural engineering; estimates of quantities and costs; preparation of plans. Text-book: Conklin, Structural Draughting and Elementary Design, Wiley; Carnegie, Pocket Companion, Carnegie Steel Co. Prerequisite: First Term of Civil 10. One lecture and one three-hour period. Second Term, Mr. Matheson. 10. Strength of Materials.—A thorough introduction to the fundamental principles dealing with the strength of materials; stress, deformation, elasticity and resilience; the application of the laws of derived curves to the construction of load, shear, moment, inclination and deflection diagrams, fibre stress, deflection of simple, cantilever, and continuous beams under any loading; riveted joints; torsion; columns; combined stresses; longitudinal shear; reinforced concrete; special beams. The laboratory period includes the testing of cement, concrete, timber and steel specimens to determine the strength and elasticity of these materials. About one-half of the laboratory time will be set aside for the solution of problems in investigation and design Text-book: Maurer and Withey, Strength of Materials, Wiley. Reference: Swain, Strength of Materials, McGraw-Hill. Prerequisites: Physics 4, Civil 4 and 31. Two lectures and one three-hour period per week. Mr. Duckering, Mr. Lighthall. Note:—The laboratory testing is performed in the Forest Products Laboratories, under the supervision of Superintendent McElhanney and Mr. Lighthall. Civil Engineering 193 11. Transportation 1. Railways.—The inception of railway projects; reconnaissance, preliminary and location; grade problems; grades, curvature and distance and their effects upon operating costs and revenue; velocity and pusher1 grades; adjustment of grades for unbalanced traffic; construction; railway economics, traffic, revenue, branch lines. Prequisite: Civil 6 and 7. Text-book: Williams, Design of Railivay Location, Wiley. Reference: Allen, Railroads, Curves and Earthwork, McGraw-Hill; Wellington, Economic Theory of the Location of Railways, Wiley. Two lectures per week. Mr. Wilkin. 12. Hydraulic Engineering 1.—(a) Hydrostatics; design of standpipes, reservoirs and dams. I +Jr- (b) Hydrodynamics; fundamental principles and their application to problems on the discharge of orifices, notches and weirs; flow in pipes and open channels; practical field and laboratory measurements; examination of hydraulic developments. Prerequisite: Physics 4. f . Text-book: Russell, Hydraulics, Third Edition, Holt. One lecture and one three-hour period per week. Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Lighthall. 13. Mapping 2. — Draughting from notes obtained in Civil 7; railway location and hydrographie surveys; topographic maps from photographic plates. One three-hour period per week. Mr. Lighthall. 14. Surveying 2.—A continuation of Civil 6. (a) Theory and use of aneroid, sextant, plane-table and precise instruments; plane-table surveying; mine, hydrographie and photo- topographic surveying; Dominion and Provincial surveys. First Term. (6) Field astronomy. Second Term. Text-book: Breed and Hosmer, Surveying, Vol. II, Wiley. 194 Faculty of Applied Science References: Johnson and Smith, Theory and Practice of Surveying, Wiley; Wilson, Topographic, Trigonometric and Geodetic Surveying, Wiley; Green's Practical and Spherical Astronomy, Ginn and Co; Manual of Surveys of Dominion Lands; Instructions for B. C. Land Surveyors. Prerequisite: Civil 6. Two lectures per week. Mr. Lighthall. 15. Perspective Drawing and Map Projections.—(a) Mathematical perspective; perspective drawings of buildings and structures. First Term. (b) Map projections. Second Term. Prerequisite: Civil 1. Text-book: Crosskey, Elementary Perspective, Blackie & Son; Armstrong, Descriptive Geometry, Second Edition, Wiley. Son. 16. Field Work 3.—Problems in geodetic and precise surveying ; determination of latitude, azimuth and time by solar and stellar observations; baseline measurements; precise levelling. Prerequisite: Civil 7. Time, same as for Civil 2. Mr. Lighthall. 17. Structural Design 2. — Selection of types of bridges; determination of loadings; stresses; choice of cross-sectional forms and areas; design of combination wood and steel trusses, steel trusses; design of connections; masonry structures, dams and retaining walls; complete drawings. Text-book: Kuntz, Design of Steel Bridges, McGraw-Hill. Reference: Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure, Modem Framed Structures, Vol. Ill, Wiley; Kirkham, Structural Engineering, McGraw-Hill; Carnegie, Pocket Companion. Prerequisites: Civil 8, 9 and 10. One lecture and two three-hour periods per week. Mr. Matheson. 18. Engineering Economics.—(a) A general treatment of: sinking funds; first cost; cost analysis; salvage and scrap values; Civil Engineering 195 yearly cost of service; collecting data; estimating; economic selection, reports. Text-book: Fish, Engineering Economics, 2nd Ed., McGraw-Hill. Prerequisite: Economics 1. Two lectures per week. First Term. Mr. Wilkin. (6) Principles of financing; forms of business enterprises; stocks; bonds; operating and fixed charges; business finance; capital and interpretation of financial statements. References: Fish, Engineering Economics, Second Edition. Anger, Digest of Canadian Mercantile Law. Lough, Business Finance. Two lectures per week. Second Term. Mr. Wilkin. 19. Engineering Law.—The engineer's status; fees; salary; as a witness; responsibility; engineering contracts; tenders; specifications; plans; extras and alterations; time; payments and certificates; penalty, bonus or liquidated damages; maintenance and defects; subcontractors; agents; arbitration and awards; specification and contract writing. Text-book.- Waddell and Wait, Specifications and Contracts, McGraw-Hill. References: Anger, Digest of Canadian Mercantile Law of Canada, W. H. Anger; Ball, Law Affecting Engineers, Constable and Co. One lecture per week. Mr. Matheson. 20. Surveying 3.—Geodesy; the determination of azimuth, longitude, latitude, time, the figure of the earth; measurement of baselines; triangulation systems; adjustments and reductions of observations; precise levelling. References: Hosmer,Geodesy, Wiley; Cary, Geodetic Surveying, Wiley; Gillespie, Higher Surveying, D. Appleton and Co. Prerequisite: Civil 14. One lecture per week. Mr. Lighthall. 196 Faculty of Applied Science •21. Hydraulic Engineering 2. — Waterpower engineering; rainfall, runoff, stream flow; investigation of power problems; selection of hydraulic machines; hydrographs; auxiliary power; mass curves, load factors and characteristics; impulse and reaction wheels; methods of control and operation of various forms of machines; transmission of hydraulic power. Text-books: Gibson, Hydroelectric Engineering, Volume I, Blackie. References: Mead, Water Power Engineering, McGraw-Hill. Mead, Hydrology, McGraw-Hill. Prerequisites: Civil 12 must either precede or accompany Civil 21. One lecture per week and fifteen hours in laboratory. Second Term. Mr. Wilkin. 22. Municipal Engineering.—(a) Sewerage and Sewage Disposal. General methods and economic consideration; quantity and run-off; design of sewers, manholes, flushtanks, etc.; construction methods, materials and costs; estimate, design, maintenance and managemment. Sewage Disposal: physical, chemical, biological and economical aspects of sewage treatment; dilution; screening, sedimentation, filtration; disinfection; maintenance and management costs. First Term. References: Metealf and Eddy, Sewerage and Sewage Disposal, McGraw-Hill; Fuller and McClintock, Sewage Problems, McGraw-Hill. (b) Water Supply, Rainfall; evaporation; run-off; quantity, quality and pressure required; pumping machinery; storage; aqueducts, pipe lines and distribution systems; purification systems; valves, hydrants and fire service; materials, estimates and designs; construction methods and costs. Second Term. References: Turneaure, Public Water Supply, 3rd Edition, Wiley; Flinn, Westbrook, Bogart, Waterworks Handbook, McGraw-Hill. Civil Engineering 197 (c) Town Planning; covering the economical and artistic development of a city, city management Street cleaning and disposal of waste; composition and quantity of city wastes; collection, dumping and disposal; land treatment; incineration and reduction; costs and returns. Second Term. Reference: Lewis, City Planning, Wiley. Prerequisite: Civil 12. Two lectures and one two-hour period per week. Mr. Stuart. 23. Transportation 2. (a) Railways.—Organization and rules of maintenance-of-way; roadway; ballast; ties; lumber preservation; rails and appurtenances; turnouts, tracks, accessories ; structures and their design; stresses in track; track tools; track work; work-train service; maintenance-of-way records and accounts; expenditures; betterments; improvements of old fines, yards and terminals; maximum capacity of single track. Prerequisite: Civil 11. * Two lectures per week, First Term. Mr. Wilkin. (b) Highways.—Highway economics, surveys and locations; grades; cross-sections; paving materials; construction methods; designs and estimates. Streets and pavements; materials, design, construction, maintenance and repairs. Text-book: Agg, Construction of Roads and Pavements, McGraw-Hill. Reference: Harger and Bonney, Highway Engineer's Handbook. Prerequisite: Civil 11. Two lectures per week, Second Term. Mr. Matheson. 24. Mechanics of Materials. — A continuation of Civil 10, Strength of Materials; the application of the Principle of Least Work to the determination of statically indeterminate forces in beams and rigid frames; stress and deflection of unsymmetrical sections and beams with variable moment of inertia; analysis and design of reinforced concrete beams, slabs, columns, and reinforced concrete arches. 198 Faculty of Applied Science Text-book: Hool and Einne, Concrete Engineer's Handbook, McGraw-Hill. References: Ketchum, Steel Mill Buildings; Hool, Reinforced Concrete, Vol. Ill; Urquhart and O'Rourke, Design of Concrete Structures, McGraw-Hill Prerequisite: Civil 10. Two lectures and one three-hour period per week. Mr. Duckering. 25. Theory of Structures.—The analysis of statically determinate framed structures under dead and live loads; distortion of framed structures; the use of influence lines for analysis of stresses and deflections; hinged and hingeless arches; secondary stresses and redundant members. Text-book: Kuntz, Design of Steel Bridges, McGraw-Hill. References: Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure, Modern Framed Structures, Vols. I and II, Wiley; Hool and Kinne, Framed Structures, McGraw-Hill; Morley, Theory of Structures, Longmans Green and Co. Prerequisite: Civil 10. One lecture and two three-hour periods per week. Mr. Finlay. 26. Class Excursions. — Members of the Fourth Year class in Civil Engineering, under the supervision of an instructor, will visit such factories, industrial developments, public works, docks, shipyards, and important examples of engineering construction as are calculated to assist the student best to grasp the application and scope of the studies pursued and to broaden his vision of the engineering field. Written reports of trips are required. Note:—In periods where no trips are taken, tests of hydraulic machines will be made in Hydraulic Laboratory. (See Civil 29.) 27. Civil Engineering Thesis.—Original research on selected topics; analyses of engineering projects; experimental or the- Civil Engineering 199 oretical investigations. Topics may be selected from divisions or the Civil Engineering Course: Goedetics, Railways, Hydraulics, Municipal, Highways, Economic and Business Engineering, Structures. Copy of thesis must be filed with the department. 28. Seminar. — Written and oral discussion of articles appearing in the current Transactions and Proceedings of the various engineering societies, also reviews of important papers in engineering periodicals; reports on local engineering projects visited in Civil 26; written outlines must be prepared for all oral reports; training in technical writing and public speaking. Required of all Third and Fourth Year students in Civil Engineering. Reference: Rickard, Technical Writing, McGraw-Hill. One hour per week. 29. Hydraulic Engineering 3. — Theory, investigation and design of hydraulic motors and machinery. Turbines, Pelton and impulse wheels, centrifugal pumps, hydro-electric installations, plant design and operation. Laboratory work, testing hydraulic machines, arranged for periods when no trips are taken. (See Civil 26.) Prerequisite: Civil 12. Text-book: Dougherty, Hydraulic Turbines, Third Edition. McGraw-Hill. Reference: Gibson, Hydro-electric Engineering; Volume I, Gibson, Hydraulics and Its Application, Van Nostrand; Mead, Water Power Engineering, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill. One lecture per week. Mr. Wilkin. 30. Engineering Problems 1. — Training in methods of attacking, analyzing and solving engineering problems. Coaching in proper methods of work and study, including drill in systematic arrangement and workmanship in calculations. The content is based upon the application of mathematics to problems in physics and engineering. Prerequisite: First Year Arts. 200 Faculty of Applied Science Text-books: Duckering, Notes and Problems, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill; Swain, How to Study, McGraw-Hill. Two two-hour periods per week. Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Finlay, Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Stuart, Mr. Lang. 31. Engineering Problems 2.—A continuation of Engineering Problems 1, involving a thorough drill in problems in the principal divisions of mathematics given in the First and Second Years of Applied Science, drawn from the field of mechanics, surveying, draughting, and engineering. Prerequisite: Civil 30. Text-book: Duckering, Notes and Problems, Second Edition McGraw-Hill. One three-hour period per week. Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Wilkin. 50. Elementary problems in rural engineering, dealing with drainage, water supply, sewerage and sewage disposal, ventilation, simple structures and surveying. Adapted to the needs of students in Dairying. \^ One lecture per week. Mr. Stuart. Department of Economics Professor: Theodore H. Boggs. Associate Professor: H. F. Angus. Associate Professor: S. E. Beckett. Assistant: Doris E. Lazenby. 1. Principles of Economics. — An introductory study of general economic theory, including a survey of the principles of value, prices, money and banking, international trade, tariffs, monopoly, taxation, labour and wages, socialism, the control of railways and trusts, etc. Text-books: Fairchild, Furniss, Buck, Elementary Economics, Macmillan. The Canada Year Book, 1927. Two lectures per week. Forestry 201 Department of Forestry Professor: H. R. Christie. Assistant Professor: F. Malcolm Knapp. 1. General Forestry.—A general survey of the subject. Text-book: Fernow, Economics of Forestry, Toronto University Press. References: Whitford and Craig, Forests of British Columbia, Commission of Conservation, Ottawa. Pinchot, Primer of Forestry, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C. Moon and Brown, Elements of Forestry, Wiley, second edition. Allen, Practical Forestry in the Pacific Northwest, Western Forestry and Conservation Association, Portland. Schlich, Forest Policy in the British Empire, fourth edition, Bradbury Agnew. Zon and Sparhawk, Forest Resources of the World, McGraw- Hill. Various government publications. One lecture per week. f 2. Forest Mensuration.—Measurement of felled timber, of standing timber, and of growth of trees and forests. Includes scaling, timber estimating, and preparation of tables of volume, growth and yield. Text-book: Chapman, Forest Mensuration, Wiley, second edition. Winkenwerder and Clark, Problems in Forest Mensuration, second edition, Wiley. Reference books: Graves, Woodsman's Handbook, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C. Graves, Forest Mensuration, Wiley. Carey, Manual for Northern Woodsmen, third edition, Harvard Press. One lecture and one period of four hours' field or laboratory work per week. 3. Forest Protection.—The fire problem, legislation, organ izations, prevention and control.' Text-book: Western Fire Fighters' Manual, Western For estry and Conservation Association, Portland. 202 Faculty of Applied Science Reference books: Millar, Methods of Communication Adapted to Forest Protection, Dominion Forestry Branch, Ottawa. U. S. Forest Service, Trail Building in the National Forests, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C. One lecture per week. Second Term. 4. Forest Finance.—Forestry from the financial standpoint, including studies of compound interest, valuation, rotation, insurance and taxation. Text-book: Roth, Forest Valuation, University of Michigan, Second Edition. Reference books: Chapman, Forest Finance, Wiley. Woodward, Valuation of American Timber Lands, Wiley. Two periods of one hour each, lectures and problems, per week. Second Term. 5. Timber Physics and Wood Technology.—The structure of wood; the identification of different woods and their qualities and uses; wood seasoning; wood preservation; emphasis on the Canadian woods of commercial importance. Text-books: Record, Economic Woods of the United States, Wiley, second edition. Record, Mechanical Properties of Wood, Wiley. Reference books: Koehler, The Properties and Uses of Wood, McGraw-Hill. Koehler and Thelen, Kiln Drying of Lumber, McGraw-Hill. Snow, Wood and Other Organic Structural Materials, McGraw-Hill. Roth, Timber, U. S. Forest Service, Bui. 10, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per week. 6. Forest Organization. — The principles and methods of organizing forest areas for business management. Normal forest, increment, rotation, felling budget, working plans. Text-book: Roth, Forest Regulation, Roth, University of Michigan. Reference books: Recknagel and Bentley, Forest Management, Wiley. Recknagel, Forest Working Plans, Wiley, second Forestry 203 edition. Schlich, Forest Management, Bradbury Agnew. Woolsey, American Forest Regulation, Woolsey, New Haven. One lecture per week. 7. History of Forestry and Forest Administration. — The development of forestry in different parts of the world; forest resources and industries, policy, legislation and education. Reference books: Fernow, History of Forestry, University of Toronto Press, second edition. Schlich, Forest Policy in the British Empire, Bradbury Agnew. Boerker, Our National Forests, MacMillan. Ise, The United States Forest Policy, Yale University Press. Zon and Sparhawk, Forest Resources of the World, McGraw-Hill. Various government publications. One lecture per week. 8. Silviculture. — Principles and methods of caring for forests and growing timber crops. Text-books: Hawley, Practice of Silviculture, Wiley. Tourney, Planting and Seeding in the Practice of Forestry, Wiley. Reference books: Graves, Principles of Handling Woodlands, Wiley. Woolsey, Studies in French Forestry, Wiley. Schlich, Silviculture, Bradbury Agnew. Various government publications, k Two lectures per week during the year, and one period of three hours field or laboratory work during the second term. 9. General Lumbering.—A general study of the principles and practice of logging and milling in the chief timber regions of North America. Text-book: Bryant, Logging, Wiley, second edition. Reference books: Gibbons, Logging in the Douglas Fir Region, U. S. D. A. Bui. 711, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. Berry, Lumbering in the Sugar and Yellow Pine Region of California, U. S. D. A. Bui. 440, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. Two lectures per week, First Term. One lecture per week, Second Term. 204 Faculty of Applied Science 10. Logging.—An intensive study of logging systems and operations in the forests of western North America. Text-book: Gibbons, Logging in the Douglas Fir Region, U. S. D. A. Bui. 711, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. Reference books: Various articles in the Timberman, B. C. Lumberman and other trade journals. One lecture per week throughout the year; one period of four hours laboratory or field work per week, alternating with Forestry 11 and 12. 11. Milling.—A study of the sawmilling and allied woodworking industries of western North America. Text-book: Bryant, Lumber, Wiley. Reference books: Oakleaf, Lumber Manufacture in the Douglas Fir Region, Commercial Journal Co. Brown, American Lumber Industry, Wiley. Berry, Lumbering in the Sugar and Yellow Pine Region of California, U. S. D. A. Bui. 440, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D, C Seeley, Small Sawmills, U. S. D. A. Bui. 718, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. Two lectures per week; one period of four hours laboratory or field work per week, alternating with Forestry 10. First Term. 12. Forest Products.—A study of other forest industries, including paper and pulp, naval stores, and wood distillation. Text-book: Brown, Forest Products, Their Manufacture and Use, Wiley. Reference books: Joint Authorship, The Manufacture of Pulp and Paper, Vol. 3 to 5, McGraw-Hill. Hawley, Wood Distillation, Chemical Catalogue Co. Two lectures per week; one period of four hours laboratory or field work per week, alternating with Forestry 10. Second Term. Forest Products Laboratories of Canada 205 Vancouver Laboratory Forest Products Laboratories of Canada R. M. Brown, B.Sc.F. (Toronto), Superintendent R. S. Perry, B.Sc. (McGill), Assistant Engineer. J: H. Jenkins, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Timber Products Supervisor. J. B. Alexander, B.Cc. (New Brunswick), D.L.S., A.L.S., Timber Tests Supervisor. H. W. Eades, B.Sc.F. (Washington), Assistant Timber Pathologist. F. W. Guernsey, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Assistant in Timber Products. J. T. Lee, Timber Tester. D. S. Wright, Timber Tester. The Forest Service of the. Federal Department of the Interior maintains two Forest Products Laboratories, one at Ottawa, and the other at Vancouver, in association with. the University of British Columbia. The latter was established in 1918 in order to more adequately deal with forest products research problems of the western portion of Canada. It was equipped at first only for timber testing, as British Columbia timbers are of outstanding importance for structural purposes. The scope of the work of the laboratory has gradually extended in accordance with the requirements of the timber industry and now includes lumber seasoning ingestigations, timber decay research, etc. A most important phase of the work of the laboratory is its technical service to the timber industries in the dissemination of information on a variety of subjects, such as wood preservation, utilization of wood waste, pulp and paper, wood distillation, etc. Research in wood preservation is, at present, confined to the Ottawa Laboratory. A new co-operative laboratory has been established at McGill University through an arrangement with the Canadian Pulp & Paper Association, McGill University and the Forest Products Laboratories of Canada, which will deal with all questions relating to pulp and paper research. An increasingly valuable amount of material has been collected from the research Work of other laboratories and catalogued for reference. A mutually beneficial scheme of co-operation exists between the Laboratory and the University, whereby students of the 206 Faculty of Applied Science University in Engineering and Forestry have access to the laboratory to watch the work being carried on and to use the apparatus at times in testing strength of materials. The staff of the Laboratory also has the benefit of the University library and the advice and assistance of University specialists in related work. Department of Geology and Geography Professor: R. W. Brock. Professor of Physical and Structural Geology: S. J. Schofield. Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy: M. Y. Williams. Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrology: T. C. Phemister. Assistant: J. A. E. Kania. Geology 1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction to the science of Geology. The following subjects are treated in the lectures and laboratory: (a) Physical Geology, including: weathering, work of the wind, ground water, streams, glaciers, the ocean and its work, the structures of the earth, earthquakes, volcanoes and igneous intrusions, metamorphism, mountains and plateaus, and ore- deposits, w f Two lectures per week. First Term. Mr. Schofield. (6) Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology, including the study and identification of the most common minerals and rocks, the interpretation of topographical and geological maps, and the study of structures by the use of models. Two hours laboratory per week. First Term. Mr. Schofield. (c) Historical Geology, including the earth before the Cambrian, the Palaeozoic, the Mesozoic, the Cenozoic and Quarter- nary eras. Two lectures per week. Second Term. Mr. Williams. (d) Laboratory Exercises in Historical Geology, consisting of the general study of fossils, their characteristics and associa- ions, their evolution and migration s illustrated by their occurrence in the strata. The principles of Palaeogeography will bo Geology and Geography 207 taken up and illustrated by the study of the palaeogeography of North America. Two hours laboratory per week. Second Term. Mr. Williams. Field Work will replace laboratory occasionally, and will take the form of excursions to localities, in the immediate neighborhood of Vancouver, which illustrate the subject matter of the lectures. Prerequisite: Matriculation Chemistry or Physics, or Chemistry 1 or Physics 1, taken either before or concurrently. Text-book: Pirsson and Schuchert, Introductory Geology, Wiley. Reference books: Geikie, Text-book of Geology. Merrill, Rocks, Rock-Weathering and Soils. Coleman and Parks, Elementary Geology. Shimer, Introduction to the Study of Fossils. Davis, Geographical Essays. Hugh Miller's works. Students will be required to make a passing mark in each of the above subdivisions. 1 3 units. 2. (a) General Mineralogy.—A brief survey of the field of mineralogy. Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1) Crystallography, (2) Physical Mineralogy, and (3) Descriptive Mineralogy of 40 of the more common mineral species, with special reference to Canadian occurrences. Laboratory Work consists of the study of the common crystal forms and of 40 prescribed minerals, accompanied by a brief outline of the principles and methods of Determinative Mineralogy and Blowpipe Analysis. Text-books: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley. Prerequisite: Chemistry 1. Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per week. First Term. Mr. Phemister. 2. (b) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy. — This course supplements 2 (a) and consists of a more complete survey 208 Faculty of Applied Science of Crystallography, Physical and Chemical Mineralogy, with a critical study of about 50 of the less common minerals, special emphasis being laid on their crystallography, origin, association and alteration. Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley. Prerequisite: Geology 2 (a). Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per week. Second Term. Mr. Phemister. 3. Historical Geology .—Continental evolution and development of life, with special reference to North America. Text-book: Schuchert, Historical Geology, 2nd Ed., Wiley. Prerequisite: Geology 1. % Three lectures per week. First Term. Mr. Williams. 4. Structural and Physiographical Geology.—The following subjects are treated in the lectures: Fractures, faults, flowage, structures common to both fracture and flow, mountains, major units of structures, forces of deformation, the origin and development of land forms with special reference to the physiography of British Columbia. Text-book: Leith, Structural Geology, Holt. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Three lectures per week. Second Term. Mr. Schofield. 5. (a) History of Geology.—A brief history of the study jf the earth and the development of the geological sciences. Mr. Brock. (b) Geology of Canada.—The salient features of the geology and economic minerals of Canada. Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield, Mr. Brock. (c) Regional Geology.—The main geological features of the 3ontinents and oceanic segments of the earth's crust, and their influences upon life. Mr. Brock. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Three lectures and one laboratory period of one hour per week. Geology and Geography - 209 6. Palaeontology.—A study of invertebrate and vertebrate fossils, their classification, identification and distribution both geological and geographical. Reference books: Grabau and Shimer, North American Index Fossils. Zittel-Eastman, Text-book of Paleontology. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per week. Mr. Williams. 7. Petrology.—This course consists of systematic studies of (i) optical mineralogy, and (ii) petrography, with an introduction to petrogenesis. The laboratory work deals with the determination of rocks, first under the microscope, and then in hand specimens. Text-books: Pirsson, Rocks and Rock Minerals, Wiley. Johannsen, Essentials for the Microscopical Determination of Rock-forming Minerals and Rocks, University of Chicago Press. Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley. Reference works: Johannsen, Manual of Petrographic Methods. Rosenbusch, Microscopical Physiography of the Rock- making Minerals, translated by Iddings. Rosenbusch, Elemente der Gesteinslehre. Harker, Petrology for Students. Gruben- mann, Die Kristallinen Schiefer. Prerequisites: Geology 1 and 2. Two lectures and two laboratory periods of two hours per week. Mr. Phemister. 4 units. 8. Economic Geology.—A study of the occurrence, genesis, and structure of the principal metallic and non-metallic mineral deposits with type illustrations; and a description of the ore- deposits of the British Empire, special stress being placed on those in Canada. Text-book: Emmons, General Economic Geology, McGraw- Hill. Reference book: Lindgren, Mineral Deposits, 2nd ed. 210 Faculty of Applied Science Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 7 must precede or accompany this course. Four lectures per week. Mr. Brock, Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield, Mr. Phemister. 9. Mineralography.—Principally a laboratory course dealing with the study and recognition of the opaque minerals by means of the reflecting microscope. The work consists of practice in the cutting, grinding and polishing of ore specimens, accompanied by training in micro- chemical methods of mineral determination. During the second term each student is assigned a suite of ores from some mining district for a critical examination and report. Text-book: Davy and Farnham, Microscopic Examination of the Ore Minerals, McGraw-Hill. Prerequisite: Geology 7 and 8 must precede or accompany this course. One laboratory period of two hours per week. Mr.Phemister. 10. Field Geology. — The methods taught are the fundamental ones used by professional geologists and by the officers of the Geological Survey of Canada. The course is essentially practical, and is designed to teach methods of observing, recording and correlating geological facts in the field. The students construct geological maps of selected areas in the vicinity of Vancouver which require the use of the various methods and instruments employed in field geology. Reference books: Lahee, Field Geology. Hayes, Handbook for Field Geologists. Spurr, Geology Applied to Mining. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 4, if not already taken, must be taken concurrently. One period of three hours per week. Mr. Schofield. 14. Crystallography.—This course consists of a systematic study of the morphology of crystals, with an introduction to mathematical crystallography. Mathematics 211 The practical work deals with the measurement of crystals, and, in the case of students in chemistry, a certain number of the crystals measured will be grown in the laboratory. Students are advised to consult with the instructor before registering for this course. Text-book: Tutton, Crystallography and Practical Crystal Measurement, Macmillan. Two lectures and six hours laboratory per week. Mr. Phemister. 5 units. Department of Mathematics Professor: Daniel Buchanan. Professor: F. S. Nowlan. Associate Professor: G. E. Robinson. Associate Professor: E. E. Jordan. Associate Professor: L. Richardson. Assistant: Harold D. Smith. 1. Plane Trigonometry.—An elementary course, including the solution of triangles and the use of logarithms, inverse and hyperbolic functions. Text-books: Playne and Fawdry, Practical Trigonometry, Copp, Clark. Six-Place Tables, McGraw-Hill. Two lectures per week. Second Term. 2. Solid Geometry.—A study of the three-faced corner, the various polyhedra and solid figures, and the theorems of Pappus. Text-book: Foster, Geometry, Practical and Theoretical, (Vol. Ill Solid), Bell. Two lectures per week. First Term. 3. Algebra.—A review of simple series, permutations, combinations and the binomial theorem, and a study of exponential and other series, undetermined coefficients, partial and continued fractions, graphical algebra. Two lectures per week Text-book: Rietz and Crathorne, College Algebra, Holt. 212 Faculty of Applied Science 4. Calculus.—An introductory study of the differential and integral calculus will be made, and some of the simpler applications considered. Text-book: Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus, Ginn. Two lectures per week. 6. Calculus.—Differential and integral calculus with various applications. Text-book: Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus, Ginn. Three lectures per week. 7. Analytical Geometry.—A study of the conies and other curves occurring in engineering practice, and elementary work in three dimensions. Text-book: Fawdry, Co-ordinate Geometry, Bell. Two lectures per week. 8. Applied Calculus. — The applications of calculus to various problems in engineering. Two lectures per week. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 9. Differential Equations.—A study of ordinary and partial differential equations and their applications. Two lectures per week. (Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering Professor: Herbert Vickers. Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering: F. W. Vernon. Assistant Professor of Mechanical Engineering: H. F. G. Letson. Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering: Leonard B. Stacey. Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering: G. Sinclair Smith. Instructor in Mechanical Engineering: John F. Bell. Assistant in Drawing: H. P. Archibald. Mechanical Engineering 1. Mechanical Drawing.—Practice in freehand lettering in accordance with common practice. Geometrical Drawing, to give facility in the use of drawing instruments. Freehand sketching Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 213 of machine parts and structures from which drawings are made to scale. Drawing to scale of simple machine parts. Making of assembly drawings from detail drawings, and detail drawings from assembly drawings. Tracing and blueprinting. Two three-hour periods per week. 2. (a) SJwp Work.—This work is intended to supplement the manual training given in the high schools, and also to give the student some knowledge of the more common machine shop methods and processes as employed commercially. The object is to provide some basis for the intelligent design of machines and structural parts. Lectures.—Physical properties of the materials used in machine construction. Modern methods of handling and finishing wood. Forging and hammering of metals. Annealing and tempering. Making of patterns and cores. Cupola practice. Soldering and brazing, tinning, electroplating. Drilling and tapping, turning and boring, calipering and fitting, milling and milling cutters, reaming and reamers, screw cutting. Grinding and abrasive wheels. Lapping. Punching and shearing. Drop forging and die-casting. Metal spinning. Torch and electric welding. Cold sawing and torch cutting. Tool-making and dressing. Use of jigs. Machine shop standards, including wire and sheet metal gauges, threads, etc. Text-book: Colvin & Stanley, American Machinists' Handbook, McGraw-Hill. One lecture per week. Practice in Metal-working.—Bench work, including marking off, chipping, filing, scraping, tapping, and fitting; lathe work, including turning and boring, screw-cutting and finishing; lathe adjustments; shaping; milling; gear-cutting; tool-dressing. One two-hour period per week. 2. (b) Machine Shop Practice.—A continuation of Mechanical Engineering 2. Five hours laboratory per week First Term, and three hours Second Term. 214 Faculty of Applied Science 3. Kinematics of Machines. — Displacement, velocity and acceleration. Relative motions. Harmonic motions. Gear trains. Cams, ratchets, and escapements. Classification of mechanisms. Study of mechanisms in common use. Transmission of motion by belting. Design of outlines of gear teeth. Text-book: Durley, Kinematics of Machines, Wiley. Reference book: McKay, Kinematics of Machines, Longman Green. One two-hour period per week. 4. Dynamics of Machines.—Friction and lubrication. Transmission of power by belts, ropes, gears and friction clutches. Function and dynamics of speed governors. Dynamics of the screw. Forces involved in linear and angular acceleration of moving parts, with special reference to engines, turbines, and pumps. Stresses due to centrifugal force. Balancing of moving parts. Dynamics of the gyroscope. Reference books: Low, Applied Mechanics. Dent & Harper, Kinematics and Kinetics of Machinery, Wiley. Two lectures per week. 5. Machine Design.—Strength of materials used in machine construction. Factors of safety and allowable stresses under various conditions of load. Design of: Valve mechanisms for steam engines; governors; thin cylinders and tanks; rivetted joints; fastenings, such as bolts, screws and cotters; levers and winch handles. Reference books: Spooner, Machine Design, Construction and Drawing, Longmans Green. Dalby, Valves and Valve Gears, Arnold. Two lectures and one three-hour period per week. 6. Elementary Thermodynamics.—(a) Fuels and combustion. General principles underlying the construction and operation of steam boilers. Elementary theory of the steam engine. Measurement of power. Performance of various types of steam engines. Elementary theory of internal combustion engines. Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 215 Design and operation of isolated power plants to give the best economic results. Theory of air compressors, transmission and use of compressed air. Elementary theory and practical operation of producer gas plants. Text-books: Inchley's Heat Engines, Longmans Green; or Allen & Bursley, Heat Engines, McGraw-Hill. Reference books: Ewing, Thermodynamics, Cambridge Press. Callendar, Steam Power, Longman's Green. Simmons, Compressed Air, McGraw-Hill. Marks and Davis, Steam Tables and Diagrams, Longman's Green. Gebhardt, Steam Power Plant Engineering, Wiley. Kent, Mechanical Engineer's Pocket Book, Wiley. Fernald & Orrok, Engineering of Power Plants, McGraw-Hill. Two lectures per week. (6) Laboratory.—Testing of boilers, steam engines and internal combustion engines. Analysis and calorimetry of fuels. One three-hour laboratory period per week. 7. Thermodynamics. — A more precise study of the performances and construction of various types of boilers, including furnaces and superheaters. Theoretical efficiency of different types of reciprocating engines working under various conditions. Influence on efficiency of size, speed and ratio of expansion with variations of load. Compound and triple expansion engines. Use of steam tables in reference to calculations on saturated and superheated steam. Flow of gases and vapours through orifices and nozzles. Text-book: Low, Heat Engines, Longman's Green. Reference books: Ewing, Thermodynamics, Cambridge Press. Callendar, Steam Power, Longman's Green. Lucke, Thermodynamics, McGraw-Hill, and as under Mechanical 6. Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory period per week. 8. Thermodynamics. — Advanced theory relative to the transformation of heat into mechanical energy. Laws governing 216 Faculty of Applied Science the flow of heat through various substances. More precise study of the theory and performance of all types of prime movers, including all types of reciprocating and rotary steam engines, steam turbines, and internal combustion engines. Text-book: Low, Heat Engines, Longman's Green. Reference book: Ewing, Thermodynamics, Cambridge Press. Two lectures and one three-hour period per week. 9. Thermodynamics.—For Mechanical Engineering students only. Text-book: Low, Heat Engines, Longman's Green. Laboratory text-book: Moyer, Power Plant Testing, McGraw-Hill. Reference book: Ewing, Thermodynamics, Cambridge Press. Two lectures and one six-hour laboratory per week. 10. Machine Design.—The design of machine and structural parts, including parts of engines of all types; design of appliances for the transmission of power, including belts, rope, cable, friction and toothed gearing. The student is required to work out the complete design of some machine or appliance, and make the drawings and tracings requisite for its construction. Text-book: Spooner, Machine Design, Longmans Green. Two lectures and one five-hour laboratory per week for Mechanical Engineering, and two lectures and one three-hour laboratory for Electrical Engineering. 11. Heating, Ventilation, and Refrigeration.—Design of steam, hot water, and hot air systems of heating. Heaters for steam and water systems. Use of exhaust steam for heating. Central heating plants. Loss of heat from buildings. Refrigerating systems. Reference book: Harding & Willard, Mechanical Equipment of Buildings (Vols. I and II), Wiley. One lecture per week. 12. Design of Power Plants.—A study of the function, construction, and performance of the various machines and appli- Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 217 ances which enter into the design of industrial plants. Special attention is given to the economic results to be expected from various combinations. Reference books: Harding & Willard, Mechanical Equipment of Buildings (Vols. I and II), Wiley. Fernald & Orrok, Engineering of Power Plants, McGraw-Hill. One lecture per week. 13. Physical Treatment of Metals.—A study of the various metals used in commercial work, with special reference to the treatment applied to get the physical properties and qualities required for specific purposes. Text-book: Colvin & Juthe, The Working of Steel, McGraw- Hill. One lecture and one three-hour laboratory per week. 14. Mechanical Design of Electrical Machines. Electrical Engineering 1. Theory and Operation of Electrical Machines.—A practical course for students not specializing in Electrical or Mechanical Engineering. Units: Absolute electrostatic and electromagnetic, practical units, conversion factors. Magnetic Circuit: Unit magnetic pole, field, intensity, induction; flux, magnetomotive force, reluctance, permeability, potential, B-H curves, hysteresis. Electric Circuit: Unit quantity, current and current density, electromotive force, Ohms Law, Joules Law, Kirchhoff's Laws, resistivity and specific resistance, conductivity and conductance; induction, self and mutual. Direct Current Machines: The dynamo, motor and generator; Emf. equation; armature, simple lap and wave; excitation; characteristic curves of series, shunt, separately and compound excited generators and motors; armature reaction; commutation; efficiency, rating and heating; types of motors suited to various classes of service; boosters; balancers for three wire systems; parallel operation of generators. 218 Faculty of Applied Science Alternating Current: The production of simple alternating electromotive forces and currents; wave form; form factor; frequency; maximum, average, and root-mean-square values; effect of induction and capacity on the properties of alternating current circuits; vector diagrams; measurement of power; power factor; polyphase circuits; Y and Delta connections. Alternating Current Machines—Alternator: Emf. equation; armature winding: magneto-motive forces and fluxes; armature reaction; leakage reactance; regulation; efficiency. Synchronous Motor: Principle; vector diagram; output; power factor; synchronizing; hunting; parallel operation of alternators. Transformer: Constant potential1 vector diagrams; leakage reactance; constant current; losses; efficiency; connections; phase transformation; auto and booster transformers. Induction Motor: Revolving field; slip; characteristics; circle diagram; variable speed; wound rotor induction motor; choice of type; starting. Rotary Converters: Description of operation. Transmission of Electrical Energy: Comparison of cost of transmission with different number of phases; instrument transformers. \ The above course is designed to introduce to the students the principal factors in electrical machinery; only enough theory being given to explain intelligently the operating characteristics of the apparatus studied. Text-books: Gray, Principles and Practice of Electrical Engineering, McGraw-Hill. Maclean, Electrical Laboratory Course for Junior Students, Blackie & Sons. Prerequisite: Physics 3. Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per week. 2. Elementary Electrical Engineering.—Units-' Absolute, electrostatic, electromagnetic and practical units. Electromagnetism'- Permeability; flux-density; magnetomotive force; magnetic reluctance; calculation of pull of electromagnets ; inductance, self and mutual. Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 219 Commercial Current and Voltage Measuring Instruments' Requirements of good measuring instruments, amperemeters and voltmeters; construction and moving-coil; hot-wire; electrostatic and induction-type measuring instruments. Secondary Batteries-' Theory; use and application. Armature Winding-' Theory of lap and wave windings; use of equalizing connections; characteristics of series, shunt and compound wound motors; characteristics of shunt and compound wound generators; commutation, and armature reaction in direct current machines. Elementary Theory of Alternating Currents: The production of simple alternating electromotive forces and currents; wave form, frequency, crest and RMS valves; Cartesian and Polar diagrams; effect of self induction and capacity on the properties of alternating current circuits; measurement of power in A.C. circuits; polyphase circuits, balanced and unbalanced systems; star and mesh connections; vector treatment. Elementary Theory of the Transformer. Automatic Reversible Battery Boosters. Testing of apparatus studied. Wave Form Indicators: The Oscillograph, Joubert's contact, the Ondograph. Insulation: Characteristics of various types, switches and fuses. Illumination and Photometry: Arc Lamps, Incandescent Lamps, Street Illumination, etc. Text-books: MacCall, Electrical Engineering Continuous Currents, University Tutorial Press Ltd. Lawrence, Alternating Currents, McGraw-Hill. MacCall, Electrical Engineering Alternating Currents, University Tutorial Press Ltd. Smith, Testing Dynamos and Motors, Scientific Publishing Co. Smith, Practical Alternating Currents, Scientific Publishing Co. Maclean, Electrical Laboratory Course for Junior Students, Blackie & Sons. Bennett & Crothers, Electro-Dynamics, McGraw-Hill. 220 Faculty of Applied Science For Third Year Electrical and Mechanical students only. Prerequisite: Physics 3. Three lectures and one laboratory period of four hours per week. 3. Electrical Engineering. — Direct Current Machines: Separation of losses by various methods; back to back methods of testing efficiency; parallel operation; review of armature reaction and the compensating thereof; further study of commutation. Alternating Current Machines: The Alternator; Induced Electromotive force, Armature winding, Magnetomotive forces and fluxes concerned in the Alternator, Armature Raection, Armature leakage reactance, Armature effective Resistance, Regulation, Methods of predeterminating Regulation and the vector diagrams thereof, Losses, Efficiency. Static Transformers: Types of Transformers, The Ideal Transformer, True equivalent circuit of a Transformer, Approximate equivalent circuit of a transformer, Calculation of Magnetizing current and inphase current supplying Core losses, Calculation of leakage reactance, Solution of the vector diagram and Calculation of Regulation, Losses in a Transformer—Eddy Current Loss—Hysteresis Loss—Copper Loss, Calculation of Efficiency, Ratio Test, Polarity Test, Short Circuit Test. Calculation of Regulation from the short circuit Test, Regulation by loading, Sumpner efficiency Test, Separation of Hysteresis and Eddy Current loss Test, Current Transformer, Potential Transformer, Constant Current Transformer, Auto-Transformer Induction Regulator, Parallel operation of Transformers, Transformer Connections, Phase Transformation. Synchronous Motors: General characteristics, Power factor, V Curves, Methods of starting, Explanation of the operation of a Synchronous Motor, Hunting, Damping, Stability, Circle diagram of the Synchronous Motor, Losses and Efficiency, Parallel operation of Alternators. Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 221 Synchronous Converters: Voltage Ratio and current relations, Armature heating and resistance and the effect thereof of change in power factor. Polyphase Induction Motors: Revolving field, slip, Transformer properties of an Induction Motor, True and approximate equivalent circuit of an induction motor, Load equivalent to a non inductive resistance, Circle diagram, Characteristic Curves, Methods of starting Induction Motors, Speed Control. Transmission of Electrical Energy: A brief treatment dealing with the economy of conducting material for different num ber of phases. Text-books: Smith, Practical Alternating Currents, Scientific Publishing Co. Lawrence, Principles of Alternating Current Machinery, McGraw-Hill. For Fourth Year Mechanical students only. Prerequisite: Electrical 2. Two lectures and one laboratory period of three hours per week. 4. Electrical Machinery. Theory of the Transformer. Core and Shell types. Vector diagrams. Magnetizing current, Regulation, Current Rush on suddenly switching on. Systems of Connection. Methods of Cooling. Testing. The Alternator. Salient and non-salient pole types. Alternator windings. EMF equation. Breadth factor, Form Factor, Coil-span Factor. Method of obtaining pure sine wave form. Regulation. Calculation of Regulation. Synchronous Impedance. Short Circuit Currents. Method of Calculating excitation on loads of various power factors. Synchronizing of alternators. Synchroscopes. Parallel Operation of Alternators. The Synchronous Motor. Single and Polyphase Types Vector diagram. Variation of power factor with excitation. Calculation of excitation necessary for power factor improvement. Damping windings. Hunting and its cure. Methods of Starting. 222 Faculty of Applied Science The Induction Motor. Windings. Production of Rotating field, Circle diagram. Slip, torque and other characteristics. Squirrel Cage and Slip Ring Types. Effect of rotor resistance. Torque slip curves. Starting methods of Squirrel cage machines. Calculation of steps of starting resistances for wound rotor machines. Crawling of Induction motors. Leakage fluxes in Induction motors. Pole changing. Cascade Connection and its characteristics. Speed Control by rotor resistance, by change of frequency, by use of AC commutating motors. Hunt Cascade motor. Efficiency Tests. Stroboscopic method of slip measurement. Single Phase Induction Motor Theory. The Rotary Converter. EMF and current relations. Heating of Rotaries. Methods of Changing voltage ratios. Starting and Synchronizing. The Three Phase Commutator Motor. Shunt and Series Types. Vector diagrams and characteristics. Text-books: McCall, Alternating Currents, University Tutorial Press. Lawrence, Alternating Currents, McGraw-Hill. Steinmetz, Theory and Calculation of Electric Apparatus, McGraw-Hill. H. Vickers, The Induction Motor, Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons. Two lectures and one laboratory period of six hours per week. 5. Electric Traction.—Electric Railways: advantages and disadvantages of various systems. Low tension DC and high tension DC. High tension systems. Speed-time curves and their estimation. Estimation of power required for electric trains. Train Resistance. Series Traction Motors DC and AC and their complete theory and characteristics. Control and Control Systems. Equipment and Rolling Stock. Regenerative Braking. Overhead construction and rail construction. Feeder systems and their design. Sub-station Equipment. Text-books: A. T. Dover, Electric Traction, Sir Isaac Pit- Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 223 man & Sons. F. W. Carter, Electric Traction, Chapman & Hall. Harding, Electric Traction, McGraw-Hill. One lecture per week. 6. Electric Power Plants and Transmission Lines. — Comparison of amounts of Copper for Various Systems. Choice of Site and type of machinery. Load Factor and diversity factor. Inductance and Capacity Calculations. Voltage drops on Single Phase and Three phase lines. Charging currents. Voltage rises on AC systems. Automatic Protective Switch-gear. Lightning Arresters. Kelvin's Law. Design of Feeders. Voltage drops in feeders and cables. Conductors and disributing networks; loss of potential in networks. Voltage control. Tirrill Regulator. Economics of hydro-electric development. Design of E.H.T. feeders. Suspension Type Insulators and other types. Mechanical design of line and towers. Corona. Losses due to Corona. Laws of Corona. Voltage and Power Factor Control of Transmission lines. Lowe, Electric Power Transmission, McGraw-Hill. Text-book: Still, Overhead Power Transmission, McGraw- Hill. Two lectures per week. One lecture per week. 7. Electrical Design.—Design of DC generators and motors. Induction motors. Salient and non-salient Pole Alternators. Rotary Converters. Transformers. Text-books: Slichter, Design of Electrical Machinery, Wiley & Sons. Miles Walker, Specification and Design of Electrical Machinery, Longmanns, Green & Co. Gray, Design of Electrical Machinery, McGraw-Hill. H. Vickers, The Induction Motor, Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons. Whittaker, The Rotary Converter, Benn Bros. One lecture per week. 8. Radio, Telegraphy and Telephony. — Open and closed oscillators. Resonance. Coupled Circuits. Forced and free vibrations. Waves on coils and wires. 224 Faculty of Applied Science Antennae and Earth Connections. Propagation of waves over the earth's surface. Generation of Oscillations. Spark. Arc. High-frequency Alternator. Frequency Changers and Ionic Valves. Methods of Detection. Valve Circuits, beat reception, relaying, amplifying, with special attention to work on Ionic Valves. Wireless Telephony. Microphones: Various Types. Transmitting Circuits. Receiving Circuits. Tuning. Direction Finding. Latest work on above. Interference and its prevention. Short Wave Work with Beam Systems. Text-book: Eceles, Continuous Wave Telegraphy and Telephony, Van Nostrand. Lauer & Brown, Radiotelegraphy and Telephony, McGraw-Hill. Morecroft, Principles of Radio Communication, Wiley & Sons. One lecture per week. Department of Mining and Metallurgy Professor of Mining: J. M. Turnbull. Professor of Metallurgy: H. N. Thomson. Associate Professor of Mining: Geo. A. Gillies. Assistant in Metallurgy: W. B. Bishop. Mining 1. Metal Mining.—An introductory course in metal mining, covering the following subjects: Ores and economic minerals; economic basis of mining; ordinary prospecting; mineral belts; conditions in British Columbia; preliminary development of mines; timbering and framing; tunnelling; shaft sinking; transportation and haulage; drainage; ventilation. Two lectures per week. Mr. Turnbull. 2. Coal and Placer Mining.—A general course in coal and placer mining, covering the following subjects: (a) Classification of coals; prospecting; mine development; mining methods; ventilation; transportation and haulage; drainage ; tipples; coal mines acts and laws. Mining and Metallurgy 225 (6) Gravel deposits; nature and origin of paystreaks; prospecting; examination and testing of deposits; ordinary mining methods; hydraulic and dredging methods; plant and equipment; placer mines acts and laws. Two lectures per week. Mr. Turnbull. 3. Metal Mining. — An advanced course in metal mining, covering the following subjects: Scientific prospecting; development work in mines; mining methods; blasting and explosives; examination of mines and prospects; methods of ore sampling; mine valuation; accounting and costs, administration; welfare and safety work; mining laws and contracts; economics; ethics. ^^ Prerequisite: Mining 1. Two lectures per week. Mr. Turnbull. 4. Mining Machinery.—A special course covering the structural and mechanical features of Mining Engineering, as follows: Mine structures; mining plant and machinery; core and churn drills; tramways, etc. Prerequisites: Mining 1; Mechanical Engineering 3, 6; Civil Engineering 3 and 10. Two lectures per week. Mr. Gillies. 5. Mine Surveying.—A practical course covering the work of the surveyor and staff in metal mines: Methods and practice in mine surveying; geological work underground; maps, plans and models; notes and records. Prerequisites: Civil Engineering 2 and 6. One lecture per week. First Term. Mr. Turnbull. 6. Mining Design.—A laboratory draughting course covering the special requirements of Mining students in regard to design of the layout and details of mining plant, structures, and mine survey plans. One three-hour period per week. Mr. Gillies. 226 Faculty of Applied Science 7. Mining Methods.—A special course covering the mining of large ore bodies by special mining methods. Prerequisite: Mining 1. Concurrent Courses: Mining 2, 3 and 4. One lecture per week. Second Term. Mr. Turnbull. Metallurgy 1. General Metallurgy.—This course covers the fundamental principles underlying metallurgical operations in general, and is introductory to subsequent more specialized study. The lectures follow in general the subject as taken up in Principles of Metallurgy, by Chas. H. Fulton, including the following main subjects: Physical mixtures and thermal analysis. Physical properties of metals. Alloys. Measurement of high temperatures. Typical metallurgical operations. Roasting and fusing. Electrometallurgy. Slags. Matte. Bullion. Refractory materials. Fuels. Combustion. Furnaces. Text-book: Fulton, Principles of Metallurgy, McGraw-Hill. Reference books: Hofman, General Metallurgy, McGraw- Hill. Current Mining and Metallurgical Journals. Trade Catalogues. Prerequisites: Chemistry 1 and Physics 1 and 2. Two lectures per week. Mr. Thomson. 2. Smelting and Leaching.—A general course covering principles and practice of Pyrometallurgy and Hydrometallurgy as applied to gold, silver, copper, iron, lead and zinc. Prerequisite: Metallurgy 1. Two lectures per week. Mr. Thomson. 3. Metallurgical Calculations.—A special course covering Thermochemistry; Metallurgical Calculations; Furnace Design and Efficiency; Special Processes. A large portion of the time will be given to the study of heat balances of typical smelting operations. Mining and Metallurgy 227 Reference book: Richards, Metallurgical Calculations. Prerequisites: Metallurgy 1, Chemistry 1. Two hours per week. Mr. Thomson. 4. Metallurgical Analysis.—Advanced course in Metallurgical Analysis of Ores and Furnace Products, Pyrometry and Refractories. Special attention will be given to analytical methods used by smelting plants in purchase of ores and control of furnace operations. Prerequisites: Metallurgy 1, Metallurgy 6. Six hours laboratory per week, First Term. Twelve hours laboratory per week, Second Term. Mr. Thomson. 5. Fire Assaying.—Quantitative determination of gold, silver, and other metals by fire-assay methods, with underlying principles. Text-book: Bugbee, Fire Assaying, Wiley. One lecture and one five-hour laboratory period per week. First Term. Mr. Thomson. 6. Wet Assaying.—An introductory course in metallurgical analysis of ores and concentrates. Most of the time will be given to the technical determination of zinc, copper and lead. One three-hour laboratory period per week. Mr. Thomson. Ore Dressing 1. Ore Dressing.—A general course covering the concentration of ores by mechanical means. Most of the time is spent in considering fundamental principles, typical machines, and their general operations and relations in modern milling practice, emphasizing the economic and practical aspects. Students are taught the commercial and technical characteristics of true concentrating ores, the general principles on which the size, character, site, and other features of a mill are designed. 228 Faculty of Applied Science The general lay-out of crushing, handling, and separating machinery. The laws of crushing and of various classifying and separating actions, and the design, operation, and comparative efficiency of typical machines, such as crushers, rolls, stamps, ball and tube mills, jigs, tables, screens, classifiers, and slime- handling devices. Attention is paid to pneumatic, magnetic, electrostatic, flotation, and other special processes, including coal-washing. Text-books: F. Taggart, A Manual of Flotation Processes, Wiley. Reference Books: S. J. Truscott, Text-book of Ore Dressing. Richards and Locke, Text-book of Ore Dressing. Two lectures per week. Mr. Gillies. 2. Ore Dressing Laboratory.—A variety of crushing, sizing, classifying and separating operations are carried out by the students and studied quantitatively on appropriate machines, singly and in combination. Special attention is paid to flotation processes, several types of machines being used. Ores from British Columbia mines are usually chosen, so that the work of the students is along practical lines in comparison with actual work in operating plants. Prerequisite: Ore Dressing 1. Nine hours laboratory per week. Mr. Gillies. Note:—All students in Mining and Metallurgy are advised to provide themselves with a copy of Peele's Mining Engineer's Handbook (Wiley), which is used for reference in many of the courses in which no special textbook is required. Department of Physics Professor: T. C. Hebb. Associate Professor: A. E. Hennings. Associate Professor: J. G. Davidson. Assistant Professor: G. M. Shrum. Assistant: H. W. Fowler. The instruction includes lectures on the general principles of Physics, accompanied by courses of practical work in the laboratory. Physics 229 1. Mechanics 1.—An elementary treatment of the subject of statics, dynamics, and hydrostatics, with particular emphasis on the working of problems. The course is given in the first half of the First Year of Applied Science. Text-books: Loney, Mechanics and Hydrostatics, Cambridge University Press. Millikan, Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat, Ginn. Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory period per week. 2. Advanced Heat.—This course is begun when Mechanics 1 is finished, and the six hours devoted to it are divided in the same manner. The course is based on the supposition that the student is already familiar with the elementary principles of heat. Text-books: Edser, Heat for Advanced Students, Macmillan. Millikan, Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat, Ginn. 3. Electricity and Magnetism.—A quantitative study of the fundamental principles of electricity and magnetism, with a special reference to the fact that the student is to be an engineer. The course includes a short treatment of the elements of alternating currents. Text-books: Millikan and Mills, Electricity, Sound and Light (first part), Ginn. Smith, Electrical Measurements, McGraw-Hill. Two lectures and one three-hour laboratory period per week. 4. Mechanics 2.—The subject-matter consists of an extension of the statics and dynamics of Mechanics 1, but with the use of the differential and integral calculus. Prerequisite: Mechanics 1. Text-book: Poorman, Applied Mechanics, McGraw-Hill. Two lectures per week. 5. Light. — A short lecture course on light for students taking Chemical Engineering. The time will be devoted to a 230 Faculty of Applied Science study of refraction, dispersion, interference, diffraction, double- refraction, polarization and spectroscopy. One hour per week. 9. Recent Advances in Physics.—A course of lectures dealing with the electrical properties of gases, the electron theory, and radioactivity. Prerequisites: Physics 3 and 4, and Mathematics 10. Reference books: Thomson, Conductivity of Electricity Through Gases, Cambridge University Press, Second Edition. Rutherford, Radio-active Substances and Their Radiations, Cambridge University Press. Millikan. Electron, University of Chicago Press, Second Edition. Thomson, Positive Rays, Longman's. Hughes, Photo-electricity, Cambridge University Press, X-Rays, Longman's. Department of Nursing and Health Professor: Hibbert Winslow Hill. Assistant Professor: Mabel F. Gray. Part-time Lecturers: A Miss Elizabeth Gertrude Breeze, R. N. Miss Margaret Duffleld, Cert.P.H.N. (University of Toronto). Miss Laura Halland, P.H.N. John Ewart Campbell, B.A., M.D., C.M. (McGill). Ralph Elswood Coleman, M.B. (Toronto). William A. Dobson, M.D. (Jefferson Medical College). Mrs. Isabelle M. Gibb, R.N. Miss Laura B. Timmins, R.N., Cert.P.H.N. (British Columbia). Miss Ruby Adeline Kerr. Frank Cornwall McTavish, M.B. (Toronto), L.S.A. (London), M.R.C.S. (England), L.R.C.P. (London). Robert Lester Pallen, D.M.D. (North Pacific College of Dentistry). Alfred Howard Spohn, M.B. (Toronto). Frederic Theodore Underhill, L.R.C.P. & S., L.M., and F.R.C.S. (Edinburgh), D.P.H. (Edinburgh and Glasgow), F.R.S.I. London), F.R.I.P.H. Charles Harvey Vrooman, M.D., C.M. (Manitoba). Harold White, M.D. (McGill), L.M.C.C. Henry Esson Young, B.A. (Queen's), M.D., CM., (McGill), LL.D. (Toronto), LL.D. (McGill), LL.D. (British Columbia), L.M.C.C. Nursing and Health 231 Subjects of Nursing A (Five-year Undergraduate Course) 1. Introduction to Nursing.—A series of lectures dealing with the nature of hospital service and discipline, designed to prepare stuflents for entrance to Schools of Nursing. No formal credit is given for this course, but attendance is compulsory. One hour per week, First Year. Miss Gray. 2. History of Nursing.—A series of lectures dealing with the origin and history of nursing. One hour a week, Second Year. Miss Gray. 3. Anatomy and Physiology.—A study of the structure and function of the normal human body as the basis for the study of all pathological conditions, as well as for the study of hygiene. Two hours a week, Second Year. Miss Gray. Nursing B (Public Health Nursing) Preventive Medicine in the Public Health Nursing Programme 1. Preventable Diseases. — Brief sketches of the more important of the preventable diseases; immunology; vaccine therapy. One hour a week. Both Terms. Dr. Hill. 2. Epidemiology.—Principles and practice in the control of disease. One hour a week. Both Terms. Dr. Hill. 3. Tuberculosis.—A study of tuberculosis, its prevention and cure. Eleven lectures. Dr. Vrooman. 4. Venereal Diseases.—The care and control of venereal diseases. Three lectures. Dr .Campbell. 5. Mental Hygiene.—An introduction, with clinical demonstrations, to the study of mental illness, its cure and prevention. Eleven lectures. Dr. Dobson. 232 Faculty of Applied Science 6. Bacteriology.—A short laboratory course to familiarize students with the practical application of laboratory technique in Public Health measures. Hours to be arranged. Miss Wilson. Child Welfare 7. Infant Welfare.—A series of lectures and clinics dealing with pre-natal care, and the normal development of the infant; also dealing with the disorders of infancy, their prevention and cure. Eleven hours. Dr. Spohn. 8. Orthopedics.—A series of lectures dealing with the problem of children handicapped by deformities, with emphasis upon the importance of early recognition of deformities and their prevention and cure. Five hours. Dr. McTavish. Public Health, Hygiene and Sanitation Public Health, Hygiene and Sanitation. 9. Public Health.—A series of lectures covering the fields of general hygiene and sanitation. One hour a week. Fifteen lectures. Dr. Hill. 10. Public Health Administration.—A study of the official relation of the Public Health Nurse to the Departments of Health. Four lectures. Dr. Underhill, Dr. Young. 11. Public Health Organizations.—A series of single lectures dealing with special aspects of their work. (a) Diagnostic Clinics for Tuberculosis. Dr. Lamb. (b) The Hospital's Relation to the Community Health Programme. Dr. Bell. (c) The Rotary Clinic. Dr. Rawlings. (d) The Workmen's Compensation Act. Dr. Bastin. Nursing and Health 233 12. Vital Statistics.—The general principles governing the collection and arrangement of statistical facts, and their application in Public Health Nursing. One hour a week. Eighteen lectures. Dr. Hill. Nursing 13. Principles and Practice of Public Health Nursing.— A study of the principles and practice of public health nursing. One hour a week. Both Terms. Miss Gray. Text-book: Gardner, Public Health Nursing, Macmillan. 14. Rural Public Health Nursing.—A study of the principles and practice of public health nursing in rural communities. Six hours. Mrs Gibb. 15. Urban Visiting Nursing Programme. Two lectures. Miss Duffield. 16. Health Education.—A consideration of the material to be presented in the teaching of personal hygiene and home nursing, and the method of presentation. Two hours a week. Second Term. Miss Gray. 17. History of Nursing and Contemporary Nursing Problems.—A study of the origin and history of nursing, followed by the consideration of recent developments in the nursing field. Eleven lectures. Miss Gray. 18. Teaching in Schools of Nursing.—A study of the Curriculum; the selection of subjects, and content of each, and methods of presentation. One lecture a week. Both Terms. Miss Gray. 19. Principles of Supervision in Schools of Nursing.—A study of the organization of the School of Nursing, its relation to the various departments of the Hospital; and the problems of training and record keeping. One lecture a week. Both Terms. Miss Gray. 234 Faculty of Applied Science 20. School Hygiene.—A series of twelve lectures given by members of the staff of the Medical Departmnt of the Vancouver School Board, dealing with the specific problems of this division of Public Health. One hour a week. First Term. Miss Breeze, Miss Kerr, Dr. Pallen, Dr. White. 21. Hospital Social Service.—A presentation of the principles underlying Medical Social Service. Three lectures. Miss Johnston. 22. Metabolism and Nutrition. Eleven lectures. Dr. Coleman. 23. Psychology for Nurses. Two hours a week. Second Term. Dr. Wyman. 24. Principles of Education Applied to Teaching. Two hours a week. Both Terms. Dr. Weir. 25. Public Speaking and Parliamentary Procedure.—Principles and practice, fitting students for giving addresses and conducting meetings. One hour a week. Eighteen hours. Dr. Hill. 26. Sociology.—The nature of Sociology as a study; environment; influence of technology and other conditions on social development, etc.; social pathology. One hour a week. Both Terms. Mr. Beckett. Text-book: Beach, Introduction to Sociology, Houghton- Mifflin. 27. Geography 10. One hour a week. Both Terms. Mr. Brock, Mr. Schofield. 28. Motor Mechanics. Practical instruction in the structure and operation of automobiles, including practice driving. One hour a week. One Term. Mr. Bell. Zoology 235 Department of Zoology Professor: C. McLean Fraser. Assistant Professor: G. J. Spencer. Instructor: Gertrude M. Smith. Assistant: Mildred H. Campbell. Note:—Biology 1 is prerequisite to all courses in Zoology. 1. General Morphology.—General morphology of animals. Comparative anatomy. The relationships of animal groups. Comparative life-histories. Text-books: T. J. Parker and W. A. Haswell, Manual of This course is prerequisite to other courses in Zoology. Zoology, Macmillan (American Edition, 1916). Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 7. Economic Entomology (in part).—The portion of the course in Economic Entomology that deals with forest insects. One lecture and two hours' laboratory work per week for half of Second Term. ^^ At V THE FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE 238 Faculty of Agriculture TIME TABLE FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE- FIRST Monday Room Tuesday Room Wednesday Room 9-10 Agronomy 1 AglOO English 1 b Poultry 1 A 100 AglOO Agronomy 1 .... AglOO 10-11 Animal Husbandry 1 AglOO Biology 1 AplOO AplOl French 1 A 104 A 204 Biology 1 Zoology 1 AplOO 11-12 Zoology 1 Botany 1 AplOl 12-1 1-2 Chemistry 1 a .... English 2 b S300 A 100 Agronomy 1 Bacteriology 1 Agl03 S Chemistry 1 a English 2 a S100 A 100 2-3 Agronomy 1 Bacteriology 1 Agl03 S Botany 1 Lab... Ap 3-4 Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 S S Agronomy 1 Chemistry 2 Lab b Agl03 S Botany 1 Lab... Ap Bacteriology 1 .... 4-5 Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 Bacteriology 1 .... S S Chemistry 2 Lab b S 5-6 Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 S S Chemistry 2 Lab b S Bacteriology 1 .... SECOND Monday Room Tuesday Room Wednesday Room Agronomy 2 AglOO English 1 b A 100 AglOO Agronomy 2 AglOO 9-10 10-11 Horticulture 1 .... AglOO Animal Husbandry 4 AglOO Animal Husbandry 4 AglOO Biology 1 Ap 100 AplOl French 1 A 104 A 204 Biology 1 Zoology 1 AplOO AplOI 11-12 Botany I _ 12-1 1-2 Chemistry 1 a .... English 2 b S300 A 100 Agronomy 2 Agl03 Chemistry 1 a ... English 2 a S300 A 100 2-3 Dairying 1 Lab.. Agl08 Agl03 Botany 1 Lab... Ap 3-4 Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 Dairying 1 Lab. S Agl08 Agronomy 2 Chemistry 2 Lab.b Agl03 S Botany 1 Lab... Ap 4-5 Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 Dairying 1 Lab.. S Agl08 Chemistry 2 Lab.b S 5-6 Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 S Chemistry 2 Lab.b S KEY TO BUILDINGS: A, Arts; Ag, Agriculture; Time Tables 239 -1928-29 FIRST AND SECOND YEARS. TERM Thursday Room Friday Room Saturday Room English lb A 100 Poultry 1 AglOO English 1 a Poultry 1 A 100 Agl02 9-10 Animal Husbandry 1 Chemistry 2 Agll4 S300 Poultry 1 Agl02 10-11 French 1 - A 104 A 204 Animal Agll4 French 1 Poultry 1 A 104 Agl02 Botany 1 11-12 12-1 Zoology 1 Lab Ap Chemistry 1 a English 2 a S300 A 100 1-2 Zoology 1 Lab A 100 Ap Bacteriology 1 S 2-3 Animal Husbandry 1 . Chemistry 2 Lab. t AgH4 S Bacteriology 1 S 3-4 Animal Husbandry 1 . Chemistry 2 Lab. Ii Agll4 S Biology 1 Lab. 6. Ap 4-5 Chemistry 2 Lab. b S Biology 1 Lab. 6... Ap 5-6 TERM Thursday Room Friday Room Saturday Room English 1 b A 100 Dairying. 1 AglOO English 1 a A 100 9-10 Animal Husbandry 4 . Chemistry 2 AglOO S300 AglOO" 10-11 French 1 A 104 A 204 Horticulture 1 . French 1 A 104 11-12 12-1 Zoology 1 Lab. . Ap English 2 a S300 A 100 Agl04 1-2 English 1 a ..... A 100 Ap Horticulture 1 .... Zoology 1 Lab 2-3 Chemistry 2 Lab.b S Horticulture 1 .... Agl04 3-4 Chemistry 2 Lab.b s Biology 1 Lab Horticulture 1 .... Ap Agl04 4-5 Chemistry 2 Lab.b s Biology I Lab... Ap 5-6 Ap, Applied Science; S, Science. ^^ At V FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE INFORMATION FOR STUDENTS IN AGRICULTURE The degrees offered in this faculty are: Bachelor of Science in Agriculture (B.S.A.) and Master of Science in Agriculture (M.S.A.). Courses of Study Five distinct lines of study are offered, as follows: (1.) A Four-year Course leading to the Degree of Bachelor of Science in Agriculture (B.S.A.). (2.) A One-year Occupational Course in which the basic work is in Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture, and Poultry Husbandry, leading to a Diploma in Agriculture. (3.) A series of Short Courses at the University, in Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture and Poultry Husbandry. (4.) Extension Courses at different points in the Province. (5.) Graduate work in Agriculture, leading to the degree, M.S.A. Course Leading to the Degree of B.S.A, Students in Agriculture are required to have Junior Matriculation or its equivalent before entering upon this course (see "Matriculation Requirements"). The degree of B.S.A. is granted only after the successful completion of four years of lecture and laboratory work. The course is planned for students who wish to obtain a practical and scientific knowledge of Agriculture, either as a basis for demonstration and teaching, or as an aid to success in farm management. The Occupational Course The Occupational Course is planned for those students whose academic qualifications are not high, but whose practical 242 Faculty of Agriculture qualifications are satisfactory. The course permits of work in Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Poultry Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture, Farm Management and Marketing on the part of those who wish to extend their practical knowledge. A successful completion of the course leads to a Diploma in Agriculture. Matriculation standing for entrance is not required. A printed descriptive folder giving further details of this course may be secured on application to the Registrar, University of British Columbia. Short Courses The Short Courses are planned for those men and women who are unable to take advantage of the longer courses, but who desire to extend their knowledge of agriculture in one or more of those branches in which they are particularly interested. The work throughout is intensely practical. Illustrative material and periods devoted to demonstration and judging work are strong features of the course. No entrance examination is required, nor are students asked to write an examination at the conclusion of the course. Special announcements giving details of the various divisions of the course are issued in December of each year, and may be obtained from the Registrar on application. Extension Courses In order to reach those engaged in Agriculture who are not able to avail themselves of the Winter Courses given at the University, the Faculty of Agriculture offers extension short courses in various centres throughout the Province. These courses are of at least four days' duration, are proceeded with according to a definite time-table, and include lectures and demonstrations in connection with the work of each department of the Faculty. Detailed programmes are prepared to suit the specific centres, and requests for such courses may be addressed to the Registrar. (Not offered in 1928-29.) Courses in Agriculture 243 Graduate Work For regulations, see page 248. CURRICULUM Courses are described in terms of units. A unit normally consists of one lecture hour (or one continuous laboratory period of not less than two or more than three hours) per week throughout the session, or two lecture hours (or equivalent laboratory periods) throughout a single term. The first two years of work leading to the degree in Agriculture are devoted to acquiring a knowledge of the basic sciences upon which Agriculture rests, in adding to the student's knowledge of language, and in laying a foundation for more advanced studies in practical and scientific Agriculture. The Third Year is devoted largely, and the Fourth Year almost wholly, to courses in Applied Agriculture. Except under special circumstances, students under the age of seventeen will not be eligible for registration. Specialization will begin at the commencement of the Third Year. Students who have not had at least one full season's practical farm experience will be required to obtain this preliminary training before registering for the Third Year. First Year Units Agronomy (1 and 2) 3 Animal Husbandry (1 and 4) 3 Biology 1 3 Chemistry 1 3 English 1 3 The first course in a language offered for Matriculation 3 Total required 18 244 Faculty of Agriculture Second Year Units Poultry Husbandry 1 l1/^ Horticulture 1 V/2 Dairying 1 l1/^ Botany 1 3 Zoology 1 3 English 2 3 Bacteriology 1 2 Chemistry 2 3 Total required I8V2 Third and Fourth Years On account of the specialized types of farming which must necessarily be followed in many parts of British Columbia, the work in the Third and Fourth Years leading to the degree of B.S.A. has been arranged in major courses so as to admit of a measure of specialization in one of the several recognized branches of Agriculture. At the same time all courses have been so arranged that every student will get the basic work in all lines no matter what option is chosen. Prior to the beginning of the Third Year every student must indicate in which one of the major options he wishes to continue his study, and shall arrange his elective courses with the approval of the Head of the Department in which he is majoring, and in consultation with the Heads of other Departments directly concerned. A thesis shall be prepared by each student on some topic, the subject of which shall be selected, with the approval of the Head of the Department in which the student is majoring, before the end of the Third Year's work. Two typewritten copies of each thesis on standard-sized paper (8y2 in. by 11 in.) shall be submitted on or before the 1st of April in the graduating year. Agricultural students are required to take a total of 35 units, thesis included, in their Third and Fourth Years. Courses in Agriculture 245 Third Year (Required subjects) Units Economics 1 3 Chemistry 3 or 14 3 (To be taken on the advice of the Head of the Department in which the student is majoring.) Principles of Heredity—Biology 2 1 Total required 7 Fourth Year (Required subjects) * Units Agricultural Economics 1^ Thesis 3 Total required 4*4 Agronomy Major Third Year Units Required subjects, as above 7 Plant Physiology—Botany 3 2 Systematic Entomology—Zoology 4 2 Economic Entomology—Zoology 7 2 •Total 13 Fourth Year Units Required subjects, as above 4*4 Animal Husbandry 9 iy2 •Total ~6~ * Students are required, with the advice and consent of the Head of the Department, to elect up to a total of from 15 to 18 units. 246 Faculty of Agriculture Animal Husbandry Major Third Year Units Required subjects, as above 7 •Total 7 Fourth Year Units Required subjects, as above 4% Agronomy 7 1^2 •Total 6 Dairying Major Third Year Units Required subjects, as above 7 •Total 7 Fourth Year Units Required subjects, as above 4y2 Civil Engineering (Special).. 1 Plant Physiology—Botany 3 2 Dairy Chemistry 2 •Total 9V2 * Students are required, with the advice and consent of the Head of the Department, to elect up to a total of from 15 to 18 units. Courses in Agriculture 247 Horticulture Major Third Year Units Required subjects, as above 7 Plant Physiology—Botany 3 2 Systematic Entomology—Zoology 4 2 Economic Entomology—Zoology 7 2 •Total 13 Fourth Year Units Required subjects, as above 4V£ Plant Pathology—Botany 6 (c) 2 •Total 6V2 Poultry Husbandry Major Third Year Units Required subjects, as above... 7 •Total 7 Fourth Year Units Required subjects, as above 4% •Total 4% Botany (Plant Pathology) Major Third Year Units Required subjects, as above 7 •Total ~T~ * Students are required, with the advice and consent of the Head of the Department, to elect up to a total of from 15 to 18 units. 248 Faculty of Agriculture Fourth Year Units Required subjects, as above 4y£ •Total 4V2 Zoology (Entomology) Major Third Year Units Required subjects, as above 7 •Total 7 Fourth Year Units Required subjects, as above 4% # Total 4V2 COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.S.A. 1. Candidates for the degree of Master of Science in Agriculture (M.S.A.) must hold a bachelor's degree from this University, or its equivalent. 2. A graduate of another university applying for permission to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his application an official statement of his graduation together with a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects of his course. The Faculty will determine the standing of such a student in this University. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00. 3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records who proceed to the master's degree shall be required: (a.) To spend at least one year in resident graduate study; or • Students are required, with the advice and consent of the Head of the Department, to elect up to a total of from 15 to 18 units. Examinations and Advancement 249 (b.) (At the discretion of the Faculty concerned): (i.) To do two or more years of private work under the supervision of the University, such work to be equivalent to one year of graduate study; or (ii.) To do one year of private work under University supervision and one term of resident graduate study, the total of such work to be equivalent to one year of resident graduate study. 4. Students doing tutorial work shall not be allowed to come up for final examination in less than two academic years after registration as M.S.A. students. 5. One major and one minor shall be required. Candidates may select their minor in another Faculty. 6. (a.) A thesis must be prepared on some approved topic in the major subject. (b.) Examinations, written or oral, or both, shall be required. 7. Two typewritten copies of each thesis, on standard-sized thesis paper, shall be submitted. (See special circular of "Instructions for the Preparation of Masters' Theses.") 8. Application for admission as a graduate student shall be made to the Registrar by October 15th. (See schedule of fees.) Examinations and Advancement 1. Examinations in all subjects, obligatory for all students, are held in December and in April. Applications for special consideration on account of illness or domestic affliction must be submitted to the Dean not later than two days after the close of the examination period. In cases where illness is the plea for absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be 250 Faculty of Agriculture presented on the appropriate form which may be obtained from the Dean's office. 2. In the First and Second years candidates taking a full course will not be considered as having passed unless they obtain at least 40 per cent, on each subject and 50 per cent, on the aggregate. In the Third and Fourth years candidates will not be considered as having passed unless they obtain at least 50 per cent, on each subject and at least 60 per cent, on all subjects of the Department in which the student is majoring. Candidates taking less than a full course (15 units) must obtain at least 50 per cent, on each subject of the First and Second years, and at least 60 per cent, on each subject of the Third and Fourth years. Students taking work in the Summer Session will not be considered as having passed unless they obtain 50 per cent, or more in each subject. 3. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent. 4. If a student's general standing in the final examinations of any year is sufficiently high, the Faculty may grant him supplemental examinations in the subject or subjects in which he has failed. Notice will be sent to all students to whom such examinations have been granted. 5. Supplemental examinations will be held in September and will not be granted at any other time, except by special permission of the Faculty, and on payment of a fee of $7.50 per paper. 6. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied by the necessary fees (see Schedule of Fees) must be in the hands of the Registrar at least two weeks before the date set for the examinations. 7. No student may enter a higher year with supplemental examinations still outstanding in respect of more than 3 units of the preceding year, nor with any supplemental examination Examinations and Advancement 251 outstanding in respect of the work of an earlier year or of Matriculation unless special permission to do so is granted by Faculty. Such permission will be granted only when Faculty is satisfied that the failure to remove the outstanding supplemental examinations had an adequate cause. 8. A student may not continue in a later year any subject in which he has a supplemental examination outstanding from an earlier year, except in the case of compulsory subjects in the Second Year. 9. A student who is not allowed to proceed to a higher year may not register as a partial student in respect of the subjects of that higher year. But a student who is required to repeat his year may, on application in writing, be exempted by the Faculty from attending lectures and passing examinations in subjects in which he has already made at least Second Class standing. In this case he may take, in addition to the subjects of the year which he is repeating, certain subjects of the following year. 10. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to withdraw from the University. 11. Any student whose academic record, as determined by the tests and examinations of the first term of the First or Second Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to discontinue attendance at the University for the remainder of the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to the University as long as any supplemental examinations are outstanding. 12. Term essays and examination papers will be refused a passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English, and, in this event, students will be required to pass a special examination in English to be set by the Department of English. 252 Faculty Of Agriculture COURSES IN AGRICULTURE Department of Agronomy Professor: P. A. Boving. Associate Professor: G. G. Moe. Assistant Professor: D. G. Laird. Assistant: G. B. Boving. Assistant: C. A. Lamb. 1. Soil and Soil Fertility.—An examination will be made of the more important soil types; cultivation, manuring, and rotation of crops will be studied in their relation to soil productivity; methods of treatment will be observed, and the principles underlying soil management and improvement will constitute the basis for subsequent courses in Agronomy. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term, First Year. Mr. P. A. Boving, Mr. Laird. 1^2 units. References: Miller, The Soil and Its Management, Ginn & Co.; Hopkins, Soil Fertility and Permanent Agriculture, Ginn & Co. 2. Field Crops.—This course embraces a study of the most important grain, corn, forage, and root crops. A detailed study of the crops, in the field and in the laboratory, will supplement the lecture work in order to give the student a comprehensive idea, not only of the different phases of crop production, but also of the relative value of separate specimens and samples. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, First Year. Mr. Moe, Mr. G. B. Boving. 1% units. References: Montgomery, Productive Field Crops, Lippin- cott; Hutcheson and "Wolfe, Production of Field Crops, McGraw- Hill ; Butter, Wheat Growing, A. and C. Black. 3. Seed Growing.—This course deals with the production and marketing of vegetable, root, clover, and grass seeds. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term, Third Year. Mr. P. A. Boving, Mr. G. B. Boving. 1^2 units. Reference: Cox and Starr, Seed Production and Marketing, John "Wiley and Sons. Agronomy 253 4. Field Crops (Advanced).—Course 4 constitutes a more detailed study of field crops than was possible in Course 2. It also embraces special lecture and laboratory work on the harvesting, threshing, cleaning, storing, and marketing of our ordinary field crops. The two courses combined will give the student a more complete understanding of the various factors bearing upon the production of a first-class article, whether intended for sale or for feeding. One lecture and one laboratory per week. First and Second Terms, Third Year. Mr. Moe. 2 units. References: Piper, Forage Plants and Their Culture, Macmillan; Bracken, Crop Production in Western Canada, Grain Growers' Guide; Piper, Principals of the Grain Trade of Western Canada, Macmillan. 5. Economics of Crop Production.—This course embraces a study of the selecting, planning, and operating of a farm. Various conditions, systems and practices prevailing on the American Continent and in Europe will be discussed and compared. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. P. A. Boving, Mr. Laird. V/2 units. Reference: Adams, Farm Management, McGraw-Hill. 6. Field-crop Judging. — The judging and handling of grains, grasses, forage and root crops will be taken up in the field as well as in the laboratory. One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Moe. iy2 units. 7. Soil Management. — Different systems of cultivation, rotation, manuring and irrigation, as practised in Canada and elsewhere, will be discussed, and the influence of these factors on the maintenance or exhaustion of soil fertility will be studied. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Laird. iy2 units. References: Russell, Soil Conditions and Plant Growth, Longmans Green; Murray, Soils and Manures, Constable & Co.; 254 Faculty of Agriculture Emerson, Agricultural Geology, John "Wiley and Sons; Rotham- stead Exp. Station Reports. 8. Plant-breeding. — This course is planned to follow Biology 2. With this as a basis, the course is designed to illustrate and explain the breeding of field crops. One lecture and two laboratories per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Moe. iy2 units. Hayes and Garber, Breeding Crop Plants, McGraw-Hill; Babcock and Clausen, Genetics in Relation to Agriculture, McGraw-Hill; Sinnott and Dunn, Principles of Genetics a. McGraw- Hill. 9. Field Experiments. — The scope, the methods and the interpretation of field experiments will be discussed, and a study will be made of the more important results obtained in different parts of the world- Two lectures per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Laird. 1 unit. 10. Thesis. 3 units. 11. Crop Adaptation and Distribution (Crop Ecology).— The relation of field crops to elevation, climate and soils will be studied in order to give the student a comprehensive idea of the distribution of crops and the adaptation of various types to different parts of the world. One lecture per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Moe. V* unit. Reference: Finch and Baker, Geography of the World's Agriculture, U. S. A. Department of Agriculture. 12. Research (Directed). 3 units. (Not required of Undergraduates.) 13. Soil Bacteriology.—Laboratory and lecture course, in which the bacteria of soils are studied qualitatively and quantitatively, with special reference to soil fertility. Prerequisites: Bact. 1, Agronomy 1. Five hours per week. First Term. Mr. Laird. 2 units. Animal Husbandry 255 References: Lohnis and Fred, Text-book of Agricultural Bacteriology, McGraw-Hill; Waksman, Principles of Soil Microbiology, "Williams and "Wilkins. 50. Research (Directed). 3 to 5 units. (Open to Graduates only.) Students majoring in Agronomy are required to work one summer under the direction of the Department. Department of Animal Husbandry Professor: H. M. King. Assistant Professor: R. L. Davis. Assistant Professor: H. R. Hare. Lecturer in Veterinary Science: J. G. Jervis. 1. Market Classes and Grades of Livestock.—A study of the characteristics and requirements of the various market classes and grades of beef cattle, dairy cattle, horses, sheep, swine and goats. ^l Texts: Vaughan, Types and Market Classes of Livestock. Plumb, Judging Farm Animals. Three laboratories per week. First Term, First Year. Mr. King, Mr. Davis, Mr. Hare. iy2 units. 2. Breeds of Cattle. — A study of the origin, history of development, characteristics, and adaptations of the breeds of cattle. Students are required to make several trips to leading herds in the Province. Text: Plumb, Types and Breeds of Farm Animals. Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 1. Three laboratories per week. First Term, Third Year. Mr. King, Mr. Davis. iy2 units. 3. Breeds of Horses, Sheep, Swine and Goats.—A study of the origin, history of development, characteristics, and adaptations of the breeds of horses, sheep, swine and goats. Text: Plumb, Types and Breeds of Farm Animals. Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 1. Two laboratories per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Davis, Mr. King. 1 unit. 256 Faculty of Agriculture 4. Livestock Feeding and Management.—The feeding, care. and management from birth to maturity of the various types of livestock. Text: Henry and Morrison, Feeds and Feeding, abridged edition. Prerequisite: Animal Husbandry 1. Three lectures per week. Second Term, First Year. Mr. Davis, Mr. King, Mr. Hare. IV2 units. 5. Advanced Judging.—A continuation of the type of work represented in the laboratory of Animal Husbandry 2 and 3. Designed to strengthen Animal Husbandry students in the selection of herd sires, foundation breeding herds, and in the building up of superior flocks and herds. Special work in the fitting and handling of live stock is presented. Students are required to make several trips to leading herds in the Province. Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 2 and 3. Three laboratories per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Davis, Mr. King. 1% units. 6. Livestock Breeding. — A study of the principles of breeding in their application to livestock development and improvement. Text: Rice, Breeding and Improvement of Farm Animals. Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 2 and 3 and Biology 2. Two lectures per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Davis. 1 unit. (Not offered in 1928-29.) 7. Herd, Flock and Stud-book Study.—An advanced course in the study of the principal breeds of livestock, familiarizing the student with the leading sires, dams, families, and herds of the various breeds, and the blood lines entering into their formation. Emphasis is placed upon a study of pedigrees. Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 2 and 3. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. King, Mr. Davis. iy2 units. (Not offered in 1928-29.) Animal Husbandry 257 8. Nutrition. — A study of the elements and compounds important to animal nutrition and their relation to the animal organism; the digestive system; the digestion, absorption, assimilation, and disposition of food materials. A study of the various feedstuffs. Texts: Henry and Morrison, Feeds and Feeding. Armsby, Animal Nutrition. Two lectures per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Davis. 1 unit. (Not offered in 1928-29.) 9. Animal Feeding.—The feeding of all classes of livestock, having distinct regard to the economic problems confronting the breeder and the producer. Af^^^s^ ] Text: Henry and Morrison, Feeds and Feeding. Three lectures per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Davis, Mr. King, Mr. Hare. iy2 units. (Open to Third Year Students in 1928-29.) 10. Markets and Marketing.—A careful study of the markets with their requirements for livestock and livestock pro- duets, and the relation which these bear to production. Marketing of breeding stock. Two lectures per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. King. 1 unit. (Not offered in 1928-29.) 11. Thesis. 3 units. 12. Livestock Practice and Seminar.—Every Animal Husbandry student is required to spend the summer months between the Third and Fourth Years on an approved livestock farm and to present a written report upon his summer's work before entering upon the Second Term of the Fourth Year. Open only to students majoring in Animal Husbandry. A seminar of one hour per week for the special study of current problems and literature is held. Mr. King. iy2 units. 258 Faculty of Agriculture 13. Livestock Farm and Ranch Management.—The management of the range, ranch, and farm for the production of live stock. Texts: Potter, Western Livestock Management. Sampson, Farm and Range Management. Prerequisite: Animal Husbandry 12. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr; King, Mr. Hare. iy2 units. (Open to Third Year Students in 1928-29.) 14. Veterinary Science.—A study of the common diseases of horses, cattle, sheep, swine and goats; their causes, prevention, and treatment. Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 1 and 4. Three lectures per week. First Term, Third Year. Mr. Jervis. IV2 units. 15. Research (Directed). 3 units. (Not required of Undergraduates.) 50. Research (Directed). 3 to 5 units. (Open to Graduates only.) Department of Dairying Professor: Wilfrid Sadler. Associate Professor: N. S. Golding. Assistant: H. L A. Tarr. 1. Elementary Dairying.—An elementary course of lectures on the principles underlying the successful practice of dairying. Laboratory work on the control of milk, the preparation of dairy products, the judging of the same, and the methods of testing adopted. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Second Year. Mr. Golding, Mr. Sadler. iy2 units. 2. Farm Cheese-making. — Principles and practices of cheese-making, hard-pressed, blue-veined, and soft; the making Dairying 259 of cheese on the farm; a general knowledge required of the principal varieties of each class of cheese, and laboratory practice in the making of standard varieties. This course is offered in the Third Year or Fourth Year to students other than those who propose to major in Dairying. One lecture and two laboratories per week for one term. IV2 units. 3. Dairy Bacteriology.—The bacteriology of milk; sources of bacteria in milk, and quantitative and qualitative determinations of the bacterial content; normal and abnormal fermentations of milk, and a somewhat detailed study of certain organisms responsible therefor. One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term. Third Year. Mr. Sadler. I iy2 units. 4. Creamery Butter-making. — Creamery butter-making- grading of cream; treatment and preparation of cream for butter-making; pasteurization; manufacture of creamery butter; judging, grading, and marketing of butter. Prerequisite: Dairying 3. ^^f One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term, Third Year. Mr. Golding, V/2 units. 5. Market Milk—The hygienic aspect of milk production; handling and management of milk designed for city consumption; grading of milk on bacterial standards; pasteurization, control and distribution of milk. One lecture and two laboratories per week. Second Term. Third Year. Mr. Sadler, Mr. Golding. iy2 units. 6. Cheese and Cheese-making.—This course deals with the principles and practices of cheese-making — hard-pressed, blue- veined, and soft. Offered to those majoring in Dairying. Two lectures and two laboratories per week. Fourth Year. Mr. Golding. 4 units. 7. Dairy Bacteriology. — The ripening of hard-pressed cheeses; the bacteria employed in the practice of cheese-making; 260 Faculty of Agriculture the organisms concerned in the ripening processes of cheese; and of necessity, in a measure, a systematic study of the Lactic Acid Bacteria. One lecture and two laboratories per week. Mr. Sadler. 3 units. 8. Testing of Milk and Dairy Products. — The testing of milk, cream, butter, and cheese; the selling of milk and cream on the butter-fat basis; causes of variation in butter-fat content. One lecture-laboratory per week. First Term, Mr. Golding. y2 unit. 9. Dairy Buildings and Equipment.—Buildings suitable for handling of milk and manufacturing of dairy products; their situation, construction, arrangement; equipment of farm dairies, creameries, and cheese-factories. This course includes detailed studies of selected buildings. One lecture and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. 1 unit. (Not offered in 1928-29.) 10. The Judging and Grading of Milk and Milk Products.— Offered to students of the Senior Year. Mr. Golding, Mr. Sadler. iy2 units (Open to Third Year Students in 1928-29.) 11. Thesis. 3 units. 12. Research (Directed). 3 units, (Not required of Undergraduates.) 50. Research (Directed). 3 to 5 units. (Open to Graduates only.) Horticulture 261 Department of Horticulture Professor: F. M. Clement. Professor: A. F. Barss. Associate Professor: F. E. Buck. 1. Principles of Horticulture. — A study of the principles involved in the selection, propagation, planting, and general care of the more important fruits, vegetables, flowers and ornamental trees and shrubs, with sufficient practice to enable a student to care for the home plantings. This course is designed to meet the needs of all students in Agriculture, giving them a general knowledge of Horticultural Crops. At the same time the work is fundamental for students who are planning to take further courses in Horticulture. . Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Second Year. Mr. Barss, Mr. Buck. iy2 units. Text: Hood, Farm Horticulture, Lea & Febiger. 3. Practical Pomology. — A detailed study of the best methods in Orchard Management with field practice in various orchard operations, such as planting, pruning, and spraying. The course also deals with the culture of small fruits. Two lectures and two laboratories per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Barss. 2 units. Text: Gardner, Bradford and Hooker, Orcharding, McGraw-Hill. Reference: Chandler, Fruit Growing, Houghton Mifflin Co. 4. Plant Propagation and Nursery Practice.—This course deals with the methods used in propagating plants, including budding and grafting; and with Commercial Nursery practices. One lecture and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Buck. 1 unit. Text: Hottes, Practical Plant Propagation, De la Mare Co. 5. Commercial Pomology.—A study of the problems connected with the handling of fruits and vegetables—harvesting, grading, packing, shipping, storing, marketing; packing and 262 Faculty of Agriculture storage houses; marketing associations; costs of production and marketing. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Barss. IV2 units. (Open to Third Year Students in 1928-29.) Reference: Folger and Thomson, The Commercial Apple Industry of North America, Macmillan. 6. Systematic Pomology.—A course in description, identification, classification, displaying, and judging of fruits. The course also includes a certain amount of work in Systematic Olericulture. One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Buck, Mr. Barss. iy2 units. (Not offered in 1928-29.) Reference: Drain, Essentials of Systematic Pomology, John Wiley & Sons. 7. Practical Vegetable Gardening.—A study of the problems connected with the commercial growing of vegetables, including the selection of a location, soil requirements, fertilizing, irrigating, and special cultural methods for the more important vegetables. This course also deals with the construction of hot-beds, cold-frames, greenhouses, and their management in the forcing of vegetable crops. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Buck. 1% units. (Open to Third Year Students in 1928-29.) Text: Thompson, Vegetable Crops, McGraw-Hill. 8. Special Horticulture.—A course for the study of special branches of Commercial Horticulture, including the manufacture of horticultural products, such as canned fruits, dried products, jams, jellies, and fruit juices. Two lectures per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Barss. 1 unit. (Not offered in 1928-29.) Reference: Cruess, Commercial Fruit and Vegetable Products, McGraw-Hill. Horticulture 263 9. Horticultural Problems.—An introduction to the study of problems in Horticulture, including the breeding of Horticultural crops, variety adaptations, and methods of research, together with a review of Horticultural investigational work in other institutions. There will also be practice in outlining investigations, and in preparing reports. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Barss. iy2 units. References: Hayes and Garber, Breeding of Crop Plants, McGraw-Hill; Gardner, Bradford and Hooker, Fundamentals of Fruit Production, McGraw-Hill. 10. Landscape Gardening and Floriculture. — The course aims to give the student a working knowledge of the selection, planting and care of ornamental plants—trees, shrubs, and flowers; with the principles for the improvement of home grounds, school grounds, city streets, and parks. The course includes practice in identification of plant materials; also practice in making of planting plans. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Buck. V/2 units. Text: Cridland, Practical Landscape Gardening, De la Mare Co. Reference: Van Rensselaer, Art Out of Doors, Charles Scribner & Sons. 11. Thesis. 3 units. 12. Research (Directed). 3 units. (Not required of Undergraduates.) 50. Research (Directed). 3 to 5 units (Open to Graduates only.) 264 Faculty of Agriculture Department of Poultry Husbandry Professor: E. A. Lloyd. Associate Professor: V. S. Asmundson. Assistant: W. J. Riley. 1. General.—Fundamentals of poultry husbandry, including breeds, breeding, judging, selection, culling, feeds, feeding, incubation, brooding, poultry-house construction, killing, egg- grading, marketing, sanitation and hygiene, diseases, general management. The regular laboratory exercises are supplemented by practice work in the feeding and care of poultry flocks. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term, Second Year. Mr. Lloyd. IV2 units. 2. Markets and Marketing.—Marketing conditions for poultry products in British Columbia. The relation of the home market to outside markets. Canadian Egg Marketing Regulations. Provincial Egg Acts and Regulations. Egg-grading, care, packing, storing, selling. Fattening poultry for market; killing, packing, storing, selling. Production and sale of high-class breeding stock for local demand and export trade. Advertising. Principles and practice of marketing, private and co-operative. Study of prices. One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term, Third Year. Mr. Lloyd. IV2 units. 3. Incubation and Brooding.—Selection and care of hatching eggs. Shipping hatching eggs. Natural incubation. Artificial incubation. Types of incubators. Natural brooding. Artificial brooding. Rearing, including systems of management, housing, feeding and training chicks. Brooding equipment. Practice in operating incubators and brooders. Prerequisite: Poultry Husbandry 1. One lecture and two laboratories and practice per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Asmundson. IV2 units. Poultry Husbandry 265 4. (a) Breeds and Breeding.—The breeds of poultry; their history, origin and economic qualities. The principles of breeding as applied to Poultry Husbandry. Breeding records. Prerequisite: Poultry Husbandry 1 and Biology 2. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Asmundson. IV2 units. 4. (6) Advanced Breeding.—Breeding for egg and meat production. Statistical study of production records. Prerequisite: Poultry Husbandry 4 (a). One lecture and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Asmundson. 1 unit. 5. (a) Poultry Management.—Types of poultry farms and their respective problems. Farm layouts. Economy of investment of capital in land, buildings, stock and equipment. Efficiency in breeds, maintenance, labor, housing, feeding, production and personnel. Marketing. Farm income, labor income and profit as based on University survey. Studies of individual farms for criticism. One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Lloyd, Mr. Riley. iy2 units. 5. (6) Advanced Farm Management.—Continuation of Poultry 5, with more detailed study of surveys and cost account records to determine labor income and profits. Inventory valuations. Special study of disease problems. Estimates on cost of developing poultry farms. Efficiency, factors. Costs of production. One lecture and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Lloyd, Mr. Riley. 1 unit. 6. Diseases, Housing and Hygiene.—Common ailments of poultry and their treatment. Parasites. Infectious and contagious diseases of poultry and chicks, turkeys, geese and ducks Autopsies. Dissection. Poultry-house construction, building sites, types, costs and uses. Yarding. Sanitation and hygiene. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Lloyd, Mr. Asmundson. IV2 units. 266 Faculty of Agriculture 7. (a) Feeding Management.—Feeding growing stock, laying hens, breeding males and females, turkeys, ducks and geese. Use of lights. Study of standard methods of routine management. Two lectures per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Asmundson. 1 unit. 7. (b) Poultry Rations.—Application of the facts revealed by studies in nutrition to the compounding of rations for poultry. Study of feed mixtures. Problems and assigned reading. Prerequisite: Animal Husbandry 8. One lecture and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Asmundson. 1 unit. 8. Seminar.—Poultry literature. Reports on current events. Research and experimental problems. Preparation of reports and bulletins. Export trade. Advertising and other economic propaganda. One lecture per week. Three hours practice per week Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Lloyd. 1 unit. 9. Judging and Selection.—Judging according to standard. Changes induced by egg production. Characteristics of layers. Selection for egg production. Selection for meat production. Two laboratories per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Asmundson. 1 unit. 10. Thesis. 3 units. 11. Research (Directed). 3 units. (Not required of Undergraduates.) 50. Research (Directed). 3 to 5 units. (Open to Graduates only.) Agricultural Economics 267 Agricultural Economics Dean Clement. A. Farm Organization and Management.—This is a lecture and laboratory course, based on a detailed study of five hundred farms in British Columbia, as recorded on the Farm Survey Sheets. References and assigned readings. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Fall Term. Mr. Hare. IV2 units B. Agricultural Economics and Marketing.—Some applications of the principles of Economies and Marketing to Agriculture. Required of all students in the Occupational Course, but not open for credit to degree students. Text: Carver, Elements of Rural Economics, Ginn. Three lectures per week. Second Term. Mr. Hare. IV2 units. 1. Agricultural Economics.—The principles of Economics as applied to Agriculture; historical background, the agricultural problem, and some special topics, such as the agricultural surplus, production in relation to population growth, the farm income and the share of agriculture in the national income. Text: Taylor, Agricultural Economics, Macmillan. References and assigned readings from Grey, Carver, Nourse, and others. Three lectures per week. Mr. Clement. 3 units. 2. Marketing.—The principles of Marketing as applied to the individual farm and to Agriculture as a whole. The general principles of Marketing, the marketing of agricultural products as compared to wholesale and retail distribution of manufactured goods, the contributions of national Farmer Movements, co-operative marketing as illustrated by the marketing of wheat, fruit, and milk in Canada. 268 The University of British Columbia Texts: Brown, Marketing, Harper and Brothers. Mackintosh, Agricultural Co-operation in Western Canada. Ryerson Press, Toronto. References and assigned readings from Macklin, Hibbard, Boyle, Benton, and others. Three lectures per week. Mr. Clement. 3 units. 50. Agricultural Economics.—The principles of Economics as applied to the individual farm and to agriculture as an industry. Lectures, discussions and assigned readings. (Open to graduates only.) Mr. Clement. 3 to 5 units. (Not offered in 1928-29.) 51. Agricultural Economics.—The general principles of marketing, price fixing, marketing by commission, the influence of the market on production, co-operation; and on special topics and assigned readings from general reference and the reports of the American Institute of Co-operation. (Open to graduates only.) Mr. Clement. 3 to 5 units. (3 and 4 are offered in alternate years.) Note :—Where courses other than those listed under Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture, Poultry Husbandry and Agricultural Economics are mentioned, the student will please refer to outlines of courses in Arts and Science or Applied Science. List of Students LIST OF STUDENTS IN ATTENDANCE, SESSION 1928-29 FACULTY OF ARTS AND SCIENCE Name First Yeah Full Undergraduates Abramson, Alice S Acheson, Helen K Adams, Marjorie W Agar, Martha J Aitken, Stirling C Akenhead, A. Edwin Akerly, Ernest N Alexander, Hugh J Alexander, Margaret R Allan, Margaret M Archibald, Marjorie D Armstrong, A. Helen Armstrong, Berniece M Armstrong, Howard S Armstrong, L. Gwendolyn R. Astell, Clara A Attenborough, Esm6 N Bachmann, Hazel T Bailey, Alice T Baillie, G. By Bain, Violet B Baird, Thomas C Ball, Mary O. B Ball, M. Elizabeth Banno, Edward C Barber, Phyllis M Bardsley, John H Barnett, Thomas S Barr, Helen I Barran, Arthur Bartlett, Eugene Barton, Helen C Bate, Shirley C Beall, Desmond Beavan, A. Paul Beech, Raymond J Bell, Alberta Bell, Florence A Benedict, Howard Bennett, Gordon H. Bickford, Edith P Bischoff, Harold D Black, Bertie A. F Black, Peter Blackledge, Vera M Bolam, M. Gwendolyn Bolton, Reginald S Home Address . Anyox ...Vancouver ...New Westminster ...New Westminster ...Vancouver . Ladysmith ...Vancouver Vancouver ..Mission City Vancouver ..Vancouver Vancouver .. Vancouver ...Vancouver ..New Westminster ...Vancouver ...Aldergrove ...Vancouver ..Vancouver .Vancouver Murrayville ...Vancouver Vancouver ..Sandwick Vancouver ..Vancouver Vancouver ...Brea, Calif. Vancouver .. New Westminster .Port Coquitlam Vancouver Vancouver New Westminster Courtenay Waldo Vancouver Coronado, Calif. Abbotsford Vancouver Vancouver Hilversum, Holland Vancouver Prince Rupert New Westminster North Vancouver ...Vancouver 270 The University of British Columbia Name. Home Address. Bolton, Verna M Vancouver Boutilier, Helen R Vancouver Bowell, Lyla A .: Vancouver Bradbury, John F Vancouver Brent, Norma M Vancouver Briggs, S. Isabelle Vancouver Bright, Richard A Vancouver Brissenden, Pearley R Vancouver Brock, A. Ellis Haney Brooke, Gordon L Steveston Brookes, Mary Vancouver Brown, Brenton S Vancouver Brown, C. E. Gordon Liverpool, Eng. Brown, Edgar N Vancouver Brown, Evelyn M Vancouver Brown, Ralph M Vancouver Bruce, Dorothy M Agassiz Bryant, Beverly Vancouver Buchanan, Richard D Vancouver Buckland, Elizabeth C Vancouver Burchell, William U Vancouver Burnham, Frank L Vancouver Burns, Ronald M Vancouver Burritt, Oscar C Vancouver Burton, Geoffrey S Enderby Butler, Ruth Vancouver Butorac, Jeanne B Trail Cade, Arthur F Prince Rupert Cairns, Edmund A. M Trail Caldicott, Arthur H Trail Callan, Pat J Vancouver Cameron, Duncan Agassiz Cameron, Jean G Vancouver Campbell, Alan T New Denver Campbell, Colin B New Denver Campbell, Kenneth F Vancouver Campbell, Nora Vancouver Campbell, Phyllis M New Denver Carnwath, Velma S Vancouver Carpenter, Margaret E Vancouver Carstairs, G. Dennis Vancouver Carter, A. Elizabeth Burnaby Cartlidge, Annie , North Vancouver Chodat, Henry H Vancouver Christie, Jean S New Westminster Clark, Edward A Vancouver Clark, Harland W Cranbrook Clarke, Allan F Vancouver Clarke, Maurice C Trail Clarke, Norma R Vancouver Clement, Maurice G Vancouver Cleveland, Courtney E Vancouver Clydesdale, Marion Vancouver Cole, Cedric A Christchurch, N. Z. Collinson, Carl A Lloydminster, Sask. List of Students 271 Name. Home Address. Coltart, Robert Vancouver Cooke, Carlton C Vancouver Corp, Grenville A New Westminster Costerton, Leonard F Vernon Cowan, Ian M North Vancouver Crawford, Thomas E Vancouver Creelman, Margaret W Vancouver Crisp, Allan G. Vancouver Culley, Erma L Vancouver Cummings, John M Vancouver Currie, Jack B North Vancouver Custance, Lillian E New Westminster Cuthbert, Enda M New Westminster Dairon, David A Vancouver Dalton, Christopher J. A North Vancouver Davidson, Edna M Vancouver Davidson, Jack Vancouver Davidson, Margaret H Vancouver Dawe, Harold J. F New Westminster Dawson, Barbara L Vancouver Deacon, George B Vancouver Dick, Hazel M Britannia Beach Dickie, Mildred O. Vancouver Dillabough, Alice E Vancouver Dingle, Edith A New Westminster Dixon, Harold S Vancouver 1 Dodd, Dorothy A. E Vancouver Doherty, Thomas H North Vancouver Dunbar, Ross P Vancouver Duncan, Kathleen I ^ Vancouver Dunfee, Harry C Vancouver Dunlap, Francis A ^. mf New Westminster Dunn, Janet B Vancouver Dunning, Edgar C Ladner Dutcher, Howard N Vancouver Edwards, H. Gwendoline S North Vancouver Edwards, Joan E Steveston Efford, Ruby E Vancouver Eldridge, Beverley A Vancouver Ellett, Alec S Vancouver Ellison, Florence R Vancouver Ellison, Robert Trail Fanning, George Vancouver Farris, John L Vancouver Ferguson, Ann B. S Vancouver Fernie, W. Vacy Kamloops Fernlund, Holger B Vancouver Finlay, Margaret G Vancouver Fisher, Kathleen P Ladner Fishman, Solomon Vancouver Fletcher, Margaret G. Victoria Follick, C. Ralph _Vancouver Forsyth, Agnes J Vancouver Foss, I. Harriet Vancouver Fowler, Jean R Vancouver 272 The University of British Columbia Name. Fox, Clara G. B. .: Fox, John W Fraser, Frances L Fraser, Kenneth F Fraser, Louise G Fraser, T. Clyde Frattinger, Peter A. ... Fridleifson, Leif F Frost, John W Fukumoto, Aichi Gallagher, J. Wilfred ... Galloway, Verna E Garden, Murray E Garratt, Morley W Garrison, Florence T. . Gaul, Katharine L. C. . Gaul, Robert W Gavin, Harold D Gibson, Eileen Gilbert, Frank M Giles, Harold F Gillespie, Charles R Gillies, Eleanor M. D Gillies, Isobel L Girardi, Elda Givins, Henry C Glover, Herbert G Godfrey, Langford M. . Goranson, Ewald Gordon, Boyd J Gordon, Francis -^0smm Gotoh, John Graham, Dorothy M Graham, Mary H. S Grant, Donald B Grant, Donald E Grant, George .....^^. Gray, Alice G. Gray, David Green, Bertha M Green, James J Greenwood, Dorrie Greenwood, Frances M. Griffin, Eileen B Griffin, Herbert H Griffith, Dorothy M Groves, Philip S Haase, Rudolph E Hager, A. Robert Haley, Francis E Hallett, Joan E Hamilton, M. Ruth Hansen, Joyce E Harford, Barrie H Harrell, Bert F Home Address. ...Thurlow ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Nanaimo ...Chapman Camp ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...New Westminster ...Smithers ...Ladner ..North Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ..Anyox ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Burnaby ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Pemberton Meadows ..Vancouver ...Vancouver ..Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Santa Monica, Calif. ...Nelson ...Vancouver ..New Westminster Burnaby ..Vancouver List of Students 273 Name. Harrison, Margaret W. Harvey, H. Stuart Harvey, John Harvey, William H Hawes, Isabel G Healey, Agnes M Heap, Maxwell Hebb, Malcolm H Hedreen, Guy N Helmer, Cecil D Henderson, Gibb G Henderson, Margaret H. T. Hendry, Alexander Henniger, William F Herbert, Ruth E Herbison, Mary Hewer, Jack M Hill, Evelyn S Hillier, William V Hockin, Katharine B Holloway, Mavis M. E Hood, Jean A Hopkinson, Dorothy M Horton, R. Donald Howe, Eileen D Humble, Ralph S Hume, Philip G Hunt, Cicely R Hunter, Virginia Hurford, James R Hutchinson, Grace M Hutchinson, Myrl .^.. Hutchison, Donald F Hutson, A. Maud Huycke, Barbara S Hyndman, John Inglis, Effle F Inglis, James W Jack, Lawrence B Jakeway, Thomas G James, Bessie M James, Doris E Jestley, H. Lyle Johnson, Edwin B Johnson, H. Elizabeth Johnston, John Johnston, Viola M Jordan, John S Kelly, Dorothy B Kennedy, Bessie Kidd, Allan J Kilpatrick, T. Donald King, Elva M King, Margaret A Knappett, Louisa M Horn* Address. ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ... Vancouver ... Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver Grand Forks ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Dundarave ..Aberdeen, Wash. ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver North Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Courtenay ..Vancouver ...Vancouver .. Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Courtenay ...Hatzic ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ... Nakusp ..Vancouver ...Vancouver ...New Westminster •Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Burnaby ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Victoria 274 The University of British Columbia Name. Horns Address. Knight, Hilda Vancouver Knowles, C. Lockhart Vancouver Knowlton, Edna M Vancouver Koshevoy, Himie Vancouver Kyle, Lome S Vancouver Ladner, Frank E New Westminster Laing, Jean L. C Vancouver Lammers, Walter A Vancouver Lane, Melvin W New Westminster Large, F. Margaret Vancouver Larson, Bertil F New Westminster Larson, May E. Vancouver Lawley, J. E. Ryan Vancouver Lawrance, John C North Vancouver Lawson, Martha E Vancouver Lea, Margaret Vancouver Leard, Ralph M. P. New Westminster Leatherdale, Donald A Vancouver Lind, Carl A. A Golden Lind, J. Walter S idney Lind, Lily A Vancouver Little, Archie F Vancouver Lloyd, Douglas Vancouver Lockhart, Myra R Vancouver Lowe, Ronald Sidney Lugsdin, Claribel New Westminster Lundell, Torsten E Revelstoke Madeley, F. St. John H Vancouver Maguire, Helen K Vancouver Makepeace, Ronald A Vancouver Mallory, William R Montreal, P. Q. Malm, Carl A mdK. Britannia Beach Manley, J. Reginald Vancouver Marr, I. Isabelle Vancouver Marshall-Wright, Winnifred A. E Brighouse Martin, Berna A Enderby Martin, D. Gordon New Westminster Martin, Edward E Vancouver Martin, Vera Vancouver Mathers, William W Burnaby Matheson, Malcolm A Mayo, Yukon Territorj Mathews, James D Vancouver Matsuzaki, Susumu Steveston Matthews, Helen M Vancouver Mawby, Vera B Vancouver Mayers, E. Wallace New Westminster Mayse, Shirley I Vancouver Mearns, William D. Vancouver Meilicke, Marian E Vancouver Mellish, Humphrey W Vancouver Meredith, George M Vancouver Millar, Robert D Vancouver Mitchell, M. Ellen Vancouver Moilliet, Theodore K Vavenby Mole, Dorothy S Ladner List of Students 275 Name. Montserrat, Dorothy L Moodie, Elizabeth M Moore, Elizabeth E Moore, Emma W Morley, Frank S Morrison, C. Florence Morrison, George Morrow, James W Moscrop, Margaret A Mossey, Margaret N Mouat, William J Moxham, Kathleen A Muir, Mildred E Muirhead, Margaret O Munday, Otis J Mundie, John A Munn, Emily G Murdoch, Margaret J. M Murdoch, M. Jean Murray, Elmore Murray, Grace W Murray, Mae Murray, Mary K Myers, Dorothy I McAlister, Louise M McBay, John McBride, Clarke F McCague, Mary L McCall, R. Joseph McCallum, Albert D MacCallum, Mary McCharles, Donalda M McColl, Marjorie McConnachie, Mae T. W. .. McCormick, C. Marjorie K. McDonald, A. Ruth MacDonald, Catherine Macdonald, John L McDonald, Mabel L Macdonald, Marian E McDonald, M. Frances MacDonald, Wilfred J MacDonald, William R McEwen, Enid C McEwen, Norman R. McEwen, Theodore S McGinness, John H. MacGregor, Harold T Mcintosh, Edith J Maclver, Dorothy MacKay, Clifford H McKay, Dorothy E MacKay, J. Fraser McKee, G. Eleanor MacKenzie, Donald A Home Address. ...Vancouver ...New Westminster ...Vancouver ..Nanaimo ... Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...New Westminster ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Ganges ...New Westminster ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...New Westminster ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver •Burnaby ...Vancouver • Vancouver • Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Keremeos ..Agassiz ...Vancouver ...North Vancouver ... Vancouver ...New Westminster ... Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ... Vancouver ... Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Ruskin ...New Westminster ...Hatzic ...New Westminster ...Eburne ..Vancouver ... Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver Vancouver ...Kamloops ...Vancouver ...Vancouver 276 The University of British Columbia Name. Home Address. McKenzie, Francis J .Vancouver McKie, Marion C Vancouver MacKinnon, Peter E Revelstoke MacKnight, Wilfred T Vancouver McLarty, Robert L Vancouver McLean, John F Vancouver MacLean, Lachlan M Vancouver McLean, Mary E Vancouver McLellan, Marion C Vancouver MacLeod, Audrey L North Vancouver McLeod, Beulah H Vancouver McLeod, Jessie M Vancouver McLeod, J. Lome Van Anda McLeod, Katherine Vancouver McLeod, Kenneth A Vancouver MacLeod, Margaret P. Dundarave McNab, Zora Waldo MacPherson, Donald W Vancouver McQuillan, Henry C Courtenay McRae, D. Fraser Vancouver MacRae, Duncan G Vancouver McRae, Roderick B Vancouver MacSween, Allan J North Vancouver McVicar, John S Vancouver McWhinnie, Sarah K Vancouver McWilliams, Harold C Vancouver McWilliams, Kenneth R Vancouver Nakano, Isao A Cumberland Naylor, Harold S Vancouver Nelson, Lewis H Vancouver Newlands, Patricia Oswego, Oregon Nicholson, Laurence J Vancouver Nomoto, Kyuichi Vancouver North, Walter E Armstrong Oates, Creswell J Vancouver O'Connor, Aileen J Britannia Beach Osborne, Rhuna Vancouver Owens, Frances M. M Vancouver Palmer, Arthur B Vancouver Palmer, Donald D Vancouver Palmer, E. Irene Vancouver Papin, Patricia L. F New Westminster Parker, Clifford F. Vancouver Parker, Eric G Vancouver Parker, Hugh Vancouver Parker, Jack R Vancouver Parker, Jerrold Vancouver Parkin, Gertrude E North Vancouver Parnham, Helen R Cumberland Parr, John W New Westminster Parsons, George R Vancouver Parsons, Phyllis B. M New Westminster Partridge, Margaret E Vancouver Paterson, Marjorie F Vanderhoof Paulson, P. Edwin New Westminster List of Students 277 Name. Pearson, Jack M. Peel, Marjorie F Pennykid, Archibald W. . Petrie, Isabel Philpott, Margaret S Pigott, Arnold D Pigou, Elfrida M Pike, Albert E Piatt, Dorothy Poole, Louise E Preston, Madeleine E. M. Pritchard, Hubert D Pronick, Natalia A. Purdy, Frances I Read, John R Reid, Katherine B Retallack, Henry R Ricardo, W. Crawley Richardson, Jack Richardson, Laurence R, Rigney, Irene B. Rindal, Kaare Ritchie, Agnes C Roberts, Hesketh Robertson, Bessie T Robinson, E. Lapage Robinson, Frances E Rosenbaum, Dorothy A. ... Ross, John F Ross, Kathleen M Rossiter, Philip D Royce, Gladys Rutherford, Donald H Rutherford, J. Murdoch ... Rutledge, Howard A. Samis, Bruce C Sanders, Gislie E Sangster, Marion C Sangster, Robert C Savage, John P Savage, William F Selby, Cyril C Selfe, Olive F Shilvock, Winston A Sievers, Harland L Simmonite, Stella A Sinclair, Hilda M Skinner, Doris Smeltzer, Gladys Smith, Alice M Smith, Cyril H Smith, Frank A Smith, Marion W Smith, Maxine E Smith, Norma F Home Address. .Vancouver ...Vancouver ..Burnaby ...Vancouver New Westminster ...Vancouver ..North Vancouver Vancouver ..Vancouver Port Hammond . Vancouver ..Grindrod Vancouver ...Vancouver Vancouver Vancouver ...Vancouver Vernon ..Vancouver ..Vancouver .Vancouver Vancouver Vancouver ..Vancouver Vancouver . Vancouver New Westminster Vancouver . Vancouver Vancouver ...Oliver ..Vancouver Vancouver ..Revelstoke ..Vancouver Vancouver Vancouver. ... Vancouver Vancouver ..Vancouver ..Vancouver . Kimberley Vancouver Vancouver .... Victoria ..North Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ..Matsqui ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver ...Vancouver 278 The University of British Columbia Name. Home Address. Smith, Phyllis G. B Vancouver Smith, Ronald N Vancouver Smith, W. Cameron „ Vancouver Smith, Wilbert B Vancouver Smyth, Roberta L Vancouver Snedden, Kathleen M Vancouver Stanley, Beatrice M Vancouver Staples, Edwin P Creston Stearman, Renita M Vancouver Stelmaschuk, Michael Vancouver Stevens, Sylvia M Vancouver Stewart, Beatrice J Vancouver Stewart, Doris W Vancouver St. John, David M Vancouver Strachan, Adeline J Vancouver Straight, Harold L Vancouver Streight, Jack M New Westminster Sugamori, Patricia H Aldergrove Summers, Muriel L Vancouver Sutherland, Donald F Vancouver Sutherland, Dorothy E Vancouver Sutherland, Lillian M Victoria Swain, Lyle A Vancouver Sweeting, Alma T Vancouver Tamura, Kathuno Port Haney Taylor, John R. Vancouver Teeple, Charles C. Vancouver Telford, Jean R Vancouver Terry, Norman K Vancouver Thompson, E. Roland New Westminster Thompson, G. Morrin Vancouver Thompson, Phyllis P Cranbrook Timmins, Talosa V Vancouver Tingley, Rettie Vancouver Tipping, Vera L Vancouver Toll, Harold J New Westminster Tough, William J Vancouver Tourtellotte, Lois M Vancouver Trites, Helen L Vancouver Turin, Alexandra Vancouver Turner, George H. R Vancouver Utsumi, Kiku Mission City Van Allen, Harry M Vancouver Vance, Earl J Vancouver Vandervoort, Walter D Vancouver Vollum, Clarence Vancouver Wakely, C. Verna L Vancouver Wallace, William D Fernie Ward, Gordon O. Vancouver Webb, Kathleen S Heffley Creek Wentworth, Charles F Brookline, Mass. Westmacott, Tom R Vancouver Whalen, John J ...Vancouver Wheeler, Marjorie A .Vancouver Whyte, Jean _ Vancouver List of Students 279 Name. Home Address. Wilders, Donald C. L Vancouver Wilders, Isobel Vancouver Wiles, Gordon A Burnaby Wilson, F. Lloyd Vancouver Wilson, James R Vancouver Wilson, John A Vancouver Wilson, W. George Vancouver Wolfe, Paul B Vancouver Wong, W. Yin Vancouver Woodbury, Charles P Vancouver Wright, Vernon S Vancouver Wylie, Dorothy E Vancouver Wyness, Enid S Vancouver Yasuda, Toyoyoshl Vancouver Yip, K. Dock Vancouver Young, Alfred B Burnaby Young, John T Vancouver Young, William D Vancouver Zarrelli, Elvira E Vancouver Conditioned Bachman, Florence H Vancouver Baird, Electa L Vancouver Berry, Jean B .•. Vancouver Burns, T. Michael Calgary, Alta. Cameron, William F Vancouver Cooke, Jean E. M Vancouver Cowlard, Reginald L Vancouver Coyle, Craig M Vancouver Cutler, Genevieve K Vancouver Dorchester, Frank D. M Altamont Durkin, Peter J Nakusp Evans, Alfred A Vancouver Fleming, Elva Z Vancouver Ford, Graydon Vancouver Freedman, Harry C Vancouver Gill, Arthur T Cranbrook Grant, Hugh New Westminster Harris, Thomas O. D New Denver Hulbert, Ethel M Sardis Hussey, Violet M Vancouver Jamieson, Grace A. Vancouver Lee, Evelyn G Vancouver Mason, John A Vancouver Morrow, Alice I. Vancouver McCallum, William M Vancouver McDonald, James T Vancouver Mclntyre, Theodore J Vancouver McLaughlin, Nancy A. R Vancouver MacLean, Angus H Vancouver McLean, Edwin G. Edmonton, Alta. McLellan, Alice E Vancouver MacNaughton, Ewart R Oliver Oliver, Jean R Vancouver Robertson, Douglas K Vancouver 280 The University of British Columbia Name, Home Address. Ross, Walter Dewdney Selder, William J Vancouver Shelly, Margaret Vancouver Shortreed, Elva E. M ;.._New Westminster Topper, E. Mabel Mission City Ullock, John Vancouver Wilson, C. Margaret A Vancouver Second Year Full Undergraduates Acorn, Jessie I Vancouver Alexander, Kenneth F Fernie Archibald, Reginald M Vancouver Ashby, Barbara M Vancouver Baker, Maurice G Vancouver Baker, Russell K Vancouver Ballentine, George Vancouver Ballentine, Helen M Vancouver Barr, Alice J Vancouver Beall, Geoffrey New Westminster Bedford, Margaret M Salmon Arm Bell, Helen V Hollyburn Bennett, Ruth M Vancouver Birch, Robert H New Westminster Black, Mildred M. C Vancouver Bolton, Lorraine D Vancouver Boothroyd, Gordon G Surrey Bowen, Marjorie M Vancouver Bowman, E. Annie Vernon Brazier, Charles W. Vernon Brennan, W. Earle Vancouver Bridgman, Erica M North Vancouver Broatch, Andrew L. Calgary, Alta. Bruce, Winnie M Vancouver Burch, Arthur F Vancouver Bush, Dora M Chilliwack Campbell, Marion I Abbotsford Campbell, Mary E Vancouver Chalmers, Thomas M Burnaby Chapman, Maxine F Trail Chappell, John G Vancouver Clayton, John N. C Vancouver Coates, A. Carol Vancouver Colledge, M. Elaine Vancouver Collier, Sally I Chilliwack Conlan, John R Vancouver Connor, Earle C Vancouver Coope, Margaret Berkeley, Calif. Cornish, Naomi H :. Hollyburn Cornwall, George L Vancouver Crawford, Muriel M Stewart Creighton, George L. D Vancouver Crosby, Helen J Vancouver Crowe, M. Loraine Vancouver List of Students 281 Name Home Address Cupit, Ernest H Vancouver Curtis, James D North Vancouver Daniels, Dorothy L Sardis Davis, Beatrice E Vancouver Dawley, George E Victoria Dee, Isabel M Victoria Dewar, Dorothy G Revelstoke Dickinson, Farley B Chilliwack . Dow, Marion E Vancouver Dowler, David R Vancouver Downing, Dorothy M Vancouver Duckering, Margaret G Vancouver Duncan, Campbell Vancouver Dunn, James New Westminster Edwards; Howard I Vancouver Elliott, E. N. Rhodes West Summerland Fawcett, Fairvan C Vancouver Fenner, J. May Vancouver Fish, C. Morrison Langley Prairie Fisher, John F Eburne Freeman, Harry Vancouver GareschS, Cecilia M Victoria Garratt, H. Jean Vancouver Gaudin, Melvin L New Westminster Gilbert, Ernest W Ladner Gilley, H. Frances New Westminster Goard, Dean H Vancouver Grant, Jessie M. C Vancouver Grant, Marion R Vancouver Gray, Kenneth R ^^ Vancouver Gray, Roland C. V New Westminster Grossman, Peter F Chilliwack Hale, John S North Vancouver Hall, Gordon W Kelowna Hallonquist, Frank W New Westminster Hanes, F. E. Evelyn North Vancouver Hardy, Ella New Westminster Hardy, Walter T Vancouver Harris, Irene M West Summerland Hart, Harold W Vancouver Hartley, Basil S. S , Vancouver Harvey G. Lloyd Vancouver Harvie, M. Muriel Vancouver Hay, Letitia A Vancouver Helliwell, Hilary R. B Vancouver Henderson, E. Ruth Vancouver Henderson, Jean A. B .Vancouver Hickman, W. Henry Lavington Hill, Dor
- Library Home /
- Search Collections /
- Open Collections /
- Browse Collections /
- UBC Publications /
- The University of British Columbia Calendar
Open Collections
UBC Publications
Featured Collection
UBC Publications
The University of British Columbia Calendar 1928
jpg
Page Metadata
Item Metadata
| Title | The University of British Columbia Calendar |
| Publisher | Vancouver : [University of British Columbia] |
| Date Issued | 1928 |
| Subject |
University of British Columbia |
| Geographic Location |
Vancouver (B.C.) |
| Genre |
Periodicals |
| Type |
Text |
| FileFormat | application/pdf |
| Language | English |
| Notes | Titles in chronological order: Annual Calendar of the McGill University College of British Columbia (1909 - 1914) ; Calendar of the University of British Columbia (1915 - 1919) ; Calendar University of British Columbia (1920 - 1922) ; The University of British Columbia Calendar (1923 - 1964) ; UBC Calendar (1963 - 1968) ; The University of British Columbia 69/70 Fifty-Fifth Session ; The University of British Columbia 70/71 Fifty-Sixth Session ; The University of British Columbia Fifty-Seventh Session Calendar 1971/72 ; The University of British Columbia Fifty-Eighth Session Calendar 1972/73 ; The University of British Columbia Fifty-Ninth Session Calendar 1973-4 ; The University of British Columbia Vancouver, Canada Sixtieth Session Calendar 1974/5 ; The University of British Columbia Vancouver/Canada Sixty-First Session Calendar 1975-76 ; 1976-1977 The University of British Columbia Sixty-Second Session Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1977/78 Sixty-Third Session Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 64th Session 1978/1979 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 65th Session 1979/1980 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 66th Session 1980-1981 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 66th Session 1981-82 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 68th Session 1982-83 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 69th Session 1983-84 Calendar ; UBC 1984/85 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 71st Session 1985-86 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 72nd Session 1986-87 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 73rd Session 1987-88 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 74th Session 1988-89 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 75th Session 1989-90 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 76th Session 1990-91 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 77th Session 1991-92 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 78th Session 1992-93 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 79th Session 1993-94 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1994/95 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1995/96 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1997/98 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1998/99 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1999/2000 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 2000/2001 Calendar ; 2001/2002 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2003/04 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2004/2005 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2005/2006 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2006/07 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2007/08 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2008/09. |
| Identifier | LE3 .B8 LE3_B8_1928-29 |
| Collection |
University Publications |
| Source | Original Format: University of British Columbia. Archives |
| Date Available | 2016-06-22 |
| Provider | Vancouver : University of British Columbia Library |
| Rights | Images provided for research and reference use only. Permission to publish, copy, or otherwise use these images must be obtained from The University of British Columbia Enrolment Services: direct inquiries to www.students.ubc.ca/calendar |
| CatalogueRecord | http://resolve.library.ubc.ca/cgi-bin/catsearch?bid=1209095 |
| DOI | 10.14288/1.0169710 |
| AggregatedSourceRepository | CONTENTdm |
Download
- Media
- calendars-1.0169710.pdf
- Metadata
- JSON: calendars-1.0169710.json
- JSON-LD: calendars-1.0169710-ld.json
- RDF/XML (Pretty): calendars-1.0169710-rdf.xml
- RDF/JSON: calendars-1.0169710-rdf.json
- Turtle: calendars-1.0169710-turtle.txt
- N-Triples: calendars-1.0169710-rdf-ntriples.txt
- Original Record: calendars-1.0169710-source.json
- Full Text
- calendars-1.0169710-fulltext.txt
- Citation
- calendars-1.0169710.ris